Home

U3700 Series User's Guide

Contents

1. ff RI ei ea 1 DE F 1 aC 3 Ge Ge D e Gil LE fi D Gems em 7 m eO GIGI e Qe i i u Figure 3 7 Connecting the CAL Signal IMPORTANT Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of at least 5 minutes For more information on how to perform autocalibration refer to 4 3 1 Calibration 7 Press the SYSTEM key of this instrument and select Calibration from the soft menu 8 Select Calibrate ALL on the next soft menu It takes approximately two minutes to complete the autocalibration 9 Check that no error message is displayed at the end of the calibration MEMO If any error message is displayed refer to 9 MAINTENANCE Turning off the power supply 10 Press the power switch on the front panel The power supply and the power light turn off 3 12 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter describes the functions of each part on the panels and screen and describes the basic operations of this instrument by using measurement examples 41 Panel and Screen Descriptions This section describes the names and functions of each part on the front panel s
2. au 8 1 U3700 Series User s Guide List of Illustrations Title Page A 7 Spurious Response A 9 A 8 Occupied Bandwidth Rod qu 10 9 Bandwidth Selectivity A 10 A 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty rs 11 11 MSW 12 2 U3700 Series User s Guide LIST OF TABLES No Title Page 3 1 Standard Accessories essei eet rrt tl epa s EROSEN OET EN OER ER ese 3 2 3 2 Option ACCESS O11 GS 3 2 3 3 OPTIO ACCeSSOFIOS iussi en iilii ie rin pine Petar oed tees ea edt nds SF eo Eire Hee 3 2 3 4 Power Requirement E A 3 4 4 1 USB Memory Devices Whose Operation with this Instrument has Already Checked 4 29 5 1 Character allocation table io It e REOR fb E Ea VERI 5 22 6 1 GPIB Interface Functions iuit tei 6 4 6 2 Connection of IOBASE T Cross over Cables 6 7 6 3 Connection of IOBASE T Straight Cables sess 6 7 6 4 Trace Point Specification Codes 6 63 6 5 Binary Data Output Format Specified Code sse 6 63 6 6 Ieri saa 6 64 6 7 Absolute Value
3. 6 105 610320 ME 6 106 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 107 7 cjus MJ 7 1 7 1 U3741 Performance Specifications 7 2 7 1 1 7 2 7 1 2 7 3 7 1 3 7 3 7 1 4 Amplitude 7 4 7 1 5 Dynami R nge asa qa MINUS 7 4 7 1 6 Input and Output 7 5 7 2 U3751 Performance Specifications 7 6 7 2 1 za ea AEE E eee ey 7 6 7 7 7 2 3 P siet pt 7 1 7 2 4 Amplitude dei vU a ub erat bn EE 7 8 7 2 5 Dy ami R nge Tr 7 8 7 2 6 OUT and CDL 7 9 7 3 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 7 10 7 3 1 UC an NN Ma E EE 7 10 7 3 2 ngo MT uma 7 11 7 3 3 Zump de os n 7 11 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy M 7 12 7 3 5 Dynami Range 7 13 7 3 6 c 7 14 7 4 General Specifications 7 15 7 5 en 7 16 7 5 1 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Can be Installed only in the 03741 7 16 7 5 2 Option 15 75 Q o 7 17 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequ
4. u1 JO oy 8uguo osneo p sn suondo pue s onpoid ur ML juoumnjsut Jo suorsu urp eu1ojxo SMOYS SULMBIP 811 ALON C aogggaag SLT LEE 1 u ummnsur JO oy 8uguo osneo posn suondo pue s onpoid ML juoumnsut Jo suorsu ourp SMOYS BULMBIP 8141 ALON 0 0200 0 05040204040 905000690205050529800690 909090909 9 0 0 009020 9 9 9 000090002 2000009 1020909090008 020 O900600000009090 20050090900090 12592220206959256 50050950595929696 MEARE Ae 808 LEE SLT EXT 2 SNIA Vz ANITLNO ILLEN u1 JO oy 8uguo osneo p sn suondo pue s onpoid ur ML juoumnjsut Jo suorsu urp eu1ojxo SMOYS SULMBIP 811 ALON LEE SLT EXT 3 ONIMVUG
5. Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Detector Mode Trace DET NRM POS NEG SMP DET 0 NRM AVG 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Mode Trace B DETB NRM POS NEG SMP DETB 0 NRM AVG 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Trace DETC NRM POS NEG SMP DETC 0 NRM AVG 1 POS 2 NEG 3 SMP 4 AVG Detector Mode Auto DETA lt n gt ON OFF DETA lt n gt 0 OFF 1 ON Detector Average Mode DETAVG RMS VIDEO DETAVG 0 VIDEO 1 RMS Select Active Trace TRACESEL TRA TRB TRC TRACESEL 0 TRA 1 TRB 2 TRC Trace A I O ASCH TAA DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAA DDDDD lt DLM gt x TRP 1 TRP 1 Trace A I O Binary TBA 2Bytes TRP TBA 2BytesxTRP Trace I O ASCII TAB DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAB DDDDD lt DLM gt x TRP 1 TRP 1 Trace B I O Binary TBB 2BytesxTRP TBB 2BytesxTRP Trace I O ASCH TAC DDDDD lt DLM gt x TAC DDDDD lt DLM gt x TRP 1 TRP 1 Trace C I O Binary TBC 2BytesxTRP TBC 2BytesxTRP Trace Output Fornat 16bits Integer FORMI 161 Integer FORM2 IEEE 3261 Float FORM3 IEEE 326115 Float FORMA U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 7 Pass Fail 6 8 7 Pass Fail Function Pass Fail Judgement Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format ON OFF PFC Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON Judgement Result PFJ OPF 0 Pass 4 Error 1 Fail Limit 1 2 Fail Limit 2 3
6. 5 17 5 45 2 Channel Preset 5 17 Average PAUSE CONT 5 36 5 38 2 Channels Viewer 5 17 5 40 5 43 ZBI CIV REUS 5 62 5 63 5 44 3GPP DL Modulation 5 17 Average POWOE 5 25 5 29 dedecore ERE 5 62 5 63 Average START STOP 5 36 5 38 gt RENE 5 43 5 45 5 39 5 43 ROREM 5 43 5 46 5 44 A B 3G 5 43 5 46 Averaging ON OFF 5 25 5 26 ING Pee lan n ee eons 5 25 5 30 5 27 5 28 2 2022 010 000 00000 5 43 5 46 5 29 5 30 ATA WO upas 5 72 5 73 5 32 AMPLITUDE 5 62 gt 5 43 5 45 Annotations ON OFF 5 7 5 9 5 43 5 45 APPLI 2224 2 2 200 01000000000 5 17 B A C 5 43 5 46 Pu pe RR 5 62 Bands Definition 5 26 5 33 ATT AUTO MNL nn 5 62 5 34 Attenuation 0 dB 5 62 B DE SSB itor een rette 5 43 5 46 LUCR 5 72 5 73 Black and White 5 8 5 12 Auto Inc Index eee 5 8 5 13 Blank te oerte 5 43 5 44 Auto Inc ON OFF
7. 5 47 Delta ON OFF eese 5 47 Delta Ref Line ON OFF 5 55 Delta to CF 5 54 Delta to CF Step 5 54 Delta to Mkr Step 5 54 Delta to Span 5 54 Destination and Phone Number for 9 3 Det Avg Mode RMS Video 5 43 Details of the three status registers 6 15 Detector 5 43 Detector AUTO MNL 5 43 Display us aaa eite ete Rp es 6 33 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 31 5 50 5 65 5 59 5 48 5 48 5 56 5 45 5 45 5 45 U3700 Series User s Guide Display Line ON OFF Display List Display REL ABL ABR Disposal and Recycle Dynamic Each Item acces Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table Edit Corr Factor Edit Date Time eee Edit Limit Lines Enable Register Error Messages Event Enable Register Event Example of Remote Control Programs Example Program for Screen Image Output Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used EXAMPLE REMOTE CONTR
8. 6 37 6 8 12 Measurement 6 38 6 8 13 onn e 6 41 6 8 14 E nai 6 42 6 8 15 i ee O 6 46 6 8 16 Calibration MR P 6 46 6 8 17 Saver Recall 6 47 6 8 18 Fil asua 6 49 6 8 19 6 49 6 8 20 luc 6 50 6 8 21 GP IB UT Y 6 50 6 8 22 e M N 6 51 6 8 23 gyro 6 52 6 8 24 M 6 53 6 9 Example of Remote Control Programs 6 54 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control esses 6 54 6 9 1 1 Reading the GPIB Control Library for Visual Basic 6 54 6 9 1 2 Program Examples Using VB 6 54 6 9 1 3 Sample Programs for Reading Data 6 57 6 9 1 4 Sample Programs for Inputting or Outputting Trace Data 6 62 6 9 1 5 Example Program for Screen Image Output 6 69 6 9 1 6 Example Program Which Uses the TS Take Sweep Command 6 70 6 9 1 7 Example Programs Which Use the Status Byte 6 71 6 9 1 8 Program Examples Using the LA
9. 6 36 HRMFND OFF nere 6 40 6 36 HRMEND 6 40 aaa aa apapuy aquya a 6 35 HS HE 6 27 6 35 HZ 6 54 MEL 6 35 6 52 MELO 6 35 IMQGSP aaa aqhayay 6 26 MELC 6 36 a 6 40 6 36 IMES3 6 39 MIS IRURE REOR 6 38 6 39 hu dE 6 35 IMLST Suasana 6 40 6 39 59 6 40 6 36 6 39 MKEST oS 6 36 IMMDE 22 2 7 lt 3 6 39 MKMODE a 6 36 IMMREE 6 39 MKROB J 4 rri 6 36 IMMRES eee 6 39 MKROJB eere 6 36 IMODR aasan a aun tH T 6 39 6 35 6 40 MKSPOS eere 6 38 IMSAME rester rere 6 40 MKS WID 6 38 INSTR 6 51 6 38 IP RST ipao tet eed 6 51 MKSYDYJI eR 6 38 KE sena edenda tee 6 54 MKSYLA nne 6 38 EARN notet ite eem eie ES 6 34 MKSYLB u kau p Dee 6 38 6 34 nere 6 36 LIMAPOS eiecti nus 6 33 lu inal narnia 6 35 LIMAS ti
10. 6 47 D EE 6 25 FACH 6 25 FACHO ottenere renes 6 25 FACHON 6 25 FACHOON 6 25 6 25 FBCH intet ree 6 25 825 6 25 RE 6 26 6 25 6 48 FILEFORMAT eee 6 48 FILEMBDIA eR 6 48 FINPMD 52562 tese 6 25 entrent tente 6 41 J 6 41 FMMODEY eren 6 41 FO 6 25 eniin mires 6 25 FS 6 25 6 34 6 36 GDATA 6 50 6 6 50 6 51 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index GEPOS 6 29 EMTBINP tertie 6 33 GTSLP H 6 29 LMTBINT 6 34 gie HR aan 6 29 26s ein in anes 6 50 GTS WEE usus tees 6 29 6 50 6 29 6 25 6 54 MO MKCS 6 37 HARM 6 40 MIIWMIGS 6 37 HARMNUM s 6 40 M2 MKMKS 6 37 HCDEWM 6 50 M3 MTMES 6 37 6 50 6 37 5 6 40 5255
11. 5 8 5 13 AIG u 5 43 5 44 Auto name Index 5 18 5 20 Calibrate ALL 5 7 5 11 Auto Tune a 5 61 Calibration e 5 7 5 11 Auto name Radix 5 18 5 20 Calibration Corrections ON OFF 5 7 5 11 PRY CTAS Ga HE 5 43 5 44 Calibration F Int Ref 5 7 5 11 5 45 Capture Normz Data 5 55 Average Control 5 25 5 26 Carrier Bandwidth 5 26 5 31 5 27 5 28 5 32 5 29 5 30 5 57 5 32 5 36 Center CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 5 38 5 39 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 5 57 5 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 1 Menu Index Ch Windows ON OFF 5 26 5 32 Channel Definition 5 26 Channel Input sse 5 57 Channel Position 5 25 Channel Power 5 25 Channel Width 5 25 Channels Config 5 57 Clear 5 47 Clear Others ndn perite 5 47 esc 5 7 Col
12. Condition Event Enable register register register 0 0 gt lt 0 1 1 gt amp 4 1 nl ys nl 6 4 1 n gt amp 4 Y Y p Summary a Condition Register The condition register is always monitoring the status of this instrument That is this register always retains the latest status of this instrument However data cannot be both written into and read from the condition register because the condition register retains data as internal information b Event Register The event register latches and retains statuses from the condition register or retains changes Once this register is set the setting value is kept until it is read by a query or cleared by CLS Data cannot be written into the event register c Enable Register The enable register specifies which bit in the event register is set as an effective status to generate a summary The enable register is ANDed with the event register and the OR of the result is generated as a summary The summary is written into the status byte register Data can be written into the enable register This instrument uses the following three types of status registers Status byte register Standard event register Standard operation status register The arrangement of the status register in this instrument is shown in Figure 6 4 The details of the status register are shown in Figure 6 5 6 13 U3700
13. OFF _ 15 00 dBm lz TG Level 3 TG Level Offset ON OFF 4 TG Freq ON _OFF 5 Normalize 7 Reference 20 ua Line CENTER 1 9000 GHz SPAN 200 0 MHz am RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 uB Performing the normalization MEMO The frequency response errors of accessories used in the measurement such as cables and adapters can be removed by performing the normalization and the accurate measurement can be performed 1 Press Normalize The TG Normz menu is displayed 2 Press Reference Line ON OFF 5 and MHz dBm The Reference Line position at which the normalization is performed is set to 5 dB 3 Press Capture Normz Data The normalization data is acquired based on the set Reference Line position 4 Press Normalize Correction ON OFF The normalization is performed CAUTION If the settings of the center frequency frequency span reference level or level display scale are changed after the normalization is performed the normalization subsequent to this change does not perform cor rectly Re perform the normalization after changing the settings 4 32 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 TG Normz REF 0 00 dBm 1 Capture Hnrmz Data 3 Normalize Correction Ref Line ON OFF 7 Reference 20 line CENTER 1 3000 GHz SPAN 200 0 MHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz 20 ms ATT 10 dB
14. 5 7 5 11 Transportation 9 3 A setas etes 5 43 5 46 TRC B 5 43 5 46 serrana tetris 5 43 5 46 THE BED 5 65 5 66 6 28 TS Take Sweep command 6 70 TV Channel Table Japan A 27 Types of Systems 6 1 U 03741 Performance Specifications 7 2 U3751 Performance Specifications 7 6 nib 6 12 wauu sa 5 62 5 63 6 53 6 106 User Password 5 8 5 12 Using a 3 6 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 4 37 V VBW AUTO MNL rr 5 72 VBW RBW ON OFF 5 72 5 73 5 7 5 9 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 62 5 63 VHE UHER cnet ie teeth rete A 29 Vide atate ani ERE 5 65 5 66 VIEW ult ain eain nada 5 43 5 44 VOUS decas eto 5 62 5 63 cine testes tese tree ert 5 37 5 42 VSWR Measurement 4 59 VSWR ON OFF eere 5 55 5 56 W e ico ded 5 62 5 63 1 7 U3700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 45 W CDMA Channel Power Me
15. 6 3 Reference Line oce rs 5 47 5 48 Setting up the LAN 6 6 Reference Line ON OFF 5 55 5 56 a 5 65 5 69 SETUP ote tercer Ere 3 1 Ref Mark 5 47 5 48 Shift X ON OFF eee 5 65 5 68 5i Shift Y ON OFF 5 65 5 69 efresh 43 5 Show Mask _ 5 26 5 32 Refresh Write 5 43 5 44 Remote Control 5 7 5 10 Show ON OFF 2 2 5 8 5 13 emote Control 2 2 2 2 10 Signal Identification ON OFF 5 57 5 60 I Signal Track 5 47 5 49 Remove File au uk een eese 2 Signal Track ON OFF 5 47 5 49 R ing the C 24 d Slide Screen ON OFF 5 62 5 63 HA E en Slope NEG POS 5 65 5 66 Pile uti tei ees 5 8 5 14 5 18 5 19 2507 LE A Sound na 5 37 5 41 Report HIDES TOW sadassa Ph PI Sound AMIEM mienne 5 37 5 41 Reset Context ies tese beide 5 66 5 71 Santee 5 65 5 66 Resolution o crece ce 5 36 5 4 5 67 Resolution 1 Hz 2 02 5 36 5 40 SPAN 5 61 Resolution 1 kHz 5 36 8 40 4 oo AUT ETT Resolution 10 H 5 36 5 40 5 61 21 poem SPAN RBW ON OFF 5 72 5 73 QNSE 2 SPECIFICATIONS 7 1 Responses to Interface Messages 6 4 Spectrum Analyzer 5 17
16. Filter CENTER 2 10000 GHz SPAN 25 00 MHz RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz ATT 10 00 dB ON OFF Adjacent Channel Power Ref Power 0 89 dBm 814 24 pw BALL Lower Upper Marker Power Marker Power 7 Nyq Roll Off 1 51 15 dB 2 51 88 dB Factor 3 64 71 dB 4 64 66 dB 4 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement The spurious response is measured in frequency bands higher than 30 MHz DUT Y 1 e Examples of measurement specifications Frequency range 9 kHz 150 kHz ea Attenuator el D Gem CED e D o GI Spurious level 150 kHz 30 MHz 30 MHz 1 GHz 1 GHz 12 75 GHz Ina frequency range from 1 8935 GHz to 1 9196 GHz and the 300 kHz RBW the spurious level is 41 dBm or less Setting measurement conditions 1 Press TRACE Detector and Posi HL EN pams DS Be wu D Gub 4 48 Detector is set to Posi perform the spurious measurement Press MEAS1 Spurious and Bands Definition The Spurious Bands table is displayed The cursor is positioned at the start frequency setting text field of frequency band Press 3 0 and MHz The start frequency is set to 30 MHz and the cursor mov
17. 6 92 Subsystem READ 6 92 Subsystem SENSe 6 94 Subsystem SOURce 6 103 Subsystem SYSTem 6 103 Subsystem TRACe 6 104 Subsystem TRIGger 6 105 Subsystem UNIT 6 105 SUD FACE croi eie rtis 5 43 5 45 WCEP scc aterert EISE actrees 6 28 7 3 7 7 7 11 Sweep Mode SGL CNT 5 65 5 66 Sweep Time AUTO MNL 5 72 SYSTEM 5 7 T Table 5 47 5 50 5 52 5 57 5 59 5 65 5 69 Table No 1 23 5 26 5 35 Television Signal Measurement 4 57 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting A 31 1 EE 5 55 6 52 TG Option seen 5 55 TG Freq Offset ON OFF 5 55 Alphabetical Index TG Level 45a ite es 5 55 TG Level Offset ON OFF 5 55 eese erri 5 55 Time ys Time essct 5 66 5 70 Title ahay eren 5 18 5 22 Total Gain RF Path 1 5 7 5 11 Total Gain RF Path 2 5 7 5 11 Total POWER avec an aa inan 5 25 5 28 TRACE 5 43 netiis 6 29 Trace A B C 5 43 5 44 5 45 5 46 5 55 5 56 Trace ite 6 62 Trace Points 501 1001
18. 8 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 1 9 1 1 9 MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE This chapter describes the following matters related to the maintenance of this instrument in order to maintain its designed performance 9 1 Cleaning 9 2 About Calibration 9 3 About Replacement of Limited Life Parts 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument 9 5 Transportation 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 7 List of Error Messages 9 8 In Case of Difficulty 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Cleaning This section describes how to clean this instrument and some matters to note WARNING Turn off the power breaker on the rear panel and extract the power cable from the wall socket to pro tect yourself from electric shock accidents Never attempt to remove the cabinet cover to clean the inside of the instrument Cabinet Cleaning Use the following procedure to clean the cabinet of this instrument Clean the cabinet surface with a soft dry cloth Ifthe surface is not clean enough try again with a cloth soaked in a weakened neutral detergent Then wipe the surface with a soft dry cloth CAUTION Do not allow water to splash into the inside of the instrument Do not use an organic solvent such as benzene toluene xylene or acetone and the cleanser for cleaning They can cause the paint on the cabinet to come off deform or degrade 9 1 U3700 Series User s Guide
19. eere GUIDE 1 5 Round Grid Values ON OFF 5 62 5 64 R R3131 Mode ON OFF 5 7 5 11 S R3162 Mode ON OFF 5 7 5 10 Sample 5 43 5 45 Range FULL WIN 5 25 5 29 er oe UE nd RBW 1 MHz ten 5 72 Broadcestne Pe ik Band 5 72 d Em d M RBW 200 5 72 Save Defaults renee 5 25 5 26 RBW 9 KRZ SR E dept 5 27 5 28 RBW Auto aaa 5 72 5 29 5 30 RBW AUTO MNL 5 72 2 RBW CAL 5 7 5 22 Reading Data 6 57 5 39 gt Reading this SHB Saye Recall 5 onem q 6 47 for Visual Basic 6 54 SCPI Command Reference 6 75 Rear Panel aaa 4 9 Recall 5 18 5 21 SGre 4 7 ecall 18 5 Shot CORDE xa 5 8 5 13 Ref Fred aasan s eene 5 7 5 9 5 50 Ref Freq 10 5 7 5 9 Select Marker 5 47 5 48 Ref Level ode 5 62 5 50 Ref Object iu eee 5 47 5 48 Ref Offset ON OFF aaa 5 62 5 63 2 SERIA T T Ref Power CHN PEAK 5 26 5 32 I z Setting the IP Address 6 8 Ref Disp Lines iecoris 5 65 5 69 Setting up the GPIB
20. 5 43 TRIG Bet aaa renei eiie 5 65 D ANETE NERSE 5 62 User Password 5 8 VBW AUTO MNL e 5 72 VBW RBW ON OFF 5 72 MTSIOI 5 7 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 62 5 65 la 5 43 bug ame 5 62 Volume ees Rss 5 37 5 32 5 34 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 58 5 11 5 46 5 45 5 66 5 50 5 57 5 65 5 35 5 70 5 22 5 11 5 11 5 28 5 44 5 46 5 56 5 11 5 46 5 46 5 46 5 66 5 63 5 12 5 73 5 9 5 63 5 66 5 44 5 63 5 42 5 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 1 Menu Index Window Sweep ON OFF Window Width MESURER maaa Write Protect ON OFF X ABS CF FA a X dB Down 5e eec tee X dB Level nita X Search Domain Y ABS REF DL eere Y Range ON OFF sse Y Search Domain Zero apa h aqu Zoom and Contexts Zoom Position Zoom Width sess 5 6 5 69 5 70 5 70 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 Functional Descriptions 5 2 Functional Descriptions This section describes the fu
21. 5 61 SPAN RBW 5 72 Spectrum Analyzer 5 17 5 73 5 1 Menu Index Spectrum Emission 5 25 Spectrum 5 17 Spectrum eerte 5 17 5 25 Mri 5 57 Start CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 Start CH ON OFF 5 57 Step ATT CAL a 5 7 5 57 Stop CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 Stop CH ON OFF 5 57 5 7 5 43 Subtract 5 43 Sweep Mode SGL CNT 5 65 Sweep Time AUTO MNL 5 72 SYSTEM rH err 5 7 Table 5 47 5 52 5 59 5 69 Table No 2 3 5 26 TO 5 55 TG Freq Offset ON OFF 5 55 TG Level usse eren 5 55 TG Level Offset ON OFF 5 55 TG ON OEE 5 eicere thier ER 5 55 Time vs Time 5 66 ana 5 18 Total Gain RF Path 1 5 7 Total Gain RF Path 2 5 7 Total Power 5 25 TRAGE Zuna ukana q sa 5 43 Trace 5 43 5 45 5 55 Trace Points 501 1001 5 7 TROSA 5 43 TREO SB era ORTI HE 5 43 TRC SO
22. 5 62 5 63 5 29 5 30 LdB diV a 5 62 5 63 5 32 5 36 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF 5 47 5 48 5 38 5 40 dB diy 5 62 5 63 5 43 5 44 110 CS CS IF Band 33 5 45 2 Channel ON OFF 5 17 Average PAUSE CONT 5 36 5 38 2 Channel Preset 5 17 5 40 5 43 2 Channels Viewer 5 17 5 44 5 62 5 63 Average 5 25 5 29 3GPP DL Modulation 5 17 Average START STOP 5 36 5 38 5 dB diV sitet tte tees 5 62 5 63 5 39 5 43 5 44 A Averaging ON OFF 5 25 5 26 te trate tia qua 5 43 5 45 5 27 5 28 5 43 5 46 5 29 5 30 ABSO ANM 5 43 5 46 5 32 About Calibration 9 2 About Replacement of Limited Life B PariS puta hak hast EOS 9 2 nec x 5 43 5 45 Accessories sn 8 2 ND 5 43 5 45 CE 5 25 5 30 m s 5 43 5 46 noter 5 43 5 46 Bands Definition 5 26 5 33 Aufo 5 72 5 73 5 34 AMPLITUDE 5 62 Bandwidth 6 27 Amplit de oerte 7 3 7 7 Basic Measurement 4 13 7 11 Ba
23. Measuring Window Media Medium eene Menu Index MENU MAP Menu ON OFF Menu Operation and Data Entry Message Exchange Message Exchanging Protocol Method of Storing the Instrument rettet a Man Hold Min Max Peak a Min Peak Mkr Step AUTO MNL MET t CE a teet tectum ene 5 69 5 68 5 39 5 68 5 68 5 68 5 68 5 40 5 48 5 48 5 45 5 44 5 45 5 38 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 36 5 39 5 44 5 67 5 15 5 23 5 73 5 14 5 44 5 50 5 50 5 48 U3700 Series User s Guide Mkrto Step nce 5 54 Mkr to Mkr Step eee 5 54 Mkr to Ref 5 54 petiit nhe renes 5 54 Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF 5 37 5 41 Mode FULL CARR 5 26 5 31 Mode Index Value 5 47 5 49 More 1 2 ittis teres 5 7 5 12 5 18 5 20 5 36 5 38 5 40 5 43 5 46 5 47 5 48 5 50 5 52 5 54 5 57 5 60 5 62 5 63 5 72 5 73 N Eu 5 72 5 73 5 43 5 45 Next Band nece neret 5 26 5 35 Next Min Peak 5 47 5 50 5 52 Next Peak 5 47 5 50 Next Peak Left a nnt 5 47 5 50 Next Peak 5 47 5 50
24. 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 2 1 Reads the string between the third comma and the CR Displays the data on the screen RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text amp FrqL 6 Hz amp LvlL 6 vbCrLf RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text amp FrqH amp Hz LvlL 6 vbCrLf Next i DoEvents Next j Example Programs Which Use the Status Byte Example 1 Execute a single sweep and wait until its finished when not using SRQ Example 2 Dim state As Integer Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa SI Call ibwrt spa OPR8 Call ibwrt spa CLS Call ibwrt spa SI Do Call ibwrt spa STB Rdbuff Space 8 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff state Val Rdbuff DoEvents Loop Until state And 128 Performs Device Clear Turns the single sweep mode on Enables the sweep end bit of the operation status register Clears the status byte Begins sweeping Requests the value of the status byte Reserve a maximum of 8 bytes including the delimiter Reads the data Converts the character string into numeric values Checks the loop for other events currently taking place Exits from the loop if the sweep end bit is set to 1 Reading the peak frequency and level at the end of a single sweep when using SRQ Dim boardID As Integer Dim I As Integer Dim res As Integer Dim CFLEV As String boardID 0 Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa SI Call ibwrt spa CLS
25. ON OFF TG Level TG Level Offset ON OFF TG Freq Offset ON OFF OPT76 Normalize Capture Normz Data Reference Line ON OFF Normalize Correction ON OFF Trace A B C VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF TG ON OFF ON Turns on a tracking generator OFF Turns off the tracking generator TG Level Sets the output level of the tracking generator Setting range 0 dBm to 30 dBm OPT77 0 dBm to 60 dBm OPT76 TG Level Offset ON OFF Switches the TG level offset function ON and OFF ON The offset level can be set in the range of 0 100 0 dB The relationship between the displayed TG level set TG level and offset is as follows Displayed TG level Set TG level Offset OFF Cancels the offset function TG Freq Offset ON OFF Adds the offset frequency to the TG output frequency It functions with OPT76 ON The offset frequency can be set in the range of 0 Hz to GHz and the resolution of approx 1 kHz The output frequency is up to 3 GHz even if adding the offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Normalize Displays the TG Normz menu Capture Normz Data Acquires the normalization data at the position of the reference line Normalize Correction ON OFF ON Normalizes the measurement data by using the normalization data Only trace A can be normalized OFF Cancels the normalization function U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 12 TG Option
26. dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 140 dBm to 40 dBm 140 dBm to 20 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy 7 3 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency 20 MHz Amplitude 20 dBm Accuracy 0 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 0 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 4 dB Total level accuracy After performing the automatic calibration Image Suppression Off Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Off Input attenu ator 10 dB REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 C to 30 C RF Input 1 0 8 dB 0 Frequency 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 dB Band1 Frequency 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 1 5 dB Frequency 9 kHz to 10 MHz RF Input 2 0 8 dB 0 Frequency 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 dB Band1 Frequency 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 3 0 dB Band2 Frequency 7 8 GHz to 14 573 GHz 3 5 dB Band3 Frequency 14 4288 GHz to 28 0 GHz 4 5 dB Band4 Frequency 27 8 GHz to 31 8 GHz U3771 4 5 dB Band4 Frequency 27 8 GHz to 43 GHz U3772 7 12 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 5 Dynamic Range 7 3 5 Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB 40 Preamplifi
27. SBnPPGSGL 6 31 E 6 30 AT diede 6 30 ATMIN 6 54 AUNITS SC TS eerie etel teet cet e ET ud 6 51 6 51 6 51 2m 6 52 6 52 BDLB 6 51 BMP eee E 6 51 neh 6 27 CALCA LL sS 6 31 CALCB 6 31 CALCE 6 31 CAPND 6 19 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index CARRBS i ann a anqa apus 6 44 6 6 48 CDB 6 39 6 25 6 25 i5 ttt tien ie 6 25 CHCALCI EE 6 26 2 wcities eatin 6 26 neinir 6 26 eere 6 26 CHCONJA sete rre eR EE 6 26 CHOON 6 26 6 26 CHEIN E 6 26 6 47 6 48 6 48 CLDDBBE ierit ertet its 6 48 CLFRBE EEs 6 48 CLGAIN 6 47 CLPBW 6 47 6 47 6 48 CN 6
28. 9 1 2 Cleaning of Other Parts 9 1 2 9 2 9 3 9 2 Cleaning of Other Parts Use appropriate caution to protect this instrument from dust WARNING Remove dust periodically from wall sockets and power connector plugs Dust that is wet with humidity may cause tracking that could cause a fire The rear panel is equipped with an exhaust cooling fan and the side and the bottom panels have exhaust vents Keep these vents clean for sufficient exhaustion If dust piled on the vents causes exhaustion to become poor the temperature inside will rise and the instrument will not work cor rectly About Calibration Calibration should be performed periodically to prevent performance deterioration or to adjust chronological performance changes The recommended period of regular calibration is once a year Calibration is done at the factory site For more information call a sales representative About Replacement of Limited Life Parts Table 9 1 lists the proper limited life parts of this instrument The table also shows the number of operations for the expected life spans of each of these parts to suggest a recommended time of replacement in terms of the number of times of operations For replacement call the Service Center Advantest Customer Support ACS Note that the life span can become shorter than expected depending on the operation environment frequency of use and storage environment MEMO The table shows the e
29. ADVANTEST ADVANTEST CORPORATION U3700 Series User s Guide MANUAL NUMBER 8440185 00 Applicable Models U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 2004 ADVANTEST CORPORATION First printing November 20 2004 All rights reserved Printed in Japan Certificate of Conformity C Spectrum Analyzer This is to certify that U3700 Series instrument type designation complies with the provisions of the EMC Directive 89 336 All of these factors are revised 91 263 92 31 93 68 in accordance with EN61326 and Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC All of these factors are revised by 93 68 in accordance with EN61010 ADVANTEST Corp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Tokyo Japan Europe GmbH Munich Germany 3700 05 No CR B00 AEA d RUE ST AB SER BUE q Y SET rof n ers Bee AES BEANS This document is made for Chinese Administration Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic formation Products unofficially called China RoHS Q xk PHO OLOOKETT 1 mrs We P dn RN E y Ut A7 Fe Cd
30. End Sub Example 2 Public Sub InitSA SCkTCPProtocol 5025 REN Initialize Spectrum Analyzer Sets IP Address of SA Sets protocol to TCP Sets port no 5025 of SA Connects to SA s port tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits connection amp vbLf Remote enable tcpClient SendData CLS vbLf Resets status register tcpClient SendData RST vbLf End Sub 6 72 Resets this instrument Example 3 Example 4 Example 5 Example 6 Example 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Brief setting of Spectrum Analyzer Set Center freq to 1 9984 GHz Span to 10 MHz and Reference level to 10 dBm Public Sub SASetting tcpClient SendData 1 9984GZ 6 vbLf tcpClient SendData SP 10MZ amp vbLf tcpClient SendData RL 10DB amp vbLf End Sub Read the setting value of Spectrum Analyzer Public Sub ReadSASetting CF Space 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient SendData CF 6 vbLf Reads request of center freq Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData CF Reads setting value SP Space 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient SendData SP amp vbLf Reads request of span freq Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData SP Reads setting value Display setti
31. Read the Power Spectral Density for Channel Power Measurement 1 READ CHPower DENSity Power per Herz Read Harmonics Results 6 92 1 2 3 4 5 READ HARMon ics number of rows marker index Integer frequency Frequency amplitude Amplitude amplitude difference Relative amplitude Function description Read the Intermodulation Results array SCPI command 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 READ IM Parameter U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks number ofrows Lower Frequency Marker Index Integer Lower Frequency Marker Number Integer Lower Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Upper Frequency Marker Index Integer Upper Frequency Marker Number Integer Upper Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Intermod ulation Product Amplitude Lower Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Upper Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Read the Intermodulation Gap 1 READ IM DELTa Frequency Read the Intermodulation Frequency Reference 1 READ IM REFerence Frequency Read OBW Results 1 2 READ OBW Occupied Bandwidth Frequency Frequency Error Frequency Read Spectrum Emission Mask Results 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 READ SEMask number of rows channel enabled 10 channel start frequency Frequency channel stop frequency Frequ
32. Enable Power Average Measurement CONFigure AV Power Enable Channel Power Measurement CONFigure CHPower Enable Harmonics Measurement CONFigure HARMonics Enable Intermodulation Measurement CONFigure IM Disable All Measurements CONFigure NORMal Enable Occupied Band Width Measure CONFigure OBW ment Enable Spectrum Emission Mask Measure CONFigure SEMask ment Enable Spurious Measurement CONFigure SPURious Enable Total Power Measurement CONFigure TOTPower 6 10 3 4 Subsystem COUPle Enable All Auto Coupling COUPle 91 ALL NONE ALL NONE 1 COUPIe 6 10 3 5 Subsystem DISPlay Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Title DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA 1 String String 1 DISPlay ANNota tion TITLe DATA Preset Dual Channel Viewer DISPlay DUAL channel PRESet Enable Dual Channel Viewer Mode DISPlay DUALchannel STATe 1 ON OFF 10 1 DISPlay DUALchannel STATe Enable Normalize Correction DISPlay NTData STATe 2 Trace index 10 1 DISPlay NTData 1 STATe ON OFF Set Frequency Offset DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Context index Frequency X SCALe OFFSet 22 Frequency 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OFFSet 6 85 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Enable Frequency Offset SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OF
33. Gm Game B am 2 Press FREQUENCY 2 0 MHz SPAN 1 MHz TG and TG ON OFF ON The center frequency is set to 20 MHz the frequency span is set to 1 MHz and the TG option is set to ON 4 37 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 3 Press EXT CFG Ref Disp Lines and Reference Line ON OFF ON The reference line is displayed on the screen Display REF 0 00 dBm 1 Display 10 0 dBi aum REN 1 ON OFF 4110 40 dBm 2 Reference Line ON OFF Reference line 100 1 CENTER 20 000 MHz SPAN 1 000 MHz RBW 10 kHz VBW 10 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB 4 Turn the knob to adjust the reference line to the TG signal 5 Press FREQUENCY 1 5 GHz SPAN 3 and GHz The center frequency is set to 1 5 GHz and the frequency span is set to 3 GHz 6 Press TG Normalize Capture Normz Data and Normalize Correction ON OFF ON 7 Connect TG OUTPUT and RF INPUTI by using a cable that is actually used for this measurement The frequency characteristic of the cable used in the measurement is displayed 8388 o i 4 38 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table TG Nonnz REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB Capture SPAN
34. eet 5 65 5 66 5 69 Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE 5 57 5 58 Limit Line Edit ILU ua teen 5 65 5 69 Freq vs 5 66 5 70 Limit 5 65 5 68 Freq vs Time ON OFF 5 66 5 70 Limit Setup iei Ren 5 36 5 39 Freq 2000 5 66 5 70 Line 1 ABV BLW 5 65 5 68 FREQUENCY 5 57 Line 1 ON OFF 5 65 5 68 Frequency Correction ON OFF 5 7 5 11 Line 2 ABV BLW 5 65 5 68 Frequency Counter 5 36 5 40 Line 2 ON OFF 5 65 5 68 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 57 Link to Marker ON OFF 5 36 5 40 Frequency innert 5 66 5 70 Marker ON OFF 5 47 5 48 Frequency Reference 5 7 5 9 Marker Trace A B C 5 47 5 48 Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL 5 7 5 9 uiid aer E Re s 5 43 5 45 Frequency Zoom ON OFF 5 66 5 70 Max Hold 5 43 5 44 Full Span 5 61 Max Hold Continuous 5 43 5 45 Fundamental ON OFF 5 36 5 40 Max Order 2 5 36 5 38 Gate Delay uyana 5 65 5 67 Max Sweep Count 5 25 5 26 Gate Width sse 5 65 5 67 5 27 5 28 Gated Sweep 5 65
35. Amplitude Set IF Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF SLOPe 22 Context index NEG POS 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF SLOPe NEGative POSitive Set Trigger Source TRIGger 1 SEQuence SOURce 22 Context index IMMIIF VIDIEXT 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate IF VIDeo EXT Set Video Trigger Level TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo Context index Amplitude LEVel 22 Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo LEVel Set Video Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo Context index NEG POS SLOPe 2 NEGative 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence VIDeo POSitive SLOPe 6 10 3 19 Subsystem UNIT Set Amplitude Units UNITZ1 POWer 92 Context index DBM DBMV 1 UNITZ1 POWer DBM DBMV DBUV DBUE DBUV DBUE DBPW V W DBPW V W 6 105 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 20 6 106 Units Function Code micro Volt nano Volt Watt milli Watt Hz kHz 1 3 Hz MHz 1 6 Hz GHz 1e9 Hz second millisecond microsecond ppm U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 1 Master resetting this instrument and setting the center frequency Private Sub cmdEx1 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Reset
36. Call ibwrt spa OPR 8 Call ibwrt spa SRE 128 Call ibwrt spa 50 Sets the board ID Performs a Device Clear Turns the single sweep mode on Clears the status byte Enables the Sweep end bit of the operation status register Enables the Operation status bit of the status byte Specifies Send mode for the SRQ signal 6 71 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control For I Call Call Call 1 To 10 Step 1 ibwrt spa SI WaitSRQ boardID ibrsp spa res Call Call ps MFL ibwrt spa ibwrt spa Rdbuff Space 43 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff CFLEV Left Rdbuff RichTextBoxl Text DoEvents Next I 6 9 1 8 Example 1 Connection LAN Interface Public Sub ConnectTCP Dim Ini as String res ImStr 1 RichTextBoxl Text amp Freq Level Sets up a 10 loop Begins sweeping Waits until SRQ interruption occurs Executes serial polling Executes the peak search Request the values of the marker frequency and level Reserves 43 bytes Reads the data Rdbuff Chr 13 0 1 amp CFLEV amp vbCrLf Display data on the screen and start a new line Executes any other events in Windows Program Examples Using the LAN tcpClient RemoteHost 192 168 1 1 tcpClient Protocol tcpClient RemotePort tcpClient Connect Do While DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData Ini ErrRet SendDtFunc
37. Confirming that the attenuator is set to the optimum value 1 Obtain a rough set value for the attenuator by using the following formula The maximum input level of the mixer is 5 dBm Input attenuator set value dB gt Input level dBm 10 dB 2 Decrease the attenuator setting in steps while watching the screen If the peak value on the screen does not change no input saturation occurs and the measurement can be continued If the peak value changes increase the attenuator setting to eliminate the change A 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter When measuring the adjacent channel leakage power this instrument is able to make a correction to the input signal equivalent to as if the signal passed through the root Nyquist filter When calculating the power for each channel by integrating the trace data the power is multiplied by the coefficient of the root Nyquist filter at the corresponding frequency H n P n b 0 gt 10 xH n n a 1 1 a a fuch b fuch 2T P n b 10 gt 10 n a 1 I o a as 2 b fl ch 2T The coefficient ofthe root Nyquist filter H n is calculated from the symbol rate T and the roll off factor by using the following formula 1 0 lt fl lt 1 2 cos T 4a f x 1 11 1 2 lt f 1 a 2T 0 1 2T5 U3700 Series User s Guide A 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter The characteristics of the root Nyquist filter are
38. Format Show ON OFF Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config 1 Print Config Execute Self Test U3700 Series User s Guide File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index Menu ON OFF File Control Media Paper Format Color Mode Color Gray Menu ON OFF Config Driver 5 Menu List Rename File Remove File Write Protect ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List APPLI Spectrum Analyzer DL Modulation FILE Save Save as File Control 2 Channels Viewer Y 2 Channel ON OFF Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset Context RF2 RF1 Refer U3700 Series 50 User s Guide FOE 8440247 Recall Items Title Media gt Rename File Remove File Copy All to Flash Copy All to USB Write Protect ON OFF L More 1 2 Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BIN KML Format Media MEAS 1 Spurious 1 Channel Power Total Power gt Average Power DaDO OBW ACP Spectrum Emission _ gt gt gt Channel Power 5 Total Power b Average Power OBW d gt a b c d e f g Execute ON OFF Average Contrl On Trace A B
39. Mkr to CF Mkr to CF Mkr to Ref Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Mkr to Ref Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Delta to CF More 1 2 Mkr to CF Step Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step Sets the frequency of the active marker to the center frequency Sets the level of the active marker to the reference level Displays the marker at the highest peak in the search range and sets the center frequency to the frequency of the marker Displays the marker at the highest peak in the search range and sets the reference level to the level of the marker Sets the frequency span to the difference between the frequencies of the delta marker and the normal marker Delta to CF Sets the center frequency to the difference between the frequen 1 5 of the delta marker and the normal marker More 1 2 Displays the Mkr to 2 2 menu Mkr to CF Step Sets the step size of the center frequency to the frequency of the Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step marker as Sets the step size of the center frequency to the difference between the frequencies delta marker and the normal marker as Sets the step size of the marker to the frequency of the marker Sets the step size of the marker to the difference between the fre quencies of the delta marker and the normal marker U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 12 TG Option 5 2 12 TG Option Displays the TG menu
40. U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Context RF2 RF1 5 2 3 FILE Displays the File menu L Save Save Save as File Control Recall Items Title Media Switches the active screen RF2 The RF2 upper window settings can be changed lower window settings be changed gt Rename File Remove File Write Protect ON OFF Copy All to Flash Copy All to USB L More 1 2 Ly Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BIN KML Format Media Saves the items specified in Items to the memory device specified in Media The format in which to save data can be selected from either binary dat or XML eXtensible Markup Language xml File size For saving the setting data BIN Approximately 4 8 KB XML Approximately 16 KB NOTE Only binary data can be saved in the internal memory Save as File Control Rename File Remove File Write Protect ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Specifies the filename and saves the file Displays the Save As window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 3 MB Free 237 7 MB Files File Info test02 dat File Name Size test02 dat 5 0 KB Setup test03 dat 5 0 Traces Context A Traces Context B Limit Lines Channel ACP SEM Spurious 1 2 3 IC test02 dat Save Cancel Displays the File Control menu and Files window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 3 MB Free 237 7 M
41. UHF that supports terrestrial digital broadcasting Channel F 13 13 470 00 476 00 473 142857 14 14 476 00 482 00 479 142857 15 15 482 00 488 00 485 142857 16 16 488 00 494 00 491 142857 17 17 494 00 500 00 497 142857 18 18 500 00 506 00 503 142857 19 19 506 00 512 00 509 142857 20 20 512 00 518 00 515 142857 21 21 518 00 524 00 521 142857 22 22 524 00 530 00 527 142857 23 23 530 00 536 00 533 142857 24 24 536 00 542 00 539 142857 25 25 542 00 548 00 545 142857 26 26 548 00 554 00 551 142857 27 27 554 00 560 00 557 142857 28 28 560 00 566 00 563 142857 29 29 566 00 572 00 569 142857 30 30 572 00 578 00 575 142857 31 31 578 00 584 00 581 142857 32 32 584 00 590 00 587 142857 33 33 590 00 596 00 593 142857 34 34 596 00 602 00 599 142857 35 35 602 00 608 00 605 142857 36 36 608 00 614 00 611 142857 37 37 614 00 620 00 617 142857 38 38 620 00 626 00 623 142857 39 39 626 00 632 00 629 142857 40 40 632 00 638 00 635 142857 41 41 638 00 644 00 641 142857 42 42 644 00 650 00 647 142857 43 43 650 00 656 00 653 142857 44 44 656 00 662 00 659 142857 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency channel MHz MHz 662 00 668 00 665 142857 6
42. pa 6 44 OBWLOAD eene 6 44 OBWOLN 6 44 6 44 2 6 44 nennen 6 44 t bees uma aaa 6 27 OPR 6 51 QPREVT 6 51 6 52 OPT20 6 52 OPTE itea nne a a ay 6 52 6 52 6 52 OPT75 ite siet iE RH 6 52 OP ET6 a anun a 6 52 PARSER aa qasan una aa 6 51 oet r 6 33 OPE 4 euasit 6 33 6 37 6 37 2 6 26 PEEBW ua 6 28 PLS FREQ 6 38 PES LEVEL ecrit ettees 6 38 6 43 PMEASAVGONCE 6 43 PMEASMODE eere 6 43 nent Hes 6 43 eee 6 43 eere 6 43 PNG ses Sess desi yuana 6 50 PPM 6 54 6 38 PSXDB ue HERR RI HUE 6 39 MER 6 41 PWAVG ettet 6 44 PWAVGLOAD 6 44 PWAVGON 6 44 PWAVGRANGE 6 44 PWAVGSAVE 6 44 6 44 6 43 PWCHLOAD eene 6 43 PWCHON 6 43 PWCHPSD eene 6 43 PWCHSAVE 6 43 PWCHTM 22 6 43 PWTOTAL 222 111 44 116 6 43 2 01146 6 43 PWTOTALPSD 6 43 PWTOTALTM
43. 1 3 5 Main frame Boards Power supply parts Cable LCD Panel Module O OJO O O OF O Parts RE BT SI T 11363 2006 URE IM ark REG BD E VAT DI RO Pe RE i SJ T 11363 2006 ISI PR BE o Ce Mr Ika EA HIX EBERLE IR OBL KRH WARRE m PTA BEE As AE jJ i t E BE ah T AX BOE HI th A i bA 2 H i RE TE FB 0 C 50 TES 85 CA PAAR Yat RE Ya E 20 C 60 C AE Ue 85 A 25482 HE JR PS ES Hi Jr FUN EH J KREDAS Wes SH HA 1 U3700 Series User s Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION P 1 1 1 1 Contents of This 1 1 1 2 Pr d uetiOVerVieW Qum 1 2 1 3 Conventions of Notation Used in This Document 1 2 1 4 Adyvantest Homepage Juanqa 1 3 PA PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE 03700 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 Removing the Case A 2 1 2 3 Electromagne
44. 1 Numeric data There are three formats for numeric data as shown below When entering numeric values for this instrument any format may be used Depending on the command a unit may be attached to the entered numeric value nteger type NR 1 format Sign Fixed point type NR2 format Sign Floating point type NR3 format Sign Number NM 2 Unit E e Sign Available units are listed below Exponential Description Frequency Frequency Frequency Frequency Voltage Voltage Voltage Voltage Power dB description Current Second Second Second Percentage 6 12 Percentage U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 6 5 3 Status Byte This instrument has a layered status register structure that is compliant with IEEE standard 488 2 1987 and can send various statuses of this instrument to the controller This section describes the behavioral model of status bytes and allocation of events 1 Status Register This instrument adopts the model of the status registers defined in IEEE standard 488 2 1987 The status registers consist of the condition register event register and enable register
45. 100 t CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 80 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 8 Initial Setting Screen 4 14 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration Selecting the input connector For the 03741 and U3751 only RF INPUTI can be used as the input connector No need to select the input connector For the U3771 and U3772 select the input to be performed the calibration Press SHIFT and RF INPUTI 15 selected Press SHIFT and 0 RF2 RF INPUT2 is selected The calibration of either RF INPUTI or RF INPUT2 can be performed first The following describes the procedure in which the calibration of RF INPUTI is performed first Connecting the input signal Connect the calibration signal 7 Attach the N m BNC f adaptor to the RF INPUTI connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER if Figure4 9 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUTI connector 8 Press SYSTEM 9 Press 6 Calibration on the soft key menu The Calibration menu is displayed 4 15 U3
46. 5 36 5 37 Noise x 5 36 5 37 Normal be 5 43 5 45 Normalize oec bei er teet etes 5 55 Normalize Correction ON OFF 5 55 Note when Turning on the Power 2 1 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 3 Roll Off Factor 5 26 5 31 5 33 Symbol 5 26 5 31 5 33 Nyquist Filter ON OFF 5 26 5 31 5 32 O OBW Z Gives 5 25 5 30 5 43 5 45 5 46 On Trace A B C scena eie 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 36 5 38 5 40 Alphabetical Index Operating Environment 3 3 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Can be Installed only in the U3741 7 16 Option 15 75 W 7 17 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference tere ev 7 18 Option 28 EMC Filter 7 19 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option 7 19 Option 70 High C N 7 19 Option 75 75 Q Tracking Generator 7 21 Option 76 Tracking Generator 7 22 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 7 23 EE 7 16 8 1 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIE 8 1 Others tob rte es is 6 51 Others HIDE SHOW 5 47 5 48 Output to a 4 27 P Panel and Screen D
47. 6 43 PWTOTLOAD 6 43 PWTOTSAVE 6 43 6 47 QPI 6 47 2 6 47 6 47 nnne 6 47 6 28 6 48 6 36 nanan ra 6 51 RENAME 6 48 CREME 6 50 6 45 6 50 RFE MES 6 50 RFI MERCADO 6 50 DEN e Bua RUNE 6 50 Bos aska 6 27 6 34 RLN OFF ettet 6 34 RLN ON nomen num pru 6 34 DRM 6 27 RO es 6 27 RPWD 6 52 6 53 i sa 6 51 e 6 51 C ARN 6 51 SAM 6 41 6 54 SCRE ttum 6 51 qoM 6 41 SEM Qu MN HUS 6 45 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index SEMCBW 0555 6 45 6 29 SEMLOAD nere 6 45 SWPONT 2 5 rer eret Res 6 31 SEMNOS TP 6 45 6 45 SEMON 6 45 SYNCTO 6 49 SEMRFECGCALZO censeri 6 45 6 30 SEMRFPOW 22 2 6 45 6 32 aaa 6 45 TAB aceptan det E ERR HUE 6 32 SEMTDEL 1 eere 6 45 qc huq ode 6 32 SEMTIN 6 45 TBA 6 32 6 45 6 32 SETDATE 5 6 52 cadens ERRARE 6 32 SETEUNG tte temet etr ees 6 50
48. Dim buf As String buf Space 1001 6 set the trace transfer format to ASCII Call ibwrt spa FORMAT ASCII query trace A 1 amplitudes Call ibwrt spa TRACE DATA TRACE1 read trace A buffer ascii points on 5 maximum characters digits separated by a comma Call ilrd spa buf 1001 6 ent ibcnt 1 before 1 loop on each point in the buffer Do find the next comma separator after InStr before buf If after 0 Then tmp Mid buf before Else tmp Mid buf before after Dbefore End tmp contains the next point amplitude in ASCII trace i CInt tmp before after 1 1 1 1 Loop Until i gt 1001 End Sub 6 111 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 9 Reading trace A data in binary format Private Sub cmdGetBinary Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim buf 1001 2 5 2 As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim tmp As Integer Dim ch As String Dim size As Integer Dim Hsize As Integer Dim sSize As String Dim word As Integer Dim trace 1001 As Integer set trace A in view mode to guaranty data integrity Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE1 MODE VIEW select trace transfer mode as BINARY Call ibwrt spa FORMAT BIN read the buffer Call spa TRACE DATA TRACE1 Call ilrdi spa buf 1001 2 5 2 ent i
49. EXCursion STATe 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion STATe Context index ON OFF 10 Set Marker Readout Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer X READout 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer X READout Context index NORMal INVerse NORMINV Set Measuring Window Position 6 80 CALCulate 1 WINDow POSition 22 1 CALCulate 1 WINDow POSition Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Function description Set Measuring Window Width SCPI command CALCulate 1 WINDow WIDTh 2 1 CALCulate 1 WINDow WIDTh U3700 Series User s Guide Parameter Context index Frequency Time 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Position Hz s Remarks Insert a Limit Line Vertex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA 2 CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA 2 Limit line index X coordinate of limit line point Time ordinate of limit line point Relative amplitude Insert a Frequency Domain Limit Line Vertex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA FREQuency 22 Limit line index X coordinate of table point Frequency ordi nate of table point Relative amplitude Insert a Time Domain Limit Line Ver tex CALCulate LLINe 1 DATA TIME 22 Limit line index X coordinate of limit line point Time ordinate of limit line point Relative amplitude Erase a Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete Limit line index Erase a Frequency Domain Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete FREQ
50. Fail Limit 1 amp 2 X Position Mode LIMPOS ABS LFT CENT LIMPOS 0 ABS 1 CENT center freq 2 LFT start freq Y Position Mode LIMAPOS ABS REF DL LIMAPOS 0 ABS 1 REF 2 DL X Offset Activate LIMS ON OFF LIMS 0 OFF ON X Offset Frequency Domain LIMSF Frequency LIMSF Frequency X Offset Time Domain LIMST Time LIMST Time Y Offset Activate LIMAS ON OFF LIMAS 0 OFF 1 ON Y Offset LIMASFT DB LIMASFT DB Limit Line 1 LMTA ON OFF LMTA 0 OFF 1 ON Limit Line 1 Frequency Domain Data Input LMTAINF Frequency Level Limit Line 1 Time Domain Data Input LMTAINT Time Level Limit Line 1 Frequency Domain Data Erase LMTADELF Limit Line 1 Time Domain Data Erase LMTADELT Limit Line 2 LMTB ON OFF Limit Line 2 Frequency Domain Data Input 6 32 LMTBINF Frequency Level U3700 Series User s Guide Function Command EXE SET 6 8 8 Display Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Limit Line 2 Time LMTBINT Time Level as Domain Data Input Limit Line 2 Frequency LMTBDELF E Domain Data Erase Limit Line 2 Time LMTBDELT ERE e Domain Data Erase Limit Line 1 Pass Range LARNG ABOVE BELOW LARNG 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Limit Line 2 Pass R
51. High order byte High order byte for Ist point for 1001 501st point Low order byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point For DDDDDDDD 12345678 data is output in order from 78563412 Each point data is 32 bit 4 bytes floating point type EOI signal is attached at the end of the data for continuous 1001 points Output GPIB code Memory A TBA Memory B TBB Memory C TBC 6 65 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 1 Read the trace data in ASCII format Dim tr 1000 As String d Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt spa Call ibwrt spa DLIMO For i 0 1000 Step 1 n tr i Space 7 Call ibrd spa tr i f res res amp tr amp Str i amp DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Example 2 Dim tr 1000 As Integer Dim i Integer Dim res As String Dim Rslt As Integer Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points Performs a Device Clear CR LF EOI Repeats the operation for 1001 points Allocates 7 bytes 5 bytes for the data and 2 bytes for delimiters Reads the data Displays the data on the screen amp Left tr i 5 amp vbCrLf Reading the memory A data in binary format Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points tmp As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0
52. Position Hz s amplitude Amplitude Get Marker Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 Y Context index Marker index Amplitude Get Marker Absolute Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 Y ABSolute Context index Marker index Amplitude Set Center Frequency from Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET CENTer Context index Marker index Set Marker Step from Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET MARKer STEP Context index Marker index Set Reference Level from Marker Amplitude CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET RLEVel Context index Marker index Set Span from Marker Delta Position Difference CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 SET SPAN Context index Marker index Set Center Frequency Step from Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARK er 2 SET STEP Context index Marker index Select Active Marker CALCulate 1 MARKer ACTive 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer ACTive Context index Marker index Marker index Query Markers List 1 2 3 4 5 CALCulate 1 MARKer ALL INFO Context index number of rows marker index Marker index marker enable 110 marker position Position Hz s marker amplitude Amplitude Clear All Markers CALCulate 1 MARKer AOFF Context index Enable Continuous Peak Search CALCulate 1 MARKer CPEak STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer CPEak STATe Context index ON OFF 10
53. Syntax when the command is sent from an external controller to this instrument is described Example Marker setting 10 Enable Marker CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 STATe 23 Context Index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 STATe Space 2 The syntax consists of a command section and parameter section The command section and parameter section are delimited by a space 1 2 and 3 are parameters required for sending a command A number that follows on corresponds to a row number in the parameter column The parameter may be omitted If omitted the parameter 15 set to 1 The parameter cannot be omitted Lowercase alphabetical characters written in syntax can be omitted shows that the command is optional This command can be omitted shows that only one item is required to be selected from multiple items 6 75 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax 6 76 Parameter Following parameters from to 7 can be omitted 1 Context Index 120 1 Context 2 Context B RF1 0 Active context Marker Index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 0 Active marker Trace Index 1230 1 Trace 2 Trace B 3 Trace C 0 Active trace Limit Line Index 2 EM channel Index 2345 purious band Index 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 purious Table Index 2 3 Uu un Intermodulation Order Index 3 5 7 9 This parameter cannot be omitted Query reply
54. 0 FULL 1 CARR ACP Carrier Bandwidth CARRBS ACPCBW Frequency CARRBS ACPCBW Frequency CS BS Table Input CSBSIN Frequency CS Frequency BS CS BS Table Deletion CSBSDEL ACP Graphics Mode ADG ON OFF ACP save setup ACPSAVE ACP restore setup ACPLOAD ACP Nyquist Filter ACPNQST ON OFF ACPNQST 6 43 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Function Nyquist Symbol Rate Command EXE SET Query GET Code SYMRT Argument Format Frequency Code SYMRT Output Format Frequency Nyquist Roll Off Factor RFACT Real RFACT Real Spectrum Emission Mask Execution SEMON ON OFF SEMON 0 OFF 1 ON SEM Average Times SEMTM Integer SEMTM Integer SEM Carrier Bandwidth SEMCBW Frequency SEMCBW Frequency SEM Ref Power SEMRFCALC CHN PEAK SEMRFCALC 0 Channel 1 Peak SEM Nyquist Filter SEMNQST ON OFF SEMNQST 0 OFF 1 ON SEM save setup SEMSAVE SEM restore setup SEMLOAD SEM Band Table Input SEMTIN ok ok 35 7992 4 Frequency start Frequency stop Frequency ibw dB limit abs start dB limit abs stop dB limit rel start dB limit rel stop ABSJRELJA AND R judge SEM Table Delete SEMTDEL SEM Ref
55. 20 C to 60 C Relative humidity 85 or less no condensation AC Power supply input 100 V to 120 V 50 Hz 60 Hz AC220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Automatically switches the input voltage between 100 V AC and 220 V AC DC Power input DC 11 V to 17 V Power consumption 100 VA or less For the AC power supply 70 W or less For the DC power supply Dimensions Approximately 308 mm W x 175 mm H x 209 mm D Approximately 337 mm W x 190 mm H x 307 mm D Including the handle and feet Approximately 5 0 kg or less without option U3741 Approximately 5 6 kg or less without option U3751 Approximately 6 kg or less without option U3771 U3772 7 15 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 Options 7 55 Options 7 5 1 Option 10 2 Channel Input Option Can be Installed only in the U3741 Item Description Frequency Sweep Amplitude range Amplitude accuracy Dynamic range Input and output General specifications Conforms to the standard specifications except the items shown below and the specifications when OPT 15 is installed Note NOTE Cannotbe installed together with 15 Difference with the standard specifications Item Description Crosstalk between input channels when 10 15 installed lt 90 dBc Input level 10 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB RF input 2 when OPT 10 is installed Connector Impedance VS
56. 5 43 Previous Band 5 26 Print Config ence teer 5 8 R3131 Mode ON OFF 5 7 R3162 Mode ON OFF 5 7 Range FULL WIN 5 25 RBW 1 MHz 2 5 72 RBW 120 KHZ 5 72 RBW 200 5 72 RBW 9 KHZ 5 72 RBW Auto 5 72 RBW AUTO MNL 5 72 RBW CAL rusany ei 5 7 rel 5 18 Ref Freq i e ensem mens 5 7 Ref Freq 10 MHz 5 7 Ref Level ues 5 62 5 47 Ref Offset ON OFF 5 62 Ref Power CHN PEAK 5 26 Ref Disp Lines 5 65 Reference Line 5 47 Reference Line ON OFF 5 55 5 65 Reference Marker 5 47 Refresh 5 43 Refresh Write 5 43 Remote Control 5 7 Remove File e 5 8 5 48 5 15 5 11 5 68 5 39 5 68 5 42 5 11 5 38 5 41 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 48 5 73 5 45 5 44 5 35 5 15 5 11 5 10 5 29 5 11 5 21 5 9 5 9 5 48 5 63 5 32 5 69 5 48 5 56 5 69 5 48 5 44 5 44 5 10 5 14 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 18 Rename File
57. 50 0 dBm 109 dB 109 dBuV R 75 Converting 60 dBuV into dBm 60 107 dB 47 dBm R 50 60 dBuV 109 dB 49 dBm R 75 Q 10 V m 1 uV m Converting 10 into dBuV m 20 log 140 dBuV m Relationship between dBm and Watt 50 dBm 40 dBm 30 dBm 20 dBm 10 dBm 0 dBm 10 dBm 20 dBm 30 dBm 100 W 10 W IW 100mW 10mW 1mW 0 1 mW 10 01 mW 0 001 mW U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List A 5 Menu Map List SYSTEM 1 v Version Annotations ON OFF Frequency Reference Remote Control Trace Points 501 1001 Calibration Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL Ref Freq Ref Freq 10 MHz More 1 2 gt U3751 U3771 U3772 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3162 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI U3741 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3131 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI Calibrate ALL Each Item Report HIDE SHOW Calibration F Int Ref Calibration Corrections ON OFF Frequency Correction ON OFF Total Gain RF Path 1 Total Gain RF Path 2 Step ATT CAL RBW CAL PBW Coarse Fine U3751 U3771 U3772 Store Default a SYSTEM 2 Color Pattern User Password Date Time Config Self Test Factory Init Colori Color2 Black and White White and Black Edit Date Time
58. BLW Sets the range below limit line 1 as the PASS condition Switches limit line 2 ON and OFF ON Displays limit line 2 OFF Hides limit line 2 Sets the judgment condition for limit line 2 ABV Sets the range above limit line 2 as the PASS condition BLW Sets the range below limit line 2 as the PASS condition Displays the PF Config menu Sets the attributes of the horizontal axis data of the limit line ABS Sets the horizontal axis position according to the absolute value of the limit line set in Limit Line Edit The horizontal axis position of the limit line moves according to changes in the frequency span and center frequency setting CF Sets the reference position to the center of the horizontal axis FA Sets the reference position to the leftmost point on the horizontal axis ON Sets the offset frequency from the reference position The limit line display is shifted by the frequency offset OFF Cancels the shift of the limit line Sets the attributes of the vertical axis level data of the limit line ABS Sets the vertical axis position according to the absolute value of the limit line set in Limit Line Edit The vertical axis position of the limit line moves according to the change of the level setting REF Sets the reference level as the reference position DL Sets the display line as the reference position Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF Limit Line Edit Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Ins
59. CDB ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Peak X dB Down PSXDB IM Measurement Mode IMM ON OFF IMM 0 OFF 1 ON IM Reference Frequency IMMREF Frequency Level IM Delta Frequency IMMDF Delta Frequency IM Distortion Signal Data Readout IMMRES n lt DLM gt LLI1 UL1 UJ1 lt DLM gt 1 Order Setting IMODR Integer 3 5 7 9 IMODR Integer 3 5 7 9 IM Criteria Input 3rd Order IMLS3 DB IMLS3 DB IM Criteria Input 5th Order 6 38 IMLS5 DB IMLS5 DB Function Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Measurement Query GET Code Argument Format Code IM Criteria Input 7th Order IMLS7 IMLS7 Output Format IM Criteria Input 9th Order IMLS9 DB IMLS9 IM Pass Fail Judgement IMPFC ON OFF IMPFC IM Save Setup IMSAVE IM Restore Setup IMLOAD Harmonics Measurement HARM ON OFF HARMON 0 OFF 1 ON Harmonics Results HARM n lt DLM gt Freq1 Levell DeltaLevell lt DLM gt 2 Integer Frequency Harmonics Max Order HARMNUM Integer HARMNUM Harmonics Fundamental HRMFND ON Frequency HRMFND HRMFND ON HRMFND OFF CD n Result set number corresponding to the order LLn Level difference in the lower frequency signal LJn Pass Fail judgment in
60. COMMODITY OPTION Xy po Kor 2 o 3 WEN SERIAL ARRESTS 1 power connector 2 AC power switch 3 EXT TRIG connector 4 EXT REF connector 5 USB connector LAN connector VIDEO connector 8 IF OUT connector 9 DC INPUT connector 10 Battery mount 11 GP IB connector Figure 4 7 Rear Panel Connects this instrument to the AC power supply by using the included power cable Switches the AC power ON and OFF Inputs the external trigger signal TTL level Inputs the external reference signal Enables a memory device or printer to be connected For 10BaseT specific LAN connector Connects to the monitor for VGA specification Outputs an IF signal of 21 4 MHz Connects to the external DC power supply The Anton Bauer s battery pack can be used Connects to the external controller when the remote control is used through the GPIB interface 4 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 2 Basic Operation 42 Basic Operation This section describes the menu operation data entry and usage of the basic measurement functions 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry Panel keys and soft menus are used to operate this instrument Press a panel key to display its menu to the right of the
61. Connecting the unit under test 1 Connect the unit under test to TG OUTPUT and RF INPUT of this instrument as shown in Figure 4 20 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ol Unit under test Figure 4 20 Connecting the Unit Under Test 4 33 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 CAUTION In the frequency response measurement by using the TG the level measurement error may be larger even if the UNCAL message is not displayed on the screen Increase the sweep time until the displayed waveform does not change The TG response affects the measurement accuracy in the following cases The unit under test has high Q and sharp level change characteristics For example crystal filter The measurement is performed in the wide frequency span REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB z TG Level 3 TG Level Offset ON OFF 4 Freq Offset ON OFF 5 Normalize 30 HHI f Reference 100 T Line CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB ON OFF Measuring the insertion loss 1 Press Delta Ref Line ON OFF
62. Displayed average noise level Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126 dBm 2 f GHz dB f lt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 126 dBm 2 5 f GHz dB f gt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 2 U3751 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency span Range 0 1 kHz to Full Accuracy 190 Signal purity 98 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 1 MHz When the internal frequency reference is used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 30 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126 dBm 2 f GHz dB 40 Preamp Off 125 dBm 1 f GHz dB Band Preamp Off 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB 40 Preamp 142 dBm 1 3 f GHz dB Bandli Preamp 3 U3771 U3772 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency span Range 0 1 KHz to Full Accuracy 1 Signal purity 98 20logN dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 1 MHz When the internal frequency reference is used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 30 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 7 20 Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level RF Input 1 RF Input 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Tracking Generator Frequency range gt 10 MHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 30 Hz 126
63. Enable Fixed Reference Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa FIXed STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa FIXed STATe Context index ON OFF Enable Marker Delta Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa STATe 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer DELTa STATe Context index Set Center Frequency from Peak CALCulate 1 MARKer MAXimum SET CENTer Context index Set Reference Level from Peak CALCulate 1 MARKer MA Ximum SET RLEVel Context index Set Marker Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer MODE 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer MODE Context index POSition DELTa POS DELT 6 79 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Peak Excursion SCPI command CALCulate 1 MARKer PEAK EXCursion 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer PEAK EXCursion Parameter Context index Number Query reply Number Remarks Set the Delta Marker Reference Object CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence OBJEct 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence OBJEct Context index RMARker RLINe RMAR RLIN Query Reference Marker Absolute Position 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence Context index Position Hz s Query Reference Marker Absolute Amplitude 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer REFerence Y Context index Amplitude Turn Off Multi Marker Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer RESet Context index Set X Axis Marker Search Area
64. FLASh USB FLAS USB 6 91 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Rename File SCPI command MMEMory MOVE 1 2 Parameter Source filename String Destination file name String Query reply Remarks Save File Save File AS MMEMory STORe ITEMs MMEMory STORe ITEMs 1 Synchronize File to Media MMEMory SYNChronize 21 FLASh USB FLAS USB Enable File Write Protection MMEMory WLOCK STATe 1 2 File name String Write protect enable ON OFF Get BMP PNG Screen Image MMEMory DUMP 1 BMP PNG Binary stream Get Data File MMEMory DATA 91 String file name Binary stream Get Screen Image File 6 10 3 12 MMEMory IMAGe 1 Subsystem OUTPut String file name Binary stream Enable Tracking Generator 1 6 10 3 13 Function description Read ACP results OUTPut STATe 1 OUTPut STATe Subsystem READ SCPI command 1 2 3 4 5 READ ACPower Parameter Query reply number of rows flower channel frequency Frequency lower channel amplitude Amplitude upper channel frequency Frequency upper channel amplitude Amplitude Remarks Read ACP Reference Power 1 READ ACPower RPOWer Amplitude Read Average Power Measurement 1 READ AVPower Amplitude Read the Channel Power 1 READ CHPower Amplitude
65. Frequency Enable Center Frequency Step Auto 6 94 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Context index Function description Set Center Channel SCPI command SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel 2 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer Parameter Context index Channel number U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Channel number Enable Setting Center Frequency as Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel CENTer STATe Context index Enable Channel Formula SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel FORMula 2 STATe 23 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel FORMula 2 STATe Context index Integer ON OFF Enable Start Channel Frequency Offset SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt STATe Context index Enable Stop Channel Frequency Offset SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP S TATe 2 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP S TATe Context index Set Start Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt Context index Channel number Channel number Enable Setting Start Frequency as Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STARt
66. RF in O Attenuator IF out Ist LO in 1st LO oscillator Figure A 1 Block Diagram of the Input Section Under normal conditions the input level and output level of the mixer are proportionate to each other However if the input level of the mixer increases the mixer becomes saturated and the output level of the mixer is disproportionate to the input level This phenomena is called input saturation and it prevents accurate measurements from being made see Figure A 2 Output level IF out Input level RF in Figure A 2 Relation Between Input and Output of the Mixer A 4 U3700 Series User s Guide A 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter Preventing Input Saturation If input saturation occurs set the most suitable attenuator value to lower the mixer input level IMPORTANT If the attenuator setting is too high the mixer input signal becomes smaller and analysis becomes impossible However if the attenuator setting is too low the internal mixer circuit may become damaged Usually the appropriate settings are automatically set for a continuous wave CW input signal if you set the attenuator to auto and set the peak of the signal to or below the reference level If the resolution bandwidth RBW is narrower than the modulation bandwidth in the measurement of an input signal with a wide modulation band the display level decreases Therefore the attenuator must be manually set to the optimum value
67. SETFUNC 0 SPA 1 3GPPDL 1 1 50 is required 6 49 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 20 Preset 6 8 20 Preset Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Preset Factory Init 6 8 21 GPIB Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Status Byte Clear STB Read STB Integer SRE Read Write Integer SRE Integer ESR Read ESR Integer ESE Read Write Integer ESE Integer OSR Read Integer OSER Read Integer OPR Integer SRQ Interrupt ON SRQ Interrupt OFF SRQ status clear Delimiter CR LF DLIMO Delimiter LF DLIMI Delimiter EOI DLIM2 Delimiter DLIM5 Local Lockout LLO Remote Control REN Local Control GIL R3162 Mode INSTR SISA2 INSTR 0 FUS 1 SA2 Refresh Screen in Remote SCRF ON OFF SCRF ON OFF Control Open Menus in Remote MNRF ON OFF MNRF ON OFF Control Annotations ON OFF ANNOT ON OFF Parser Mode PARSER ATSET SCPISET PARSER 0 AT 1 SCPI Function 1 TRP Number of trace points lt DLM gt Delimiter 6 50 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 22 Others 6 8 22 Others Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Device ID Output Maker Name Device Name Serial No Revision Date Sett
68. Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of the Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Call ibwrt spa DLIM2 Sets the delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrdi spa tr 1001 2 Reads 1001 points of binary data For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points tmp tr i Swaps the high and low bites Rslt tmp And amp HFF amp 256 Rslt Rslt tmp And amp HFFOO amp 256 res res amp Str Rslt amp vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 6 66 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 3 Entering data into memory A in ASCII format Dim trdata 1000 As Integer Dim i As Integer trdata 0 1792 Creates a temporary test value used to test the input For i 1 To 1000 Step 1 trdata i Str Val trdata i 1 12 DoEvents Next i If measurement data exists the steps between the place marked with and this point are not required Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa AB Sets Trace A to BLANK Call ibwrt spa TAA Sets Trace A in ASCII For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points Call ibwrt spa CStr trdata i Sends the value after it has been
69. The sweep starts at the falling edge of a trigger signal POS The sweep starts at the rising edge of a trigger signal Sets the delay time from a trigger point Setting range 0 sec to 1 sec Sets the gate time width Setting range 50 usec to 1 sec 12 t3 gate signal t1 Gate Delay t2 Gate Width Measuring Window Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Displays the Window menu HIDE Hides the measuring window SHOW Displays the measuring window Sets the center position of the window Sets the window width ON Performs the sweep only in the range set in the measuring window OFF Performs the sweep in the range of the set span width U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Limit Lines Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Displays the Pass Fail menu Switches the Pass Fail judgment due to the comparison with the limit value ON and OFF ON Performs the Pass Fail judgment Performs the Judgment in each sweep If the limit line is not defined this setting cannot be used OFF Does not perform the Pass Fail judgment Switches limit line 1 ON and OFF ON Displays limit line 1 OFF Hides limit line 1 Sets the judgment condition for limit line 1 ABV Sets the range above limit line 1 as the PASS condition
70. Total Power PWTOTALON ON OFF PWTOTALON 0 OFF 1 ON Total Power Average PWTOTALTM Integer PWTOTALTM Integer Times Total Power PWTOTAL Level Total Power Spectral Den PWTOTALPSD dB sity 9 Power Measure Save PWTOTSAVE Power Measure Restore PVTOTLOAD 6 42 Function Average Power ON OFF Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Query GET Code PWAVGON Argument Format ON OFF Code PWAVGON Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON Average Power Average Times PWAVGTM Integer PWAVGIM Integer Average Power Range PWAVGRANGE FULL WIN PWAVGRANGE 0 FULL 1 WIN Average Power PWAVG Level Power Measure Save PWAVGSAVE Power Measure Restore PWAVGLOAD OBW Execution OBWON ON OFF OBWON 0 OFF 1 ON OBW Measurement Value OBW Frequency Fc Frequency OBW OBW OBWPER Real OBWPER Real OBW Average Times OBWTM Integer OBWTM Integer OBW save setup OBWSAVE OBW restore setup OBWLOAD ACP Execution ACP ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON ACP Measurement Value n lt DLM gt fl1L 11L L1H lt DLM gt 1 ACP Average Times Integer ACPTM Integer ACP Reference Power Value ACPREF Level ACP Screen ACPSCR FULL CARR ACPSCR
71. Trace A B C VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF Selects the trace memory in which the data to be normalized is acquired and the normalization function is performed Displays a return loss and VSWR as marker values When performing a measurement advance normalization with the SWR bridge must be executed Refer to Section 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Displays Return Loss and VSWR R L 20 log p VSWR 1 1 Cancels Return Loss and VSWR displays Sets the marker to ON and displays the level difference to the reference line MKA Hides the MKA display Displays the reference line and sets its display position Hides the reference line U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Displays the Frequency menu FREQUENCY Center Start Stop Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL More 1 2 For the U3751 U3771 and U3772 Signal Identification ON OFF Image Suppression ON OFF Center Start Stop Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL Channel Input Channels Config 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH ON OFF Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF Start CH Offset ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF L Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table n Insert Line Formula 1 ON OFF Delete Line Formula 2 ON OFF Table Init Formula 3 O
72. VBW be set arbitrarily Sweep Time AUTO MNL Switches the sweep time between auto and manual settings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum sweep time according to the frequency span RBW and VBW settings The sweep time can be set arbitrarily EMC Displays the EMC menu OPT28 EMC Filter ON OFF ON Uses the EMC filter OFF Cancels the EMC filter mode RBW Auto Sets the resolution bandwidth automatically according to the mea surement frequency band RBW 200 Hz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 9 kHz RBW 120 kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 120 kHz RBW 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz All Auto More 1 2 SPAN RBW ON OFF VBW RBW ON OFF PLL BW Auto Medium Narrow U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function Automatically sets the optimum RBW VBW and sweep time according to the frequency span setting Displays the Coupling 2 2 menu Switches the RBW vs frequency span function between the auto and manual settings This setting is enabled only when the RBW is set to AUTO ON The frequency vs RBW span ratio can be changed OFF The frequency RBW span value is fixed to 100 Switches the VBW vs RBW function between the auto and man ual settings This setting is enabled only when the VBW is set to AUTO ON The VBW vs RBW ratio can be changed OFF The VBW RBW value is fixed to 1 Displays the PLL Band Width men
73. eid Counter Position Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW I 2 5 58 5 31 5 31 5 58 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 58 5 48 5 48 5 70 5 18 5 38 5 50 5 13 5 20 5 20 5 13 5 13 5 64 5 40 5 50 Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Win OFF IN OUT 5 47 5 51 CPL 5 72 CPL Coupled function 5 72 D Data format asas 6 12 Date Time 5 8 dB Conversion Formula A 13 dB diV i ee 5 62 dBc Hz 5 36 ning 5 62 dBm Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBmV L sk as 5 62 dBUV 5 62 dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBUV EME ie 5 62 5 62 DC Power Requirements 3 8 Default us u u k 5 7 Default Conditions 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 35 5 39 Delay 5 65 Delete uwa tree 5 62 Delete Band 5 26 5 35 Delete Channel 5 26 Delete Entry 5 47 5 52 5 69 Delete Line eerte 5 57 Delta Mode
74. or 3 1 Sets table number 1 2 Sets table number 2 3 Sets table number 3 Displays the Spr Results menu Displays Spurious Measure Results Table Displays the previous screen Displays the next screen Sets the setting sequence table number for the spurious measure ment to 1 2 or 3 1 Sets table number 1 2 Sets table number 2 3 Sets table number 3 Displays the Spr Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Noise Hz X dB Down Intermod Harmonic More 1 2 a 5 36 Frequency Counter Execute ON OFF Noise x Hz dBm Hz ON OFF dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF L dBc Hz ON OFF Ly Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level Display REL ABL ABR More 1 2 Continuous Down L Peak X dB Down L gt Execute ON OFF Average Control Average START STOP On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Max Order Average PAUSE CONT Limit Setup Average ONCE SLIDE Pass Fail ON OFF Default Conditions ______ Restore Defaults Save Defaults Average Control V Average START STOP On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF L Execute ON OFF Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution gt gt Resolution 1
75. which is the attenuation of the external attenuator is added to a level reading value 4 43 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 4 Press MEASI and Channel Power A window that shows the measurement channel width is displayed at the center of the screen Channel P REF 30 00 dBm 1 10 0 dBi Execute REF OFFSET ON OFF 30 00 dB gt Average Control On Trace A 5 Channel Position 7 70 Default CENTER 1 95240 GHz SPAN 10 00 MHz Conditions RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 KHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB 5 Press Channel Width 3 8 4 and MHz The channel width is set to 3 84 MHz Measuring the channel power 6 Press Execute ON OFF ON The channel power measurement starts The detector is automatically set to RMS Channel P REF 30 00 dBm DL 23 41 dBm 1 10 0 dBi Execute 2 WIN WIDTH ON OFF 20 3 84 MHz 1 5 Trace A 5 Channel Position 5 CENTER 1 95240 GHz SPAN 10 00 MHz Channel RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 00 dB Width Channel Power 7 Channel Power 23 41 dBm Default Conditions Power Spectral Density 42 44 dBm Hz The measurement result is displayed A display line that shows the channel power 15 displayed 4 44 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement A signal of 2100 MHz output from the W CDMA transm
76. 1 5 8 5 18 Report HIDE SHOW 5 7 Reset Context 5 66 Resolution 2 5 36 Resolution 1 Hz eee 5 36 Resolution 1 kHz 5 36 Resolution 10 Hz 5 36 Resolution 100 Hz 5 36 Restore Defaults 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 35 5 39 eres 5 26 Round Grid Values ON OFF 5 62 Sample imn dnas 5 43 5 18 9 5 18 Save Defaults 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 35 5 39 Screen Shot Config 5 8 Select 5 50 Select Marker 5 47 5 50 Selecting the Command Set 6 1 e eo te rea e ERES 5 8 Shift X ON OFF eee 5 65 Shift Y ON OFF 5 65 Show Mask ON OFF 5 26 Show ON OFF 5 8 Signal Identification ON OFF 5 57 Signal Track iiis etes 5 47 Signal Track ON OFF 5 47 Slide Screen ON OFF 5 62 Slope NEG POS 5 65 5 67 Sound 5 37 Sound AM FM 5 37 SOUTE 5 65 5 67 SPAN Sh us 5 61
77. 11 Function description Delete File INPut CONNector 1 1 INPut CONNector Subsystem MMEMory SCPI command MMEMory DELete 1 Parameter File name Query reply RFC1 RFC2 RFC1 RFC2 Remarks Enable Saving ACP Configuration MMEMory ITEM ACP 1 1 MMEMory ITEM ACP Enable Saving Antenna Correction Table MMEMory ITEM ANTEnna 1 1 MMEMory ITEM ANTEnna ON OFF Enable Saving Channel Table MMEMory ITEM CHANnel 1 1 MMEMory ITEM CHANnel ON OFF Enable Saving General Instrument Setup MMEMory ITEM CONFig 1 1 MMEMory ITEM CONFig ON OFF Enable Saving Limit Lines MMEMory ITEM LIMit 1 2 1 MMEMory ITEM LIMit 1 Limit line index ON OFF Enable Saving SEM Configuration MMEMory ITEM SEMask 1 1 MMEMory ITEM SEMask Enable Saving Spurious Tables MMEMory ITEM SPURious 1 2 1 MMEMory ITEM SPURious 1 Spurious Table Index ONJOFF Enable Saving Trace Data MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 3 1 MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 Context index Trace index ON OFF Enable Normalize Data MMEMory ITEM WINDow H TRACe 2 NRMalize 23 1 MMEMory ITEM WINDow 1 TRACe 2 NRMalize Context index Trace index ON OFF Recall Information from a File MMEMory LOAD ITEMs 1 File name Set File Media MMEMory MEDIA 1 1 MMEMory MEDIA
78. 13 5 13 5 64 5 40 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 12 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 63 5 37 5 63 5 63 Default Default Conditions Delete Channel Delete Entry Delete Delta Mode Delta ON OFF serene Delta Ref Line ON OFF Delta te aasan Delta to CF Delta to Mkr Step Delta to Span Det Avg Mode RMS Video DeteCtot iniecit Detector AUTO MNL Display Line ON OFF Display List ON OFF Display REL ABL ABR Each Item sse Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table Edit Corr Factor Edit Date Edit Limit Lines sese Execute Self Test Execute X dB Down 5 47 5 55 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 54 5 43 5 43 5 43 5 43 5 47 5 51 5 69 5 47 5 50 5 36 5 7 5 57 5 57 5 62 5 8 5 47 5 52 5 72 5 72 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 36 5 38 5 40 5 11 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 34 5 36 5 66 5 64 5 33 5 31 5 50 5 65 5 59 5 48 5 48 5 56 5 45 5 45 5 45 5 46 5 50 5 65 5 48 5 53 5 38 5 11 5 59 5 59 5 64 5 12 5 50 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 34 5 37 5 39 5 41 5 16 5 37 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 1 Menu Index Execute X dB Left 5 36 5 37 5 33 5 35 Ex
79. 2 Screens Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Hard Copy Output Harmonic Harmonic Order Header se a Sag cioe oen ete High Sensitivity ON OFF How to Cancel an UNCAL Message 1 Identifying an Image Signal If a Fault Occurs Image Suppression ON OFF In Case of Difficulty Imt nep Initial Setting List Input and Output Input Impedance 50 75 Input Saturation Insert Insert Band Insert Channel Insert Entry Insert Line Inspection on Deliver INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION LAN 1 4 5 69 5 70 5 69 5 70 5 39 5 40 5 64 5 66 5 60 5 31 5 35 5 64 7 9 5 63 5 64 5 35 5 31 5 50 5 65 5 59 5 38 5 21 Limit Lane Edit 202000 Limit eiie rires Limit Setup Line 1 ABV BLW Line 1 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Link to Marker ON OFF List of Commands Locating This Instrument M ee Max Hold Max Hold Continuous unoqa Max Sweep Count Measurement Measurement Examples Measuring by using the TG 76 77
80. 2JU 128 256 512 1G Transcend TS2GJF160 For the 256 type the operation with this instrument has also been checked NOTE The USB memory key with a security function cannot be used 4 29 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 Measures the characteristics of the bandpass filter whose pass band is located near the frequency of 1900 MHz Measuring the insertion loss and pass bandwidth of the filter Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f x2 Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within the specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turnon the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turnon the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off Initi
81. 5 67 5 29 5 30 Gated Sweep ON OFF 5 65 5 67 5 32 5 36 GPIB Address eem 5 7 5 10 5 38 5 39 Graph ON OFF 5 26 5 32 5 43 5 44 Graphic eres 5 66 MEAS 1 auqa t ORE 5 25 Graphic Z 1 Screen 5 66 5 69 MEAS 2 5 36 Graphic Z 2 Screens 5 66 5 70 Measuring Window 5 65 5 67 Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF 5 66 5 69 Medid uices cie ee testet 5 8 5 15 Graphic Zoom 2 5 66 5 70 5 18 5 23 Harmonic 5 36 5 39 Medit a asasassasassastascqatasqasaaqa 5 72 5 73 Harmonic Max Order 5 36 5 40 Menu ON OFF 5 8 5 14 High Sensitivity ON OFF 5 62 5 64 5 15 IE aaa aes pk 5 65 5 66 MIm gti toda ees 5 62 Image Suppression ON OFF 5 57 5 60 Min Hold 5 43 5 44 Init Table emos 5 26 5 31 Min Max Peak 5 47 5 50 5 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 1M MKR Mod Mode Mode More Nega Norm Norm Norm 5 4 Min Peak Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mkr to CF Mkr to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step gt Next Next Min Peak Next Peak Next
82. 75 19 C19 144 00 150 00 147 145 25 149 75 20 C20 150 00 156 00 153 151 25 155 75 21 C21 156 00 162 00 159 157 25 161 75 22 C22 164 00 170 00 167 165 25 169 75 23 23 222 00 228 00 225 223 25 227 75 24 C24 230 00 236 00 233 231 25 235 75 25 25 236 00 242 00 239 237 25 241 75 26 C26 242 00 248 00 245 243 25 247 75 27 C27 248 00 254 00 251 249 25 253 75 28 C28 252 00 258 00 255 253 25 257 75 29 C29 258 00 264 00 261 259 25 263 75 30 C30 264 00 270 00 267 265 25 269 75 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 1 CATV Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s channel Channel Frequency range MHz 270 00 276 00 Center frequency MHz Picture frequency MHz Sound frequency MHz 276 00 282 00 282 00 288 00 288 00 294 00 294 00 300 00 300 00 306 00 306 00 312 00 312 00 318 00 318 00 324 00 324 00 330 00 330 00 336 00 336 00 342 00 342 00 348 00 348 00 354 00 354 00 360 00 360 00 366 00 366 00 372 00 372 00 378 00 378 00 384 00 384 00 390 00 390 00 396 00 396 00 402 00 402 00 408 00 408 00 414 00 414 00 420 00 420 00 426 00 426 00 432 00 432 00 438 00 438 00 444 00 444 00 450 00 450 00 456 00 456 00 462 00 28 462 00 468 00 U370
83. ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init p U3700 Series User s Guide TG Option FREQUENCY FREQUENCY Center Start Stop More 1 2 U3751 U3771 U3772 Signal Identification ON OFF _ Image Suppression ON OFF A 5 Menu Map List TG ON OFF TG Level TG Level Offset ON OFF TG Freq Offset ON OFF Normalize Capture Normz Data Reference Line ON OFF Normalize Correction ON OFF Trace A B C VSWR ON OFF Delta Ref Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF Frequency Offset ON OFF CF Step Size AUTO MNL Channel Input ____ T Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH ON OFF Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF Start CH Offset ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF Channels Config Edit Channel Formula Edit Channel Table Insert Line Formula 1 ON OFF Delete Line Formula 2 ON OFF Table Init L Formula 3 ON OFF A 23 U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List SPAN AMPLITUDE A 24 Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune AMPLITUDE Ref Level ATT dB div Vertical Scale LIN LOG Units Slide Screen ON OFF More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF Input Impedance 50 75 High Sensitivity ON OFF Correction Factor ON OFF Edit Corr Factor L R
84. ACP graph Displays the ACP Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the SEM Spectrum Emission Mask menu ON Performs a spectrum emission mask measurement OFF Terminates the spectrum emission mask measurement Displays the SEM Avg menu Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the spectrum emission mask OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average On Trace A B C Selects a trace in which to execute the spectrum emission mask measurement Config Displays the SEM Cfg menu Carrier Bandwidth Sets the power conversion bandwidth for carrier signals Ref Power CHN PEAK Switches the calculation mode of the reference power between the Channel mode and the Peak Power mode CHN Calculates the channel power and sets the result as the reference power for the mask measurement PEAK Sets the Peak power value of the waveform as the reference power for the mask measurement Ch Windows ON OFF ON Displays the SEM window OFF Hides the SEM window Show Mask ON OFF ON Displays the Mask line OFF Hides the Mask line Nyquist Filter ON OFF Switches the Nyquist filter function ON and OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Nyq Roll O
85. BANDwidth BWIDth Frequency Frequency Enable Continuous X dB Down CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown CONTinuous STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown CONTinuous STATe ON OFF Set X dB Down Excursion CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown LEVel 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown LEVel Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set X dB Down Display Mode CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown MODE 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion XDBDown MODE RELative ABSLeft ABSRight REL ABSL ABSR Enable Marker List Display 6 82 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe ON OFF 10 Function description Enable Signal Track SCPI command CALCulate MARKer TRCKing STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer TRCKing STATe Parameter U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Set Marker Persistent Attribute CALCulate MARKer X PERSist 1 1 CALCulate MARKer X PERSist INDex VALue IND VAL Enable AM Measurement CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion AM STATe 2 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion AM STATe Marker index 10 Query AM Modulation Depth CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion AM DEPTh Percent Query AM Modulation Frequency CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion AM FREQuency Frequency Enable FM Measurement CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion
86. BNC f adaptor to the INPUT connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER i Figure 4 11 Connecting the CAL Signal Setting measurement conditions Setting the measurement conditions to observe the input signal more easily After initialization the center frequency can be set 8 Press 3 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 30 MHz 4 18 10 11 12 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 1 D T CENTER 30 0 MHz Center 2 4 Frequency Offset ON OFF H um Stop 5 Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input E CENTER 30 0 MHz SPAN 460 0 MHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 12 Setting the Center Frequency Press SPAN The current frequency span is displayed in the active function display area and the Span menu is displayed Press 4 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 40 MHz Press AMPLITUDE The current reference level is di
87. Band0 Frequency readout accuracy Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate Temperature stability 2 x 10 year 32 5 x 10 6 0 C to 50 C Marker frequency counter Resolution Accuracy RBW lt 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN lt 100 MHz 1 Hz to kHz Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM 1LSB Frequency stability Residual FM When the internal frequency reference is used lt 60 Hz p p 100 ms Frequency span Range Accuracy 0 5 kHz to Full 1 Signal purity When the internal frequency reference is used 85 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 200 kHz Resolution bandwidth RBW Range Accuracy 100 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 7 6 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 7 2 2 Sweep U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Spectrum mode Sweep time accuracy 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 s 2 Zero Span Sweep mode REPEAT SINGLE Trigger function Trigger source 7 2 3 Amplitude Free run Video IF External Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range 30 dBm to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Average continuous power DC voltage 30 dBm I
88. Bandwidth When information is transmitted through radio waves the spread of the frequency spectrum is caused along with the modulation The occupied bandwidth is defined as the width of frequency spectrum that occupies 99 of total average power see Figure A 8 Occupied Bandwidth lt gt i i P 99 Amplitude Frequency Figure A 8 Occupied Bandwidth Bandwidth Selectivity The band pass filter normally has a Gaussian distribution characteristics instead of the so called rectangular characteristic Consequently if two adjacent signals of different levels exist the smaller signal hides in the skirt of the larger signal See Figure A 9 Therefore the bandwidth at a certain attenuation range 60 dB should also be defined The ratio between the 3 dB width and 60 dB width is expressed as the bandwidth selectivity BWeo ES 60 dB Separation of different level signals b filter selectivity Figure A 9 Bandwidth Selectivity U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Bandwidth Accuracy The bandwidth accuracy of the resolution bandwidth filter is expressed by the deviation from the nominal value of the 3 dB lowered point This specification has almost no effect when measuring the level of a con tinuous signal but it should be taken into consideration when measuring the level of a noise signal Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Several resolution bandwidth filters ar
89. CAL Signal eene e 4 23 4 17 Displaying the UNCAL Message 4 24 4 18 Canceling the UNCAL Message Jasna assqa nee pn e Tete im aE 4 24 4 19 Connecting the TG Mesurement 4 31 4 20 Connecting the Unit Under Test uu ien 4 33 4 21 Measurement Display for Channel Power 4 52 4 22 Measurement Display for Noise Power Converted into 5 6 MHz Bandwidth 4 54 4 23 BASES 4 59 6 1 GPIB tete aa ulaqa i rie te rer GS aq 6 3 6 2 CAN M 6 6 6 3 Connection of Cross over Cables 6 7 6 4 Status Register Arrangement nene A ERU E EEE HEAR He oed 6 14 6 5 Details of Status Register nennen nennen nennen nnne nnns 6 15 6 6 Structure of the Status Byte Register sss eene ene 6 16 6 7 Relationship between the Screen Graticule and Trace Data 6 62 1 Block Diagram of the Input Section A 4 A 2 Relation Between Input and Output of the Mixer sse A 4 A 3 Characteristics of the Root Nyquist Filter r A 6 A 4 Resolution Bandwidth ee RE HERR ee A 7 A 5 Uncertainty tier ties te teste 7 6 Noise
90. CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 FORMA Reading the memory A data in binary 32 bit floating point order swap Dim tr 1000 As Single Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points 32 bit floating point type Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM4 Switches to FORM3 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrd32 Spa tr 0 1001 4 Reads 1001 points of binary data 4 for four bytes For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points res res amp Str tr i amp vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the CR LF and EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 6 9 1 5 Example Program for Screen Image Output Example 1 Example 2 Outputs a current screen image as bitmap data and writes it to a file Data which is approximately 150 KB for the BMP format or approximately 5 KB for the PNG format is output Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa DLIM2 Sets a delim
91. CSBSDEL Clears the channel space and bandwidth previously set Call ibwrt spa CSBSIN 50KZ 21KZ Sets CS to 50 kHz and BS to 21 kHz Call ibwrt spa ACP ON Starts the ACP measurement For j 1 To 10 Step 1 Call ibwrt spa TS Executes one sweep Call ibwrt spa ACP Requests the result of the ACP measurement Rdbuff Space 3 Assigns 1 byte for an integer and 2 bytes for a delimiter before reading the result Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data cnt CInt Rdbuff Converts the contents of the buffer into integers For i 1 To cnt Step 1 Rdbuff Space 81 Assigns an area of 81 bytes Real number x 4 x 3 CRLF Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 1 InStr 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the first comma starting from the top of the buffer FrqL Left Rdbuff 1 1 Reads the string between the top and the character string Sep2 InStr sepl 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the next comma LvlL Mid Rdbuff sepl 1 sep2 sepl 1 Reads the string between the first and second commas sepl InStr sep2 1 Rdbuff 0 Searches for the next comma FrgH Mid Rdbuff sep2 1 sepl sep2 1 Reads the string between the second and third commas Sep2 InStr sepl Rdbuff Chr 13 0 Searches for the terminator CR 6 70 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 7 LvlL Mid Rdbuff 1 1
92. Cancels the frequency counter mode Adjusts a cursor on the measured signal Corresponds the cursor at the counter position with the marker position If the marker position moved then the counter position also moved OFF Cancels the function Displays the Cnt Res menu Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 100 Hz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 10 Hz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 Hz Displays the Meas2 2 2 menu Switches ON and OFF the AM modulation factor measurement ON Acquires an AM modulation factor and modulation frequency by using the peak search function and displays a calculation result in percentage OFF Cancels the AM function FM Meas Sound Execute ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Displays the FM Meas menu Switches ON and OFF the frequency deviation measurement function ON Measures the frequency deviation of an FM signal OFF Cancels the frequency deviation measurement function of an FM signal A value of Peak Delta Y is used as a condition of performing the peak search If setting the Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF menu to ON and setting a modulation frequency in advance a optimum sweep time is automatically set based on the modulation frequency and the number of display points If OFF is set for the Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF menu a sufficient sweep time
93. Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mode Index Value Signal Track gt Signal Track ON OFF Y Range ON OFF Peak Menu a Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config P Peak Delta Y More 1 2 Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain Couple to Win OFF IN OUT _ Search Domain m gt Min Peak 22 ung Next Min Peak Window Widt Min Max Peak Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Peak List Frequency Display Line ON OFF Peak List Level Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Display List ON OFF Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init 5 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 9 MKR Select Marker Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode Delta ON OFF Ref Object Reference Marker Reference Line Fixed Mkr ON OFF 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF Peak Menu Clear All More 1 2 Others HIDE SHOW Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Selects the active marker and sets its position The marker number increases by one each time the key is pressed The marker number cycles from 1 to 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 The marker number decreases one if SHIFT is pressed and then Select Marker is pressed Activates the marker selected by Select Marker Moves the active marker to the selected trace Displays the Delta Marker menu Swit
94. Context index Frequency Frequency Enable Video Band Width Auto Coupling SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO 2 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo AUTO Context index 10 Resolution Width SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution 2 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution Context index Frequency Frequency Enable Resolution Band Width Auto Coupling SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 22 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth RESolution AUTO Context index PLL Band Width SENSe BANDwidth PLL 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth PLL AUTO MEDIum NARRow AUTO MEDI NARR Enable All Auto Coupling Context Dependent Command SENSe 1 COUPle 2 1 SENSe 1 COUPle Context index ALLINONE ALLINONE Enable Trace Detector Auto Selec tion SENSe 1 DETector 2 AUTO 23 1 SENSe 1 DETector 2 AUTO Context index Trace index 10 Set Trace Detector SENSe 1 DETector 2 FUNCtion 3 1 SENSe 1 DETector 2 FUNCtion Context index Trace index NORMal POSitive NEGative SAMPle AVERage NORMIPOS NEG SAMP AVER Set Center Frequency SENSez1 FREQuency CENTer 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer index Frequency Frequency Set Center Frequency Step SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CENTer STEP Context index Frequency
95. Count SENSe IM AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe IM AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Averaging Control SENSe IM AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe IM AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Intermodulation Averaging SENSe IM AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe IM AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Intermodulation Settings SENSe IM DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Intermod ulation SENSe IM DATA SAVE Enable Limit Testing for Intermod ulation SENSe IM LIM STATe 1 1 SENSe IM LIM STATe ON OFF Set Intermodulation Maximum Order SENSe IM ORDER 21 1 SENSe IM ORDER Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Limits SENSe IM THReshold 1 22 1 SENSe IM THReshold 1 Intermodulation order index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set Occupied Band Width Maxi mum Sweep Count SENSe OB Width AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe OBWidth AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Occupied Band Width Averag ing Control Mode SENSe OB Width AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe OB Width AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Occupied Band Width Averaging SENSe OB Width AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe OBWidth AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Occupied Band Width Set tings SENSe OBWidth DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Occ
96. List ON OFF Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init Select Marker Selects the active marker The marker number increases by one each time the key is pressed The marker number decreases by one if SHIFT 1s pressed and then Select Marker is pressed Next Peak Moves the marker to the next highest peak from the current marker position in the search range Next Peak Right Moves the marker to the next peak on the right higher frequency than the current marker position in the search range Next Peak Left Moves the marker to the next peak on the left lower frequency than the current marker position in the search range Config Displays the Peak Cfg menu Peak Delta Y Sets the level difference from the peak in which a signal is recog nized as a peak point during the peak search This level difference is used as the threshold level for the peak point search Continuous Peak ON OFF Switches the continuous peak search function ON and OFF X Search Domain 5 50 ON OFF Displays the X PK Area menu Repeats the peak search in each sweep Cancels the continuous peak search function Couple to Win OFF IN OUT U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Sets a peak search range on the horizontal axis OFF Sets the full range on the screen as the search range IN Sets the inside of the displayed window as the search range OUT Sets the outside of the displayed windo
97. MHz 10 dBm lt 1 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz lt 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 3 1 GHz lt 2 0 dB 100 kHz to 6 GHz TG leakage lt 80 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance 50 O nom VSWR lt 2 typ Output level lt 10 dBm Maximum allowable applied level 10 dBm 10 V DC 7 23 U3700 Series User s Guide 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES This chapter describes the options and accessories for this instrument 81 Options Table 8 1 Options Description 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 01 Digital modulation analysis module OPT10 2 channel input option For U3741 only 15 75 Q input For U3741 only OPT20 High stability frequency reference OPT28 EMC filter OPT53 Time domain analysis option OPT70 High C N OPT75 Tracking generator 75 O For U3741 only OPT76 Tracking generator OPT77 6 GHz tracking generator U3751 U3771 and U3772 8 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 8 2 Accessories 8 2 Accessories Table 8 2 Accessories Name Product Code 50 Q 75 Q converter ZT 130NC DC cable A114020 Battery pack A870008 Battery charger A870009 Carrying bag A129001 Transit case A129002 Rack mount kit JIS A122003 Rack mount kit EIA A124004 Highpass filter 2 8 GHz to 18 GHz A899001 Highpass filter 8 GHz to 18 GHz A899002 Highpass filter 11 GHz to 26 GHz A899003 Highpass filter 18 GHz to 30 GHz A899004 VSWR bridge A199001
98. Mode CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X MODE 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X MODE Context index ALL INNer OUTer ALL INN OUT Set X Axis Marker Search Area Center Position CALCulatez 1l MARKer SEARch X POSition 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X POSition Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Set X axis Marker Search Area Width CALCulatez1 MARKer SEARch X WIDTh 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch X WIDTh Context index Frequency Time Position Hz s Set the Marker Search Area Relative to the Display Line CALCulatez1 MARKer SEARch Y DLINe 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y DLINe Context index OFF ABOVe BELow OFF ABOV BEL Set the Marker Search Area Relative to Limit Line 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y LIMZ2 3 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer SEARch Y LIM 2 Context index Limit line index OFF ABOVe BELow OFF ABOV BEL Set Marker Step CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP 22 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP Context index Fre quency Time Position Hz s Enable Marker Step Auto CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP AUTO 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer STEP AUTO Context index 10 Set Signal Track Y Ranging Excursion CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion 2 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing EXCursion Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable Signal Track Y Ranging CALCulate 1 MARKer TRCKing
99. Mode Color Gray Menu ON OFF Config Driver Rename File Remove File Write Protect ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Version Displays the software version dialog box Information U3751 SN 0141101364 Software Options Version JOO 74 Tracking Generator Build 1 28 ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Platform 2 4 71 Boards Configurations Type B IF DSP 3 19 IF FPGA 3 21 IF CPLD 2 5 Mother FPGA 6 72 Mother CPLD 4 0 Synthesizer FPGA 6 11 Annotations ON OFF ON Displays set values such as the center frequency on the top and bottom of the vertical scale OFF Hides set values and zooms into the area in which set values are displayed Frequency Reference Selects the signal source of the reference frequency Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL INT Selects the internal signal source EXT Uses an external input signal from the EXT REF connector XTL Selects an optional crystal oscillator Ref Freq The reference frequency can be changed by using the step keys The following frequencies can be set as the reference frequency 1 MHz 1 544 MHz 2 048 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 12 8 MHz 13 MHz 13 824 MHz 14 4 MHz 15 36 MHz 15 4 MHz 16 8 MHz 19 2 MHz 19 44 MHz 19 6608 MHz 19 68 MHz 19 8 MHz 20 MHz 26 MHz Ref Freq 10 MHz Sets the reference frequency to 10 MHz 5 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Remote Control Displays the Remote Ctrl
100. NER 6 53 5 6 52 TGDLTREN 6 53 SEM 6 41 6 53 6 36 6 53 SOY 6 36 TGLEO iu 6 53 SGY OFF Jerem 6 36 6 53 SGY ON 6 36 TGO p 6 53 SIISNGES incedere ce dieti 6 29 neither 6 53 SIGID 6 26 TN sana asa aS s a HE 6 26 SNIGON TS 6 29 TPL TP iicet rere 6 31 SOEY nt IEEE 6 41 TPST P 6 31 SON uses EER 6 41 TRACESEBL 6 32 SP khu 6 25 TRGDELY tr 6 29 SPREDEL 6 46 rtr rete 6 29 SPRIN SPRFIN 6 46 TRGS LP iint t decedens 6 29 SPRTBD ansa 6 46 TRGSRG u S et RE ER ore 6 29 SPURT etit eee PEOR ipsa 6 45 6 46 TRGTTLLVL 6 29 6 29 TRSUB 6 31 6 31 6 29 SUPIP 6 51 US USEC u a aaa sas 6 54 E 6 48 UN 6 54 SVACP 6 49 VOLE eene rere 6 54 SVANT 6 49 6 28 SVCH 6 49 VB OTRA REIR 6 28 SVLIML 4 eren 6 49 MS NIME 6 27 SVLIMOS revise E 6
101. Number 1 2 n OPT Option No string 6 77 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 1 Subsystem CALCulate Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Center Frequency From Delta CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Marker Postion Difference CENTer Marker index Set Marker Step From Marker Delta CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 DELTa SET Context index Position Difference MARKer STEP Marker index Set Span From Delta Marker Position CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Difference 5 Marker index Set Frequency Step From Marker CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 DELTa SET Context index Delta Position Difference STEP Marker index Execute X dB Down CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown Marker index Execute X dB Left CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown LEFT Marker index Execute Peak Search and X dB Down CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown PEAK Marker index Execute X dB Right CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 FUNCtion Context index XDBDown RIGHt Marker index Get Specific Marker Information 1 2 3 4 CALCulate 1 MARKerZ2 Context index marker index INFO Marker index Marker index marker enable 1 0 marker position Position Hz s marker amplitude Amplitude Execute Next Peak Search to the Left CALCulate l MARKer 2 MAXimum Context ind
102. OFF 1 ON Channel Type 2 Input CHTIN Integer Frequency Channel 2 Deletion CHTDEL Signal Ident SIGID 1910 0 OFF 1 ON Image Suppress IMGSP IMGSP 0 OFF 1 ON Auto Tune TN Peak Zoom PKZOOM 6 25 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 2 Level 6 8 2 Level Function Reference Level Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Level Code RL Output Format Level Attenuation DB Integer AT DB Integer Min Attenuation DB Integer ATMIN DB Integer Zero Attenuation Attenuation Auto ON OFF AA 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto XdB Div DB Discr Val 10 5 2 1 0 5 dB 0 10dB 1 5dB 2 2dB 3 1dB 4 0 5 dB others Linear x 1 111 Vertical Scale VS LINILOG Level Offset RO RO DB 0 OFF 1 ON Hi Sens HS ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Input OHM Integer Discr Val 50 75 Integer Display Unit Level Unit AUNITS DBMI DBMV DBUV DBEMF DBPW W ATT V OLT 0 DBM 1 DBMV 2 DBUV 3 DBEMF 4 DBPW 5 WATT 6 VOLT Correction Factor ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Table Input Frequency Level DB Table Delete 6 26 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 3 Bandwidth 6 8 3 Bandwidth Command EXE SET Query GET Func
103. ON OFF SVSPR3 0 OFF 1 ON Save Channel SVCH ON OFF SVCH 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spectrum Emission SVSEM ON OFF SVSEM 0 OFF Mask Table 1 ON Save ACP SVACP ON OFF SVACP 0 OFF 1 ON Save Correction Factor SVANT ON OFF SVANT 0 OFF 1 ON Save Normalize Context ON OFF SVNRMIA 0 OFF 2 ON Save Normalize Context B SVNRMIB ONIOFF SVNRMIB 0 OFF 2 ON Save Normalize Context SVNRMIC ONIOFF SVNRMIC 0 OFF 1 ON Syncronize All Files SYNCTO USB to Flash FLASH Flash to USB USB 6 48 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 18 File Management 6 8 18 File Management Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Reading Bitmap File BMP Binary data lt EOI gt Reading Portable Network PNG Binary data lt EOI gt Graphics File Reading Image File GIMAG String Binary data lt EOI gt Reading Data File GDATA String Binary data lt gt 6 8 19 Config Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Output Format Title String Erase Title 10 MHz Internal Refer ence Signal Source 10 MHz External Refer ence Signal Source Xtal Reference Signal Source Frequency RF Frequency Input RF Connector RFC1 RFC2 RFC 1 2 2 Device Select HCDEV Printer PRT 0 Printer USB USB USB Screen Copy HCOPY U37xx Mode SETFUNC
104. Output Format 6 65 8 1 UNDEMEITRH Sw 8 1 8 2 AACGGOSS01169 C 8 2 9 1 Limited Life Parts MEET 9 2 T 1 1 INTRODUCTION U3700 Series User s Guide 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the contents of this manual and the product overview of the U3700 series Spectrum Analyzer to help you get the most out of this manual 11 Contents of This Manual This manual can be used by novices or experienced users of this instrument You may read through this man ual from Chapter 1 to learn more about this instrument or you may refer to the table of contents which is found at the beginning of each chapter and directly jump to the section that you need The contents of each chapter are as follows CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter describes the contents of this manual and the product overview CHAPTER 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 This chapter describes precautions when using this instru ment Read this chapter before using this instrument CHAPTER 3 SETUP This chapter describes how to setup this instrument After setting up this instrument in an appropriate location turn on the power and check that this instrument starts correctly CHAPTER 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURA TION AND BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter describes the functions of each part of the panel and the screen of this instrument You can learn how to operate
105. Restore Defaults 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 Spectrum Emission 5 25 5 32 Spectrum 5 17 1 6 U3700 Series User s Guide Spectrum 5 17 sien iere n 5 25 5 34 Standard Event Register 6 18 Standard Operation Status Register 6 16 jr cR 5 57 Start CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Start CH ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Status Byte oerte 6 13 6 71 Status Byte Register 6 16 Status Register 6 13 Step CAD uu l seen 5 7 5 11 5 57 Stop CH Offset ON OFF 5 57 5 58 Stop CH 5 57 5 58 SLOTE iniit 5 7 5 11 5 43 5 46 Subsystem CALCulate 6 78 Subsystem CALibration 6 84 Subsystem CONFigure 6 85 Subsystem COUPle 6 85 Subsystem DISPlay 6 85 Subsystem FETch 6 89 Subsystem FORMat 6 90 Subsystem HCOPY 6 90 Subsystem INITiate 6 91 Subsystem INPut 6 91 Subsystem MMEMoty 6 91 Subsystem OUTPut
106. STATe 2 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel 5 index Set Stop Channel SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP Context index Channel number Channel number Enable Setting Stop Frequency as Channel SENSez1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency CHANnel STOP STATe Context index ON OFF Enable Image Identification Mode SENSe 1 FREQuency IMIDentify STATe 2 SENSe 1 FREQuency IMIDentify S TATe Context index Enable Image Suppression Mode SENSe 1 FREQuency MSUppression S TATe 22 SENSe 1 FREQuency IMSUppression STATe Context index Set Frequency Span SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN Context index Frequency Frequency Set Span to Full Span SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN FULL Context index Restore Last Span Setting SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN PREVious Context index Set Span to Zero Span Time Domain SENSe 1 FREQuency SPAN ZERO Context index Set Start Frequency SENSe 1 FREQuency STARt 22 1 SENSe 1 FREQuency STARt Context index Frequency Frequency 6 95 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Stop Frequency SCPI command SENSe 1 FREQuency STOP 22 1 SENSe 1
107. Temperature Factory Init Initializes this instrument to the factory settings Refer to A 1 Initial Setting List APPLI Displays the APPLI menu APPLI Spectrum Analyzer DL Modulation Spectrum Analyzer 2 Channels Viewer 2 Channel ON OFF Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 2 APPLI 2 Channels Viewer 2 Channel ON OFF Spectrum RF1 Spectrum RF2 2 Channel Preset Context RF2 RF1 Refer to the separate volume of the U3700 Series OPT50 User s Guide FOE 8440247 Displays the 2 Channel menu Functions only for the U3771 or U3772 Sets the 2 Channels Viewer mode The sweep and measurement are performed only for the active channel The active channel screen is enclosed within a red frame 2 Channel REF 0 00 dBm 1 2 Channel ON OFF 2 Spectrum RFI 3 Spectrum RF2 100 CENTER 21 500 GHz SPAN 43 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 430 ms ATT 10 00 dB REF 0 00 dBm Context 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 90 ms ATT 10 00 dB ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower windows Upper window INPUT2 Lower window INPUT1 OFF Cancels the dual screen display The measurement display returns to the active channel screen Cancels the 2 Channel mode and enables INPUTI Cancels the 2 Channel mode and enables INPUT2 Initializes the INPUTI and INPUT2 settings 5 17
108. This section describes how to display spectrums and use markers by using the CAL signal of this instru ment The level difference between the CAL signal and its second harmonics are measured as an example Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within a specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turn on the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turn the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off Initialization Initialize the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded 4 17 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Connecting the input signal Connecting the calibration signal 7 Attach the N m
109. Time Zoom Position Zoom Width Context A B L Freq vs Time ON OFF Frequency Pos Context A B e CPL Coupled function CPL RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AUTO MNL EMC gt EMC Filter ON OFF All Auto RBW Auto L More 1 2 RBW 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz SPAN RBW ON OFF RBW 120 kHz VBW RBW ON OFF RBW 1 MHz PLL BW Auto Medium Narrow A 26 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 TV Channel Table Japan A 6 TV Channel Table Japan A 6 1 Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Channel Frequency range Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz MHz 1 1 90 00 96 00 93 91 25 95 75 2 2 96 00 102 00 99 97 25 101 75 3 3 102 00 108 00 105 103 25 107 75 4 4 170 00 176 00 173 171 25 175 75 5 5 176 00 182 00 179 177 25 181 75 6 6 182 00 188 00 185 183 25 187 75 7 7 188 00 194 00 191 189 25 193 75 8 8 192 00 198 00 195 193 25 197 75 9 9 198 00 204 00 201 199 25 203 75 10 10 204 00 210 00 207 205 25 209 75 11 11 210 00 216 00 213 211 25 215 75 12 12 216 00 222 00 219 217 25 221 75 13 108 00 114 00 111 109 25 113 25 14 C14 114 00 120 00 117 115 25 119 75 15 C15 120 00 126 00 123 121 25 125 75 16 C16 126 00 132 00 129 127 25 131 75 17 C17 132 00 138 00 135 133 25 137 75 18 C18 138 00 144 00 141 139 25 143
110. Time e Data setting FUTO EH setting Select the Manual mode 1 gt Data setting AUTO Select the Manual mode Input ATT setting GUIDE 1 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE Sweep start stop Single sweep Detection mode setting Basic operation Peak search Peak wave centering Delta marker Peak list display Frequency counter GUIDE 2 Press pi to stop a sweep and press again to start a sweep 1 EXT CFG weep Mode M Pross pd Cnr Select the Single mode race LT TRACE Honnal Select a Detection mode Alternative detection of positive and negative peaks Positive peak detection mode Negative peak detection mode Sample detection mode The average detection mode includes RMS power average and Video trace average but either can be selected in the Det Avg Mode menu 4 1 b Dataseting We Dee v Data setting Reference marker setting Move the active marker Select the ON mode Frequency and level differences between the reference marker and active marker are displayed 5 Peak List Frequency 6 1 Frequency P counter Y Data setting Counter position setting peak list in frequency order is displayed peak list
111. Video BW Sweep Time Limit No 1 Measure Results Table No 1 Judge 1 30 000000 MHz 1 000000000 GHz 100 000 kHz 100 000 kHz 190 000 ms 13 00 dBm Spurious Frequency Spurious Level 999 030000 MHz 64 66 dBm Judge Spr Results 1 Previous Band U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting The difference CN ratio between a carrier level C and noise level N in terrestrial digital broadcasting is measured When measuring the CN ratio connect the 75 Q impedance converter ZT 130NC to RF1 input con nector of this instrument Set the measurement unit to dBuV Jj mer QN e sp FNO 5 SEES e Ems He Ope il ZT 130NC 700 signal Setting measurement unit 1 Press AMPLITUDE Units and 4 The measurement unit is set to dBu V 2 Press AMPLITUDE 2 and Input Impedance 50 75 75 The conversion loss of the 75 Q impedance converter ZT 130NC is corrected for the measured value U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Measuring the carrier level C Setting this instrument Measurement mode Channel power measurement fu
112. Video bandwidth Sweep time Reference level Amplitude Attenuation Pre amplifier ON OFF Limit Amplitude Query reply Remarks Delete Active Spurious Configura tion Table SENSe SPURious LIST DELete Set Number of Points in Trace Buff ers SENSe SWEep POINts 1 1 SENSe SWEep POINts Integer Integer Set Total Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe TOTPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Total Power Averaging Control Mode SENSe TOTPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Total Power Averaging SENSe TOTPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe TOTPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Total Power Settings SENSe TOTPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Total Power SENSe TOTPower DATA SAVE Select Total Power Trace 6 102 SENSe TOTPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe TOTPower TRACe Trace index Trace index U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 15 Subsystem SOURce Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Enable TG Reference Line SOURce CORRection RLINe STATe 21 1 SOURce CORRection RLINe STATe Acquire Trace Normalization Data SOURce CORRection TRACe 1 Trace index CAPTure Enable TG Normalization Correcti
113. and stops CNT Sets the CONTINUOUS mode Repeats the sweep automatically by the next trigger signal after the sweep stops Displays the Trigger menu Displays the Trig Source menu Repeats the sweep automatically Synchronizes the sweep with the video signal and then starts the sweep Synchronizes the sweep with the external trigger signal EXT ter minal and then starts the sweep Synchronizes the sweep with the IF signal and then starts the sweep Sets the trigger signal for the external trigger signal Sets the trigger level for the Video or IF trigger Switches the trigger slope polarity This setting is enabled only when the video trigger external trig ger or IF trigger is used NEG Starts the sweep at the falling edge of a trigger POS Starts the sweep at the rising edge of a trigger Sets the delay time from a trigger point Gated Sweep Gated Sweep ON OFF Source Slope NEG POS Gate Delay Gate Width input signal U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Displays the Gated Sweep menu Switches the gated sweep ON and OFF ON Sweep is executed according to the currently set gate conditions gate position and width OFF Turns the gated sweep mode off Displays the Gate Source menu External Performs sweep synchronizing with the external trigger signal IF Performs sweep synchronizing with the IF signal Switches the trigger slope polarity NEG
114. are the VBIB 32 BAS file in which the GPIB communication interface for the Visual Basic language provided by the NI Corp is described and the NIGLOBAL BAS file in which errors and timeout values are defined 6 9 1 2 Program Examples Using VB Example 1 Setting the center frequency after resetting this instrument Call ibdev 0 8 T10S 1 0 SPA Initialize Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa IP preset Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the center frequency to 30 MHz Example2 Setting the start frequency to 300 kHz setting the stop frequency to 800 kHz and adding 50 kHz to the frequency offset Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa FA 300KZ Sets the start frequency to 300 kHz Call ibwrt spa FB 800KZ Sets the stop frequency to 800 kHz Call ibwrt spa FO 50KZ Adds 50 kHz to the frequency offset 6 54 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 3 Setting the reference level to 87 dBuV in 5 dB div and the RBW to 100 kHz Example 4 Example 5 Call Call Call Call Call ibclr spa ibwrt spa spa spa spa ibwrt ibwrt ibwrt Performs a Device Clear AUNITS DBUV Sets the level unit to RL 87DB Sets the reference level to 87 dB DD 5DB Sets the vertical scale to 5 dB div RB 100KZ Sets the RBW to 100 kHz Setting the instrument using variables Dim A
115. been designed to withstand a certain amount of noise from the AC power line it should be used in a low noise area Use a noise cut filter if ambient noise is unavoidable An area in which the airflow is not obstructed There is an exhaust cooling fan and exhaust vents on both sides of this instrument Do not obstruct the fan and vents If there is insufficient airflow around the vents the internal temperature will rise and the instrument may operate incorrectly Keep a space of 10 centimeters between the side panel and the wall Do not use this instrument on its side Direct sunlight Corrosive Ge Line Filter Vibration Avoid operating in these areas Use a noise cut filter if noise is unavoidable on the AC power line Side Do not use this instrument its side Keep a space of 10 centimeters from the wall Figure 3 1 Operating Environment 3 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 Power Supply 3 3 Power Supply This instrument can use the following three types of power sources An Power Supply Automatically switches the power supply voltage between 100 V AC and 200 V AC A battery Use an external battery pack A870008 Recommended battery pack DIONIC90 Manufactured by Anton Bauer Inc Anexternal DC power supply Use an external DC power cable A114020 CAUTION Con
116. converted to the ASCII data DoEvents Next i Call ibwrt spa AV Sets Trace A to VIEW Program example of absolute value output When using FORM3 add the line shown below to NIGLOBAL The CopyValtoVal API function is required to shift 32 bits Declare Sub CopyValtoVal Lib kernel32 Alias RtlMoveMemory Destination As Any Source As Any ByVal length As Long Example 4 FORM2 Reading the memory data in binary 16 bit integer order swap Dim tr 1000 As Integer Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM2 Switches to FORM2 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrdi Spa tr 1001 2 Reads 1001 points of binary data For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points res res amp Str tr i amp vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the LF EOI Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 1 6 67 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 68 Example 5 FORM3 Reading the memory A data in binary 32 b
117. correction data acquisition is completed 4 Status Byte Register The status byte register summarizes the information from the status register A summary of this status byte register is sent to the controller as a service request Therefore the status byte register operates slightly differently than the status register structure This section describes the status byte register The structure of the status byte register is shown in Figure 6 6 aris je eT Tr Te Figure 6 6 Structure of the Status Byte Register This status byte register follows the status register except for the following three points summary of the status byte register is written to bit6 of the status byte register Bit6 of the enable register is always valid and cannot be changed Bit6 MSS ofthe status byte register writes the RQS of the service request 6 16 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte This register responds to the serial polling from the controller When the register responds to the serial polling 10 to bit5 bit7 and RQS of the status byte register are read and then is reset to 0 No other bits are cleared until each factor is set to 0 The status byte register RQS and MSS can be cleared by executing CLS and S2 Consequently the SRQ line is set to FALSE The meaning of each bit in the status byte register is shown below Functional definition Description A summa
118. dB Input Channel Power AVG SLIDE 30 30 Channel Power 62 02 dBpV Power Spectral Density 114 22 dBm Hz 4 58 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement Reflection characteristics of an antenna and filter are measured by using the SWR bridge A return loss and VSWR at a marker point are displayed 1 Connect SWR bridge as shown in Figure 4 23 VSWR Measurement ani ETE D Game blaaaaaana 5 TEST DUT Figure 4 23 VSWR Measurement 2 Execute normalization without connecting a DUT to the TEST port of the SWR bridge Set CENTER SPAN and REF in accordance with the DUT Press TG Reference Line ON OFF ON 2 0 and MHz Set the reference line to 20 dBm Press TG and TG ON OFF ON Set the TG output to ON Press Normalize Capture Normz Data and Normalize Correction ON OFF ON Normalization is executed while the TEST port is open CAUTION If a setting condition is changed after normalization is executed re execute normalization 4 59 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement REF 0 00 dBm CENTER2 4130 GHz RBW 3 2007 Jun 15 09 01 TG SPAN 500 0 MHz ATT 10 00 dB 1 Capture Nonnz Data 3 Normaliz
119. dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp Second harmonic distortion lt 70 dBc Preamp Off Mixer input level 40 dBm Frequency gt 200 MHz lt 75 dBc typ Preamp Off Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 300 MHz Third order intermodulation distortion TOD Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm Frequency separation 200 kHz 50 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses Image Suppression On lt 60 dBc Residual responses 7 8 Frequency 10 MHz to 8 GHz lt 80dBm Preamp Off U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 6 Input and Output 7 2 6 Input and Output Description Specifications RF input Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 500 nom Input attenuator 10 dB lt 1 71 lt 3 0 GHz lt 2 0 1 gt 3 0 GHz Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 500 nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on the rear panel 10 kQ nom DC coupling 0Vto5 V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Level BNC f on the rear panel 500 nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear pan
120. drift nominal 5 x 107 25 C 10 minutes after turning the power on Temperature drift 5 x 10 8 0 to 40 C with reference to 25 C 7 18 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 4 Option 28 EMC Filter 7 5 4 Option 28 EMC Filter 6 dB bandwidth Range Accuracy 7 5 5 Time axis waveform record 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz lt 10 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option Item Description RF frequency range Conforms to the frequency range for each model of the U3700 series RF amplitude range Noise level to 30 dBm 1 Waveform record format vector time waveform Measurement bandwidth BW 100 Hz to 3 MHz 1 to 3 steps sampling rate 713 Hz BW 100 Hz to 21 4 MHz BW 3 MHz waveform record time 49 msec BW 3 MHz to 1000 sec BW 100 Hz Number of I Q waveform record samples Samples 1 9 1 The noise level conforms to the dynamic range specifications for each model of the U3700 series 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N 1 U3741 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency span Range Accuracy 0 1 kHz to Full 1 Signal purity When the internal frequency reference is used 98 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 1 MHz Resolution bandwidth RBW Range Accuracy 30 Hz to 1 MHz 1 3 sequence 12 7 19 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N Dynamic Range
121. followed by a return mark and the most recent result An example display RefLevel 0 0000 UNIT 0 Executing the 6 dB down operation reading the frequency and level and displaying them Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the parameter Call ibwrt spa SP 20MZ Call ibwrt spa MKBW 6DB Sets a 6 dB down measurement Call ibwrt spa PS Executes the peak search Call ibwrt spa XDB Performs the 6 dB down measurement Call ibwrt spa MFL Requests the value of the marker level and frequency Rdbuff Space 50 Allocates the buffer memory space to 50 bytes Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 50 bytes Max from the spectrum analyzer sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text Marker Freq Level 6 Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the data on the screen An example display Marker Freq amp Level 2 000000000000 05 1 023437500000 00 6 59 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 60 Example 5 Measuring OBW and displaying it Dim LENG1 As Integer LENG2 As Dim OBW As String Dim FC As String Dim searchchar As String Call ibclr spa Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ spa SP 1MZ spa MLN ON spa MK 30MZ spa TS Cal
122. kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz a AM Meas ON OFF FM Meas 5 Sound Noise Hz Noise x Hz dBm Hz ON OFF dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF dBc Hz ON OFF X dB Down Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Execute ON OFF Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF _ Peak Delta Y Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Volume Pause Time Displays the Noise Hz menu Activates settings of the noise measurement bandwidth The initial value is 1 Hz ON Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF Sets the vertical axis unit to dBm and sets the marker unit to dBm Hz OFF Terminates the dBm Hz function ON Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF Sets the vertical axis unit to dBuV and sets the marker unit to dBuV sqrt Hz OFF Terminates the dBuV sqrt Hz function ON Automatically sets the marker to the delta marker mode if the marker is set to OFF Sets the delta marker unit to dBc Hz OFF Terminates the dBc Hz function Displays the X dB Down menu Displays the marker automatically if the marker is set to OFF The trace for which the X dB Down function is executed is the active trace Set the marker on the active trace According to the Mode setting displays a normal marker and a delta marker X dB lower than the current position Display
123. limit line 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DISPLAY ON End Sub 6 109 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 7 Reading and displaying the marker level Private Sub cmdEx2 1 Click 6 110 Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Reading and displaying the marker level Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN 1 MHZ Enable marker 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 STATE ON Set the marker to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 x 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa SENS SWEEP TIME 2 S Execute a single uninterruptible sweep Call ibwrt spa INIT TS Request the marker level read out and read the answer Call ibwrt spa CALC MARK1 y Dim myBuff As String Dim sepa As Integer myBuff Space 30 Call ilrd spa myBuff 30 Sepa InStr 1 myBuff vbCrLf txbAnswer Text MarkerLevel Left myBuff sepa 1 End Sub U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 8 Reading trace A data in ASCII format Private Sub cmdAsciiTraceGet_Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim i Dim trace 1001 As Integer array to contain the trace points amplitudes at the end Dim tmp As String Dim before As Integer Dim after As Integer Dim cnt
124. line in the channel table Delete Line Deletes line where the cursor 15 positioned Table Init Initializes the channel table Clears all settings U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Formula 1 ON OFF Formula 2 ON OFF Formula 3 ON OFF Sets the mathematical formula used in the channel input mode This function is enabled when Freq Input Mode is set to CALC More 1 2 Displays the Frequency 2 2 menu Signal Identification ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON Turns on the Signal Identification function Image signals shift on the screen but the signals do not move in each sweep OFF Cancels the Signal Identification function Image Suppression ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON Turns on the Image Suppression function Detects image signals and deletes them from the display OFF Cancels the Image Suppression function U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 14 SPAN Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune 5 2 14 SPAN Span Full Span Zero Span Last Span Peak Zoom Auto Tune Sets the frequency span The frequency range is displayed by the center frequency and fre quency span Sets the frequency span to full span SPAN 8 GHz Sets the zero span mode at the center frequency Returns the frequency span to the previous value Displays the marker at the highest peak in the targeted search range and sets the frequency of the marker to the center frequency At this time the
125. menu GPIB Address Sets the GPIB address of this instrument LAN IP Address Sets the IP address of this instrument Displays the Network Setting dialog window Network Setting Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP Address 1928 168 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 R3162 Mode ON OFF U3751 U3771 U3772 ON The following R3162GPIB commands can be used and their operations are the same as those of the R3162 For more information on the commands refer to the R3162 manual Command MN MKD PWCH PWTM PWTOTAL PWM OBW ON OFF OBWEXE ACPEXE LIMTYP LMTAIN LMTADEL LIMAPOS REL LIMASFT LIMSFT AT ODB DL OFF Operates in the U3700 series command system U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM R3131 Mode ON OFF U3741 ON Except for certain R3131 R3131A functions the same GPIB commands as those for the R3131 R3131A can be used For more information on commands refer to the R3131 Series Operation Manual Unavailable functions Trigger LINE EMC Calibration Hard Copy OFF Operates in the U3700 series command system Parser AT SCPI Selects a remote command set to be used AT The AT Advantest command set is selected SCPI SCPI command set is selected Trace Points 501 1001 Switches the horizontal axis trace points to 501 or 1001 501 Sets trace points to 501 points
126. oto 4E qn RR ENS 1 A 2 Principle of Operation STU A 4 A 2 1 4 2 2 Root Nyquist Filter A 5 7 A4 dB Conversion Formula u aa alana ua Puan A 13 AS Men Map LIS u A 14 A6 TV Channel Table Japan issesanteeoagenten onse tus tarde Neuve sce qux pepe e ebat A 27 A 6 1 CATV Channel Number and Frequency A 27 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency A 29 A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency A 31 A 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency A 33 A 6 5 110 CS CS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency A 33 U3741 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE 2 12 000004 1 1 EXT 1 U3751 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING ne 2 3771 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING EXT 3 U3772 DIMENSIONAL OUTLINE DRAWING nn EXT 4 C 5 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK ALPHABETICAL INDEX C 6 U3700 Series User s Guide LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS No Title Page 3 1 Operating 3 3 3 2 Connecting the Po
127. screen Certain panel keys such as the LOCAL key do not display a soft menu The menu items are arranged according to the soft keys The number of the menu item accords with the number of the related soft key Press a soft key to select the related menu Certain soft keys display another menu The following describes the functions of the panel key and soft key 1 Selecting a menu To set the measurement conditions press the panel key and select the menu Press AMPLITUDE The reference level setting value is displayed in the active function display area and the following Level menu is displayed to the right of the screen 1 Ref Level 2ATTV 3 dB div W 4 Vertical Scale LIN LOG 5 Units W 6 Slide Screen ON OFF 7 More 1 2 W The frame of the 1 Ref Level menu is displayed in red This red frame menu means that data can be entered 2 Dataentry If the set value is displayed in the active function display area it can be changed by using keypad step key or data knob Data entry by using the keypad Enter data by using the keypad decimal point key BK SP backspace key and minus key If any wrong numbers are entered by using the keypad use the BK SP to delete a character to the left and enter the correct number If no data is entered and BK SP is pressed minus is entered After entering data press the unit key ENTER to complete the entry If any other panel key is pressed before the unit key is pressed any ente
128. shown below n Figure A 3 Characteristics of the Root Nyquist Filter A 6 U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Glossary Resolution Bandwidth The spectrum analyzer uses the band pass filter BPF to analyze certain frequencies in the input signal The 3 dB bandwidth of the BPF is called the resolution bandwidth See Figure A 4 The BPF characteristics should be set according to the sweep width and the sweep speed used for the trace This spectrum analyzer sets the optimal value for the sweep width In general smaller bandwidths improve resolution and the resolution of the spectrum analyzer should be expressed by using the narrowest resolution bandwidth See Figure A 4 b below RBW resolution bandwidth RBW RBW Signal spacing 3 dB RBW lt Signal spacing Resolution bandwidth Resolution a b Figure A 4 Resolution Bandwidth IF Gain Uncertainty The uppermost scale on the screen is the reference used to read the absolute level of an input signal on the spectrum analyzer The level set for this uppermost scale is referred to as the reference level The reference level is set using the Ref Level key and displayed in dBm or dBu The absolute accuracy of this display is determined by the IF gain uncertainty assuming the input attenuator is at a constant level Reference level Figure A 5 IF Gain Uncertainty Gain Compression If th
129. spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa tbxCenter tbxSpan and tbxAttenuation are 3 text boxes on the form A user would give value in MHz to center span and a value in dB to attenuation in this example we shall show how to use these Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENTER tbxCenter Text MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN tbxSpan Text MHZ Call ibwrt spa POWER ATT tbxAttenuation Text DB End Sub Example 5 Saving and recalling the set values Private Sub cmdEx5 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa In this example we shall setup a few instrument parameters get a title and save these information to a file Execute an instrument preset then restore the saved configuration Define the instrument title Dim LabelBuff As String LabelBuff Spectrum Analyzer U37xx Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ SPAN 1 MHZ Call ibwrt spa DETECTOR POS Call ibwrt spa DISP ANN TITLE DATA LabelBuff set the title Save the data to a file called SET5 Call ibwrt spa MMEMORY STORE ITEMS SET5 Clear the configuration Call ibwrt spa RST Recall the configuration Call ibwrt spa MMEMORY LOAD ITEMS SET5 End Sub U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 6 Filling limit li
130. the Rear Panel 4 9 4 2 Basic Operation 4 10 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry a 4 10 4 3 Basic Measurements sp ga NU URN UE 4 13 4 3 1 E UI UT Rm 4 13 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 4 17 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message 4 22 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal aU URN oS 4 25 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 27 4 3 5 1 Output to A Printer uav 4 27 4 3 5 2 File Output to USB Memory a 4 28 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 4 30 4 3 7 USER 4 36 4 4 Measurement Examples irure IN ae nn eem 4 37 4 41 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 4 37 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measuremetnt 4 43 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement 4 45 44 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement a 4 48 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 4 51 4 4
131. the USER menu in the soft menu dis play area 2 Press SHIFT and then USER 3 Pressa menu key to be set If canceling the setting press any other operation key If setting an additional function menu to the USER menu repeat the above procedure How to delete a function menu from the USER menu 1 Press USER to display the USER menu 2 Press SHIFT and then USER 3 Pressa menu key to be deleted If deleting an additional soft key repeat the above procedure 4 36 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 Measurement Examples 4 4 Measurement Examples Descriptions regarding Turning on the power and Initializing this instrument are omitted from this chap ter 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table When a signal is measured by using a long measurement cable the measurement level accuracy can be improved by correcting the cable frequency loss Functions used in this measurement 1 TG option Normalize function Cable loss measurement 2 Level correction table Long measurement cable he Measuring the cable loss 1 Connect TG OUTPUT and RF INPUTI by using the input cable included with this instrument lem GER 0 65 N Hom 7 Qm 35 gt e D e BID
132. the Write mode the data in memory B is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory C When trace A is set to the Write mode the data acquired in the sweep is subtracted from the data in memory B and the result is entered into memory C When trace A is set to the Write mode the data on the display line is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory A When trace B is set to the Write mode the data on the display line is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory B ON Displays and activates the display line OFF Cancels the display line Displays the Store menu Copies the active trace data and sets to the View mode Saves the active trace data to trace memory A Saves the active trace data to trace memory B Saves active trace data to trace memory C Selects the applied trace memory Selects the applied trace memory Selects the applied trace memory U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 9 MKR 5 2 9 MKR Displays the Marker menu and an active marker by pressing the MKR key The frequency and level on the marker are displayed in the marker area Select Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode gt Delta ON OFF Peak Menu Ref Object Reference Marker Clear All Fixed Mkr ON OFF Reference Line L More 1 2 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF i L Others HIDESHOW
133. the front panel and the N m BNC f adaptor ADNANTIET 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER p Wk w SS Figure 4 16 Connecting the CAL Signal Setting measurement conditions Set 8 10 the measurement conditions to observe the input signal more easily Press FREQUENCY 2 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 20 MHz Press CPL Sweep Time AUTO MNL 2 0 and kHz ms The sweep time is set to 20 ms Press SPAN 1 0 and kHz The span is set to 10 kHz The RBW is automatically set to 300 Hz according to the span setting and UNCAL message is displayed The sweep time setting of 20 msec is too fast for the set conditions 4 23 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message REF 0 00 dBm 100 CENTER 20 00000 MHz SPAN 10 00 kHz RBW 300 Hz VBW 300 Hz ATT 10 dB Figure 4 17 Displaying the UNCAL Message How to cancel the UNCAL message 11 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 1 and kHz Setting the RBW to 1 kHz cancels the UNCAL message because the sweep time of 20 msec meets the set conditions Coupling REF 0 00 dBm RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AU
134. the instrument then set center frequency to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa RST Call ibwrt spa FREQ CENT 30 MHZ End Sub Example 2 Setting the start frequency to 300 kHz stop frequency to 800 kHz and frequency offset to 50 kHz Private Sub cmdEx2 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer Spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Set Start Frequency to 300 kHz Stop Frequency to 800 kHz Set frequency Offset to 50 kHz Call ibwrt spa FREQ START 300 KHZ STOP 800 KHZ Call ibwrt spa DISPLay WINDow TRACe X OFFSet 50KHZ OFFSET STATe ON End Sub Example 3 Setting the reference level to 87 dBu V dB div to 5 dB and RBW to 100 kHz Private Sub cmdEx3 Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Set the units to dBUV Call ibwrt spa UNIT POWER DBUV Set the reference level to 87 dBuV Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE Y RLEVEL 87 Both commands above have the same effect as call ibwrt spa disp trace y rlevel 87 dbuv Set the amplitude per division to 5 db division Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE Y PDIV 5 DB Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz Call ibwrt spa SENS BAND RESOLUTION 100 KHZ End Sub 6 107 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used 6 108 Example 4 Setting the center frequency frequency span and attenuator by using variables Private Sub cmdEx4 Click Initialization Dim
135. the spurious measurement OFF Terminates the spurious measurement Selects a trace in which to execute the spurious measurement Displays the Spr Config menu At the same time the Spurious Bands setting window is dis played The start and stop frequencies of the spurious measurement band the RBW VBW sweep time attenuator reference level preamp ON or OFF and the judgment level value used in the measure ment can be set in the Spurious Bands setting window Spurious Bands No 1 2 3 Start 1 RBW Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual VBW Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual ATT Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Ref Level NENNEN Preamp On Off On Off On Off LM p p Insert Band Delete Band Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Results Previous Band Next Band Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Inserts a column in which spurious measurement conditions can be set at the current cursor position The data contained in the row that existed in the position before insertion is copied to each setting value as new row data Deletes a column of measurement conditions from the current cursor position Initializes all data in the table currently being edited Sets the setting sequence table number for the spurious measure ment to 1 2
136. vs Time 5 66 5 70 Freq vs Time ON OFF 5 66 5 70 breq 5 66 5 70 FREQUENCY 5 57 BLE QUENCY 6 24 7 2 7 6 7 10 Frequency Correction ON OFF 5 7 5 11 Frequency Counter 5 36 5 40 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 57 Frequency 5 66 5 70 Frequency Reference 5 7 5 9 Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL 5 7 5 9 Frequency Zoom ON OFF 5 66 5 70 Front Panel teer 4 1 Full Span nan aa mene 5 61 Functional Descriptions 5 7 FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION 5 1 Fundamental ON OFF 5 36 5 40 G Gate Delay 5 65 5 67 Gate Width asas aaa 5 65 5 67 Gated Sweep scene 5 65 5 67 Gated Sweep ON OFF 5 65 5 67 General Specifications 7 15 A 7 GPIB 6 50 Addr S _ ie eere 5 7 5 10 GPIB Bus Functions 6 4 GPIB Interface Functions 6 4 GPIB Remote Control System 6 2 GPIB Remote Programming 6 19 Graph ON OFF 5 26 5 32 1 3 U3700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index nih etes ies Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Z
137. 0 Series User s Guide A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency 1 VHF Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency channel MHz MHz MHz 90 00 96 00 96 00 102 00 102 00 108 00 170 00 176 00 176 00 182 00 182 00 188 00 188 00 194 00 192 00 198 00 198 00 204 00 204 00 210 00 210 00 216 00 216 00 222 00 NT ND Mm N nT A A BY S NTR N Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency Picture frequency Sound frequency Channel channel MHz MHz MHz MHz 470 00 476 00 476 00 482 00 482 00 488 00 488 00 494 00 494 00 500 00 500 00 506 00 506 00 512 00 512 00 518 00 518 00 524 00 524 00 530 00 530 00 536 00 536 00 542 00 542 00 548 00 548 00 554 00 554 00 560 00 560 00 566 00 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 2 VHF UHF Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s channel Channel Frequency range MHz Center frequency MHz Picture frequency MHz Sound frequency MHz 29 29 566 00 572 00 569 567 25 571 75 30 30 572 00 578 00 575 573 25 577 75 31 31 578 00 584 00 581 579 25
138. 00 dB 12 90 dBm 78 74 dBm Hz Channel Power Power Spectral Density Level 2 2 1 Ref Offset ON Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON 4 correction Factor ON 5 Edit Corr Factor 7 Round Grid Values ON OFF H Level 2 2 REF 0 00 dBm DL 10 50 dBm il 10 048 Ref Offset REF ON 10 0 00 dBm gt Input Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON OFF 4 correction Factor ON OFF 5 Edit Corr Factor 100 CENTER 2 10000 GHz RBW 100 kHz SPAN 10 00 MHz VBW 100 kHz ATT 10 00 dB Channel Power 7 10 50 dBm enters 76 34 dBm Hz ON OFF Channel Power Power Spectral Density Frequency 2 1 GHz Measurement value 12 9 dBm Frequency 2 1 GHz Measurement value 10 5 dBm 4 41 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table Available range of the correction value Up to 100 dB can be set as the correction value The correction value of the first correction point is applied to frequencies from 0 Hz to the first correction point frequency Correction values between points where correction values are set are obtained by using a method of linear interpolation The correction value of the last correction point is applied to frequencies following to the last correction point frequency Correction ON Correction OFF FL Fu 4 42
139. 1 1 This query reply shows that one variable is replied For this example or 0 is replied Example of a query reply consisting of multiple variables 1 2 3 4 IDN U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 2 This section describes IEEE common commands Function description Goto Local LAN Common Commands SCPI Command GTL Parameter 6 10 2 Common Commands Query reply Remarks Local Lockout LAN LLO Set Operation Register Mask OPR 21 1 16 bit register 16 bit register Query Operation Register 1 16 bit register Set the parser command set PARSER 1 1 PARSER ATset SCPIset AT SCPI REN REN Clear Registers CLS Enable Standard Event Register ESE 1 1 ESE 8 bit register 8 bit register Query Standard Event Register 1 ESR 8 bit register Return various identifiers of the instrument 1 2 3 4 IDN Corporate Name String Model Name String Serial Number String Software version String Instrument Preset RST Set Service Request Enable SRE 21 1 SRE 8 bit register 8 bit register Query Status Byte 1 STB 8 bit register Execute Self Test 1 2 3 TST number of rows check item SUPP MEM CPU RFRG RFLK LORG LOLK IFRGJIFLK TGRG TEMP check result Status Wait WAI Query Installed Option
140. 1001 Sets trace points to 1001 points Calibration Displays the Calibration menu Calibrate ALL Performs all calibrations Each Item Displays the Each Item menu Total Gain RF Path 1 Measures the absolute error at 20 MHz based on the CAL signal that is input to the RF INPUTI connector Total Gain RF Path 2 Measures the absolute error at 20 MHz based the CAL signal that is input to the RF INPUT2 connector U3771 U3772 Step ATT CAL Measures the error at 20 MHz when switching ATT RBW CAL Automatically adjusts IF filters PBW Performs the calibration of the noise power bandwidth Report HIDE SHOW Hides or displays the calibration results Calibration F Int Ref Calibrates the frequency of the crystal oscillator that is used for the internal frequency reference Coarse Changes the data of the coarse adjustment Fine Changes the data of the fine adjustment Store Saves the adjusted data The saved data is used even if this instrument is preset Default I the calibration data when this instrument 1s shipped from the actory Calibration Corrections ON OFF Switches the calibration factor ON and OFF ON Uses the CAL factor OFF Does not use the CAL factor Frequency Correction ON OFF Switches the frequency correction function ON and OFF ON Corrects the frequency characteristics OFF Cancels the frequency correction function U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM More 1 2 Color Pattern Color1 Color2 Black and
141. 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 6 I O Format 1 O format Description ASCII format DDDDD CRLF 1 Delimiter Data for one point Five byte data without header Input GPIB code Output GPIB code Memory TAA TAA Memory B TAB TAB Memory C TAC Binary format FORMI 16 bit integer DD DD DD DD EOI Delimiter Low order byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point High order byte High order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point FORM2 DD DD DD DD EOI Delimiter High order byte High order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point Low orderr byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point Each point data is divided into two parts high and low order bytes EOI signal is attached at the end of the data for continuous 1001 points Input GPIB code Output GPIB code Memory A TBA TBA Memory B TBB TBB Memory C TBC TBC 6 64 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 7 Absolute Value Output Format I O format Description Binary format FORM3 32 bit floating point DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD EOI 1 Delimiter Low order byte Low order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point High order byte High order byte for 1st point for 1001 501st point For DDDDDDDD 12345678 data is output in order from 12345678 FORMA DD DD DD DD DD DD DD DD EOI Delimiter
142. 3 1 2 REF 108 75 10 0 Recall Media Hash Memory Files File Info 7_Digital_ChPower dat File Name Modified Size Mode 07 2 16 16 067 1 O7 2 16 16 067 1 07 2 16 16 066 5 Ee Toe 1725 7 a 07 2 15 16 066 5 KB 07 2 16 16 067 1 Traces Context B 07 2 16 16 06 71 sis 1 Digital ChPower dat 07 2 16 16 06 7 1 KB Setup OH Channel ACP Items SEM Spurious 1 Factor 5 Digital ChPower dat Recall Cancel Media CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 1 MHz VBW 1 MHz SWP 60ms ATT 10 00 dB 4 57 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 6 Television Signal Measurement 3 Press Hz The 7 Digital ChPower dat file is determined as a file to be recalled 4 Press 2 W Select the Recall button 5 Press Hz The terrestrial digital broadcasting channel table and measurement conditions are recalled and set 6 Press FREQUENCY 2 8 and Hz The center frequency is set to 563 14 MHz that is for Channel 28 At the same time the channel power measurement starts and then the measure ment result is displayed 750 2007 Feb 16 17 21 Freauencv REF 80 00 DL 62 02 MKR 563 14 1 10 0 dB 36 22 Center g CENTER CH n 28 MHz Stop Offset OFF i 4 Frequency TF Step Size AUTO MNL 2 6 20 um m CONSU OTIS SEENI A masm CENTER 563 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz Channel 20 ms ATT 10 00
143. 42 CNO 6 42 ien pO 6 42 6 42 ICING EE 6 42 CNPOS a teres 6 42 6 42 CNRES 4nd i etit e EHE 6 42 CORS 6 28 CORS OEE ecce PTS 6 28 eee 6 28 COUNT u ERR E IUE 6 42 COVR 6 28 inerte Ee 6 28 COVR ON 5er tats deegsnnsteccedsessiees 6 28 P 6 38 Unde 6 47 idest nde PIE 6 27 CRON p P 6 27 CRDEE 6 27 6 47 6 27 6 47 o m 6 25 CSBSDBL rires 6 44 CSBSIN 6 44 CTNTSEL 6 34 DB R 6 54 6 54 DBM iiie an amas 6 54 DBM nece rhe aa 6 54 DBPW annone 6 54 ka a 6 54 DCO 6 39 RO te a 6 39 6 39 DD cio amete RUDI 6 27 DEL 6 48 DET rein ep vehe HR p a 6 32 6 32 6 32 DETB erret 6 32 DE VC Sunan ote eis 6 32 DELIMO 6 51 DEMI 6 51 DILIM2 6 51 DLIMS dent 6 51 DLN qha 6 34 DEN ORF 6 34 6 34 6 37 DUALCH 6 35 DUA CHINIT 6 35 DY M 6 38 6 54
144. 49 VSWR ecc huit ite aaa 6 53 6 49 VSWRLOSS 6 53 6 49 VSWRON c RR oe 6 53 SVNRMIC 6 49 W 6 54 SV SEM A 6 49 WIJOSWP 6 34 6 48 6 34 SVePR1 6 49 ainena apa 6 34 SVSPR2 6 49 6 48 SVSPR3 6 49 KDB 6 39 SVTRCIA 6 48 6 39 SVIRCI B un a 6 49 XDR 6 39 6 49 6 27 SVTRGC2A iones e EDU 6 49 ZMPOS etse eee eere saku 6 34 2 6 49 ZMWID 6 34 6 29 ZW RR 6 25 6 23 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 AT Command List 6 8 Command List 6 8 1 Function Center Frequency Frequency Command EXE SET Query GET Code CF Argument Format Frequency Code Output Format Frequency CF Step Size CS Frequency Frequency CF Step Auto ON OFF 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Frequency Offset ON FO ON OFF Frequency Frequency 0 OFF 1 ON Start Frequency FA Frequency Frequency Stop Frequency FB Frequency Frequency Frequency Span SP Frequ
145. 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Graphic Z 2 Screens Displays the G Zoom 2 Screen menu Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The upper screen displays the original waveform The lower screen zooms in on the area selected by the window OFF Cancels the zoom in display Window Position Sets the center position of the window Window Width Sets the window width Freq Zoom Displays the Freq Zoom menu Frequency Zoom ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The upper screen displays the original waveform The lower screen zooms in on the frequency range selected by the window in which the sweep is performed OFF Cancels the dual screen display Zoom Position Sets the center position of the window Zoom Width Sets the window width Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower screen A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed Freq vs Time Displays the Freq vs Time menu Freq vs Time ON OFF ON Splits the screen into an upper and lower display The horizontal axis in the upper screen represents frequency and the lower screen represents the time zero span at the zoomed position OFF Cancels the dual screen display Frequency Pos Sets the frequency where the zero span is performed Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower screen
146. 583 75 32 32 584 00 590 00 587 585 25 589 75 33 33 590 00 596 00 593 591 25 595 75 34 34 596 00 602 00 599 597 25 601 75 35 35 602 00 608 00 605 603 25 607 75 36 36 608 00 614 00 611 609 25 613 75 37 37 614 00 620 00 617 615 25 619 75 38 38 620 00 626 00 623 621 25 625 75 39 39 626 00 632 00 629 627 25 631 75 40 40 632 00 638 00 635 633 25 637 75 41 41 638 00 644 00 641 639 25 643 75 42 42 644 00 650 00 647 645 25 649 75 43 43 650 00 656 00 653 651 25 655 75 44 44 656 00 662 00 659 657 25 661 75 45 45 662 00 668 00 665 663 25 667 75 46 46 668 00 674 00 671 669 25 673 75 47 47 674 00 680 00 677 675 25 679 75 48 48 680 00 686 00 683 681 25 685 75 49 49 686 00 692 00 689 687 25 691 75 50 50 692 00 698 00 695 693 25 697 75 51 51 698 00 704 00 701 699 25 703 75 52 52 704 00 710 00 707 705 25 709 75 53 53 710 00 716 00 713 711 25 715 75 54 54 716 00 722 00 719 717 25 721 75 55 55 722 00 728 00 725 723 25 727 75 56 56 728 00 734 00 731 729 25 733 75 57 57 734 00 740 00 737 735 25 739 75 58 58 740 00 746 00 743 741 25 745 75 59 59 746 00 752 00 749 747 25 751 75 60 60 752 00 758 00 755 753 25 757 75 61 61 758 00 764 00 761 759 25 763 75 62 62 764 00 770 00 767 765 25 769 75 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency A 6 3 Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Channel Number and Frequency
147. 6 8 17 Function Save File or File Number Save Recall ON OFF Command EXE SET Query GET Code SV Argument Format String Integer Code Output Format Delete File DEL String Recall File RC String Rename File New Name String String Write Protect File WP String ONJOFF File Format FILEFORMAT BIN XML FILEFORMAT 0 BIN 1 XML Media FILEMEDIA FLASH USB FILEMEDIA 0 FLASH 1 USB Save Setup SVSET ON OFF SVSET 0 OFF 1 ON Save Trace A Context 1 SVTRCIA ON OFF SVTRCIA 0 OFF 1 ON 6 47 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 17 Save Recall Function Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Save Trace B Context 1 SVTRC1B ON OFF SVTRCIB 0 OFF ON Save Trace C Context 1 SVTRCIC ONJOFF SVTRCIC 0 OFF 2 ON Save Trace A Context 2 SVTRC2A ON OFF SVTRC2A 0 OFF 1 ON Save Trace B Context 2 SVTRC2B ON OFF SVTRC2B 0 OFF 1 ON Save Limit Line 1 SVLIM1 ON OFF SVLIM1 0 OFF 1 ON Save Limit Line 2 SVLIM2 ON OFF SVLIM2 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spurious Table 1 SVSPRI SVSPRI 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spurious Table 2 SVSPR2 ON OFF SVSPR2 0 OFF 1 ON Save Spurious Table 3 SVSPR3
148. 6 Television Signal Measurement 4 57 4 4 7 VSWR Measurement 4 59 3 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION 5 1 5 1 Men Index una aaa t 5 1 5 2 Functional Descriptions n 5 7 5 2 1 SYSTEM unun ntes ENORMES NONI 5 7 5 2 2 eee 5 17 5 2 3 E 5 18 5 2 4 5 24 5 2 5 5 24 5 2 6 woes 5 25 5 2 7 5 36 5 2 8 PRAC E HEP S 5 43 5 2 9 MER Sore a a 5 47 5 2 10 5 50 5 2 11 MKR ee ee ee 5 54 5 2 12 5 55 5 2 13 FREQUENCY M 5 57 5 2 14 5 61 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE dA DUI R 5 62 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options 5 65 5 2 17 5 72 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL 1 24200 000100000043 6 1 6 1 Remote Control r N sns 6 1 6 1 1 Types of Systems 6 1 6 1 2 Selecting the Command Set 6 1 6 2 GPIB Remote Control System 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB Nc n 6 3 6 2 3 GPIB BUS FUnGHONS 6 4 6 2 3 1 GPIB Interface Fu
149. 68 00 674 00 671 142857 674 00 680 00 677 142857 680 00 686 00 683 142857 686 00 692 00 689 142857 692 00 698 00 695 142857 698 00 704 00 701 142857 704 00 710 00 707 142857 710 00 716 00 713 142857 716 00 722 00 719 142857 722 00 728 00 725 142857 728 00 734 00 731 142857 734 00 740 00 737 142857 740 00 746 00 743 142857 746 00 752 00 749 142857 752 00 758 00 755 142857 758 00 764 00 761 142857 764 00 770 00 767 142857 U3700 Series User s Guide A 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency A 6 4 Satellite Broadcasting BS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency l MHz MHz 1032 23 1066 73 1070 59 1105 09 1112 70 1139 70 1151 06 1178 06 1189 42 1216 42 1227 78 1254 78 1262 39 1296 89 1300 75 1335 25 1339 11 1373 61 1377 47 1411 97 1415 83 1450 33 1454 19 1488 69 A 6 5 110 CS CS IF Band Channel Number and Frequency Analyzer s Frequency range Center frequency channel MHz MHz 1595 75 1630 25 1635 75 1670 25 1675 75 1710 25 1715 75 1750 25 1755 75 1790 25 1795 75 1830 25 1835 75 1870 25 1875 75 1910 25 1915 75 1950 25 1955 75 1990 25 1995 75 2030 25 2035 75 2070 25 ONIMVUG ANITLNO
150. 700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration 10 Press Calibrate All on the Calibration menu Calibration starts The following message is displayed if the calibration of RF INPUTI is complete First step of calibration completed Connect the calibrator to RF2 connector Then press OK to continue The calibration is canceled if Hz is pressed To perform the calibration of RF INPUT2 change the cable connection Attach the BNC f SMA m adapter to the RF INPUT2 connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on the front panel and the BNC f SMA m adapter 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER massa m ex wa O G ED m E CD ame m D E TCRA p Gps s la s fa VY YY YS YY UL i Figure 4 10 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUT2 connector 12 Press W and select OK 4 16 Press Hz to start the calibration U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers
151. 71 U3772 QUICK GUIDE Case of output to USB memory copy Device FILE Dumped to a USB memory gt gt REET PRT Dumped to a printer with USB interface Select the FILE mode ScreenShot ie Format PNG Portable Network Graphics format Ong 7 Bitmap format Select PNG or BMP Output device and format setting Screen Shot copy Dump execute soft menu related to operation keys and extended function keys be set to the USER key menu The operability is improved by allocating functions which are frequently used or are located in a deep multilayer menu to the USER key menu A function menu is displayed in the soft menu display area Set the USER 9 menu Press a menu key to be set Repeat the above procedure ui 0 Press USER to display the USER menu Delete the USER menu SHIFT Press menu key to be deleted Repeat the above procedure Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more CAL execute Connect the CAL signal to RF INPUT connector 6 1 rm Calibration GUIDE 4 U3700 Series User s Guide ALPHABETICAL INDEX Symbol 5 27 5 28 Meas ON OFF 5 37 5 40 5 29 5 30 5 25 5 30 5 32 5 36 5 38 5 39 Average ONCE SLIDE 5 25 5 26 Numerics 5 27 5 28 0 5 dB div
152. A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed Time vs Time Sets the dual screen display and displays the horizontal axis in time for both the upper and lower screens The display of the horizontal axis in time is retained even if the dual screen has been canceled by using Reset Context Re set SPAN to display the horizontal axis in frequency U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Reset Context Cancels the dual screen display Context A B Switches the active screen between A upper screen and B lower screen A The upper screen settings can be changed B The lower screen settings can be changed U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function 5 2 17 CPL Coupled function Sets the resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VBW and sweep time CPL RBW AUTO MNL VBW AUTO MNL Sweep Time AUTO MNL EMC gt EMC Filter ON OFF All Auto RBW Auto More 1 2 RBW 200 Hz RBW 9 kHz Ly SPAN RBW ON OFF RBW 120 kHz VBW RBW ON OFF RBW EMH PLL BW L y Auto Medium Narrow RBW AUTO MNL Switches the RBW between auto and manual settings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum RBW according to the frequency span setting MNL The RBW can be set arbitrarily VBW AUTO MNL Switches the VBW between auto and manual settings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum VBW according to the RBW setting
153. ANITLNO u1 JO oy 8uguo osneo p sn suondo pue s onpoid ur ML juoumnjsut Jo suorsu urp eu1ojxo SMOYS SULMBIP 811 ALON 0 000 0 0 04004040 80900902020505900505609 o9o909 0909090809 0909090 050505089505059505080005 02090802 a2 020 9595060020909090 2522220556059226 020902090202020 0000000005002000 LEE SLT EXT 4 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE For Basic Operation es Data input can be done by step keys data knob or numeric keys Press a unit key for entering 0 e m Data setting CH us Center frequency setting Frequency span setting Data setting Reference level setting Start Stop FREQUENCY gt Data setting FREQUENCY Data setting frequency setting Frequency and level setting Start frequency setting Stop frequency setting 1 Resolution ROW p Data setting bandwidth setting AUTO ect the Manual mode Basic operation z Video vow Data setting bandwidth setting puro Select the Manual mode Sweep time Sweep
154. As String Dim B As String Dim C As String A B Gs Call Call Call Call 110 2 20 ibclr spa ibwrt spa ibwrt spa ibwrt spa Sets the character string Performs a Device Clear amp A amp MZ Sets the center frequency to A MHz Sp amp B amp MZ Sets the span to MHz AT amp amp DB Sets the ATT to C dB Saving set values in Register 5 and recalling them from Register 5 Dim LabelBuff As String Defines the character string buffer for the label LabelBuff SPECTRUM Analyzer Sets the label Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa CF 30MZ Sets the parameter Call ibwrt spa SP 1MZ Call ibwrt spa DET POS Call ibwrt spa LON amp LabelBuff Sets the label Call ibwrt spa SV 5 Saves the data to Register 5 Call ibwrt spa CF 1GZ Changes the set parameters Call ibwrt spa SP 200MZ Call ibwrt spa RC 5 Recalls the data from Register 5 6 55 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 Enter Limit linel in the table and turn Limit line 1 on Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa LMTADEL Clears the table used for Limit Line 1 Call ibwrt spa AUNITS DBUV Sets the level unit to dBuV Call ibwrt spa LMTAIN 25MZ 49 5DB Enters data used by Limit Line 1 Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 35
155. B Files File Info advan11 dat File advan 1 dat Setup ON Traces Context v Traces Context A Limit Lines 1 Channel ACP SEM Spurious 71 11 4 Changes the selected filename Deletes the selected file Write protects the selected file ON Prevents data from being written to the file OFF Allows data to be written to the file U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Copy All to Flash Copy All to USB More 1 2 Auto name Radix Auto name Index File Format BIN XML Format Media Copies all files in the USB memory key to the internal memory all files the internal memory to the USB memory key The file format that can be copied into the USB memory key is dat The screen image cannot be copied lt gt adv dat If the same file name exists in the USB memory key the file is overwritten Select USB memory from the Media menu Displays the File Ctrl menu 2 2 Defines the common part of the filename under which files are saved The file name follows the following format Radix Index When a file is saved an extension dat is automatically added to the file name which is saved in the format Radix Index dat Radix can be up to six characters long Specifies the Index part of the filename under which files are saved The Index increments by 1 each time a file is saved Zero to 99 can be specified in the Inde
156. C Channel Position Channel Width Default Conditions gt Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Default Conditions Execute ON OFF Average Control gt On Trace A B C Window Default Conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 Menu List Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Range FULL WIN Window Position Window Width Restore Defaults Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C OBW Default Conditions gt Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults L Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List MEAS 1 2 ACP e __ Execute ON OFF Average Control Mode FULL CARR Config Channel Definition Graph ON OFF Default Conditions Spectrum Emission f Execute ON OFF Spurious On Trace A B C Config Bands Definition Default Conditions _ Average Control __________ g 4 _ Execute ON OFF On Trace A B C Results Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Bands Definition gt Averaging ON OFF Max S
157. Example 2 Reading and displaying the center frequency Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa CF Query command for the center frequency Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer memory Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 30 bytes Max sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of character to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text CenterFreq 6 Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the data on the screen An example display CenterFreq 30000000 0000 6 58 Example 3 Example 4 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Reading the level and display unit and displaying them Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa RL Query command for the reference level Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer memory Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data from the spectrum analyzer sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text RefLevel amp Left Rdbuff sep 1 Display the data on the screen Call ibwrt spa AUNITS Requests the level unit Rdbuff Space 3 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of characters to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text RichTextBoxl Text vbCrLf amp UNIT Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the previous result
158. F 6 97 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set RBW to SPAN ratio SCPI command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio 21 1 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio Parameter Number Query reply Number Remarks Enable RBW to SPAN Ration Auto SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio AUTO 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution ON OFF Set Channel Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Channel Power Average Control Mode SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Channel Power Averaging SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe CHPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Channel Power Settings SENSe CHPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Channel Power SENSe CHPower DATA SAVE Select Channel Power Trace SENSe CHPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe CHPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Measuring Window Position Channel Power SENSe CHPower WINDow POSition 1 1 SENSe CHPower WINDow POSition Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width Channel Power SENSe CHPower WINDow WIDTh 1 1 SENSe CHPower WINDow WIDTh Frequency Frequency Inser
159. FILTer RRC SRATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC SRATe Frequency Frequency Enable Root Nyquist Filter SEM SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC STATe ON OFF Insert New Row into SEM Defini tion Table SENSe SEMask OFFSet DATA 1 start frequency Frequency stop frequency Frequency ibw Frequency start absolute limit Relative amplitude stop absolute limit Relative amplitude start relative limit Relative amplitude stop relative limit Relative amplitude test mode ABSolute RELative AND OR Delete SEM Definition Table SENSe SEMask OFFSet DATA DELete Set Reference Power Calculation Mode SEM SENSe SEMask RPOWer 1 1 SENSe SEMask RPO Wer CHANnel PEAK CHAN PEAK Select Spectrum Emission Mask Trace SENSe SEMask TRACe 1 1 SENSe SEMask TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Spurious Active Configuration Table SENSe SPURious LIST ACTive 1 1 SENSe SPURious LIST ACTive Spurious Table Index Spurious Table Index 6 101 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Insert New Band into Active Spuri ous Configuration Table SCPI command SENSe SPURious LIST DATA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Parameter Band start frequency Frequency Band stop frequency Frequency Resolution bandwidth
160. FM STATe 22 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion FM STATe Marker index ON OFF 10 Query FM Deviation CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM Frequency Enable Modulation Freq to Sweep Time CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe STATe ON OFF 10 Set Modulation Frequency CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe FREQuency 21 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion FM COUPIe FREQuency Frequency Frequency Enable VSWR Measurement CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWR STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWRI STATe ON OFF Query VSWR CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion VSWR RATio Query Return Loss CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion WSWR LOSS 6 83 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 2 Subsystem CA Libration Function description Get Step Attenuator Calibration Report SCPI command CALibration AT Tenuation 1 CALibration ATTenuation 1 Parameter Query reply Status Remarks Enable Calibration Correction CALibration CORRection STATe 21 1 CALibration CORRection STATe ON OFF 10 Select Frequency Reference Source CALibration FREQuency REFerence 21 1 CALibration FREQuency REFerence INTernal EXTernal XTAL INT EXT XTAL Coarse Adjust Internal Frequency Refer ence CALibration FREQuency REF erence COARse 1 1 CALibration
161. FREQuency REFer ence COARse 8 bit register 8 bit register Restore Frequency Reference Adjustment Defaults CALibration FREQuency REF erence DEFault Fine Adjust Internal Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFer ence FINE 8 bit register 8 bit register Set External Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REF erence FREQuency 1 1 CALibration FREQuency REFer ence FREQuency Frequency Frequency Save Frequency Reference Adjustments CALibration FREQuency REFerence STORe Enable Flatness Correction CALibration FREQuency STATe 21 1 CALibration FREQuency STATe ON OFF 10 Get Total Gain Calibration Report CALibration GAIN 1 1 CALibration GAIN RFC1 RFC2 Status Get PBW Calibration Report CALibration PBW 1 1 CALibration PBW Status Get RBW Calibration Report CALibration RBW 1 CALibration RBW Status Execute Full Calibration 6 84 CALibration ALL 21 CALibration ALL RFC1 RFC2 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 3 Subsystem CON Figure Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Get the Current Measurement 1 CONFigure CHP HARMIIM OBW SEM SPUR TOTP XDB DBMH DBUH DBCH SG AM FM Enable ACP Measurement CONFigure ACPower
162. FREQuency STOP Parameter Context index Frequency Query reply Frequency Remarks Set Input Attenuation SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable Attenuation Auto SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation AUTO 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO Context index Set Minimum Attenuation SENSe 1 PO Wer RF ATTenuation MINimum 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF ATTenuation MINimum Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Enable High Sensitivity SENSe 1 PO Wer RF GAIN STATe 2 1 SENSe 1 POWer RF GAIN STATe Context index Set Sweep Time SENSe 1 SWEep TIME 22 1 SENSe 1 SWEep TIME Context index Time Enable Sweep Time Auto Coupling SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUTO 2 1 SENSe 1 SWEep TIME AUTO Context index Window Sweep Enable SENSe 1 SWEep WINDow STATe 22 1 SENSe 1 SWEep WINDow STATe Context index Set ACP Maximum Sweep Count SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set ACP Average Control Mode SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable ACP Averaging SENSe ACP
163. FSet STATe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe X SCALe OFFSet STATe Parameter Context index Query reply Remarks Set Display Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe Context index Amplitude Amplitude Enable Display Line DISPlay WINDowzl TRACe Y DLINe STATe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y DLINe STATe Context index Set Reference Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe index Amplitude Amplitude Enable Reference Line DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YESCALe NRLevel STATe 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YESCALe NRLevel STATe Context index ON OFF Select Active Context DISPlay WINDow ACTive 1 1 DISPlay WINDow ACTive TOP BOTtom TOP BOT Enable Annotation Display DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL 1 1 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL ON OFF 10 Set Measuring Window Position DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency CENTer 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency CENTer Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width DISPlay ZOOM FREQuency SPAN 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM FRE Quency SPAN Frequency Frequency Select Multiple Screen Mode DISPlay ZOOM MODE 91 1 DISPlay ZOOM MODE OFF ZMFF ZMTT ZMFT OFF ZMFF ZMTT ZMFT Set Frequency
164. Hz to kHz Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM ILSB Frequency stability Residual FM When the internal frequency reference is used lt 60 Hz N p p 100 ms Frequency span Range Accuracy 0 5 kHz to Full 1 Signal purity When the internal frequency reference is used 85 20logN dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN lt 200 kHz Resolution bandwidth RBW Range Accuracy 100 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 7 10 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 7 3 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Spectrum mode Sweep time accuracy U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 2 Sweep 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 5 2 Zero Span Sweep mode REPEAT SINGLE Trigger function Trigger source 7 3 3 Amplitude Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Free run Video IF External Noise to 30 dBm Noise to 10 dBm Maximum safe input level RF Input 1 DC voltage RF Input 2 DC voltage 30 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB Preamp On 15 VDCmax 10 dBm Input attenuator 0 dB 25 VDCmax Input attenuator range RF Input 1 RF Input 2 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step 0 to 30 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV
165. Limit Lines Ref Disp Lines Zoom and Contexts a 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Source gt Free Run Ext Trigger Level Video Level External Slope NEG POS IF Delay x Gated Sweep ON OFF Source gt External Slope NEG POS IF Gate Delay Gate Width Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA Limit Line Edit Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF Limit Line 1 2 Display Line ON OFF Delete Entry Reference Line ON OFF Insert Entry i Table Init 5 65 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options a Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Source Free Run Video External IF Ext Trigger Level Level Slope NEG POS Delay Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Z 2 Screens Window Position Freq Zoom Window Width Freq vs Time gt Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Time vs Time Window Position Reset Context Window Width L Context A B L Frequency Zoom ON OFF Zoom Position Zoom Width Context A B L Freq vs Time ON OFF Frequency Pos Context A B Sets the sweep mode SGL Sets the SINGLE mode The sweep starts by pressing the START STOP key
166. Local lockout LLO This message sets this instrument to the local lockout state When this instrument enters the remote state from this state all front panel operations are disabled In the ordinary remote state front panel operation can be performed by pressing the LOCAL key In this case this instrument can be set to the local state by any of the following two methods Setting the REN message to FALSE The local lockout state is also canceled Turning off and turning on the power 6 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 3 LAN Remote Control System 63 LAN Remote Control System The LAN Local Area Network interface that is compliant with IEEE standard 802 3 is included as standard with this instrument so that this instrument can be controlled remotely through socket communication by the external controller The controlling method using the LAN remote control function is described below 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN 1 LAN connection The standard LAN setup is shown below To allow communication through the LAN between an ex ternal controller and this instrument or other devices connect them with 10 LAN cable and RJ45 connectors To directly connect this instrument and an external controller with a LAN cable use a LAN cable cross over cable and connect as shown in Table 6 2 To connect this instrument and other devices excluding an external controller with a LAN use an external device designed to con nect dev
167. MZ 49 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 35MZ 51 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 55MZ 51 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 55MZ 54 3DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 65MZ 54 3DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 65MZ 57 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 68MZ 57 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 68MZ 60 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 75MZ 60 0DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 75MZ 62 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 82MZ 62 5DB Call ibwrt spa LMTAINF 82MZ 64 7DB Call ibwrt spa FA OMZ Sets the start frequency to 0 MHz Call ibwrt spa FB 100MZ Sets the stop frequency to 100 MHz Call ibwrt spa LMTA ON Turns Limit line 1 on 6 56 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 3 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Sample Programs for Reading Data In order to output measurement data or settings use the xx command This ensures that the data is read when this instrument is in the talker mode Available output formats are listed in the table below The delimiter positioned at the end of data can be specified from 5 types refer to Others in the GPIB code list Once set xx command continues to operate until it is changed Output Format E DD CR LF 1 T T 7 1 2 3 4 The maximum size of data 1 2 3 is 19 bytes long and the unit is Hz ExampleSpecify CF and output as center frequency D DDDDDDD E DD CRLF t t T T 1 2 3 4 The maximum size of data 1 2 3 is 19 bytes long and the un
168. Mask 255 255 255 04 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 Click the Apply button and press Hz 2 Obtaining the IP Address Automatically Enter a check mark into the Obtain an IP address automatically check box Network Setting v Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Click the Apply button and press Hz U3700 Series User s Guide 6 3 3 6 3 3 Control from a Controller After an IP address is obtained the IP address is displayed in the window Network Setting Obtain an IP address automatically DHCP Adress Use the following IP address Control from a Controller To control this instrument from an external controller a port number for socket communication is required The port number 5025 is assigned for socket communication in the remote state in this instrument To write a program for socket communication a library for network connection with the TCP IP protocol is required The library differs depending on the environment such as the OS of the external controller In the Windows OS environment for example WinSock is provided After completing the network connection with this instrument send the REN command to this instru ment to enable the remote control At this time the remote lamp on the front panel of this instrument is on After that this instrument can be remotely controlled by sending the same commands as the GPIB Some of the function
169. N a 6 72 6 10 SCPI Command Reference 6 75 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax S 6 75 6 10 2 Common COMMIT ATS u asa anus hiasan 6 77 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 78 6 10 31 6 78 6 10 3 2 Subsystem CALibration 6 84 6 10 3 3 Subsystem CONFigure 6 85 6 10 3 4 Subsystem COUPle 6 85 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 6 1035 Subsystem DISPlay 6 85 SubDsystem EET lt h 6 89 6 10 3 7 Subsystem FORMat aces 6 90 Subsystem COPY 6 90 6 10 3 9_ Subsystem INITiate 6 91 6 10 3 10 Subsystem INPuU a annasman 6 91 6 10 3 11 n 6 91 6 10 3 12 Subsystem OUTPut 6 92 6 10 3 13 Subsystem READ 6 92 6 10 3 14 Subsystem SENSe 6 94 6 10 3 15 Subsystem SOURce 6 103 6 10 3 16 Subsystem SYSTem na 6 103 6 10 3 17 Subsystem TRACe 6 104 6 10 3 18 Subsystem TRIG ger n pi on en ac la paced 6 105 6 10 3 19 Subsystem UNIT
170. N OFF 7 Sets the center frequency The frequency range is displayed by the center frequency and fre quency span Sets the start frequency The frequency range is displayed by the start frequency and stop frequency Sets the stop frequency The frequency range is displayed by the start frequency and stop frequency Switches the frequency offset function ON and OFF ON Sets the offset value and changes only the display of the frequency by the offset value Displayed value of frequency Set value Offset value OFF Cancels the offset function Switches the step size between auto and manual settings when the center frequency is changed by the step key AUTO Automatically sets the step size to 1 10 of the span width Sets step size manually U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Channel Input Displays the Channel menu Uses the channel code instead of the frequency for the frequency setting Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE Center CH ON OFF Start CH ON OFF Stop CH ON OFF Start CH Offset ON OFF Stop CH Offset ON OFF Channels Config Selects the channel input format CALC Acquires a frequency from a channel number by using the mathematical formula TABLE Acquires a frequency from a look up table which corresponds to a channel number Sets the center frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF Sets the frequency input mode Se
171. O MKOFF Output Format All Markers Off Except MLTOFF Active Marker Select Active Marker MKRSEL MKRSEL Active Marker OFF MLN ON OFF MLN 0 OFF 1 ON Marker ON OFF MLN lt n gt ON OFF MLN lt n gt 0 OFF 1 ON Active Marker Frequency MK Frequency Time MK MF Frequency Time Marker Frequency Frequency Time MF lt n gt Frequency Time Active Marker Level ML Level Marker Level ML lt n gt Level Active Marker Freq Lev MFL Frequency Time Level Marker Freq Lev MFL lt n gt Frequency Time Level Active Marker Num Stauts Freq Lev 6 34 MFLC Marker Number Status 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level Function Command EXE SET U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 9 Marker Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format MarkerNum Stauts MFLC lt n gt Marker Number Freq Lev Status 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level Reference Marker Fre MDF2 Frequency Time quency Absolute Value MFR Reference Marker Level MDL2 Level Absolute Value MLR Delta Mode MKD ON OFF Reference Object MKROBJ MARK RLIN MKROBJ 0 MARK 1 RLIN Fixed AMarker 0 1 ON Inverse AMarker REDLT 0 OFF 1 ON Del
172. OFF Step Size AUTO MNL Ch Windows ON OFF Channel Definition Channel Input Channel Position Channel Power eee Channel Width Channels Config Charging the Battery Cleaning of Other Clear AI i ta tied Clear Othets entere CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting Coarse Color Mode Color Gray Color Pattern 2 2 Color1 Color2 Command Reference Syntax Command Syntax Common Commands Condition Register Config Config Driver Connecting the DC Power Cable Contents of This Manual Context a Context RF2 RF1 Continuous Down ON OFF Continuous Peak ON OFF Control from a Controller Conventions of Notation Used in This Document Copy All to Flash Copy All to USB Copy Config 220 Copy Device FILE PRT Correction Factor ON OFF
173. OL PROGRAMS Execute ON OFF Execute Self Test Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right EXT OF G EXT CFG Extended Configuration options Ext Trigger Level External uc tato tee ei EIE External DC Power Supply 5 43 5 46 5 47 5 50 5 51 5 65 5 69 5 47 5 48 5 50 5 53 5 36 5 38 9 10 7 4 7 13 7 8 5 7 5 11 5 57 5 59 5 57 5 59 5 62 5 64 5 8 5 12 5 47 5 50 5 52 2 1 5 72 6 46 5 72 6 13 9 4 6 15 6 13 6 54 6 107 6 54 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 32 5 34 5 36 5 37 5 38 5 39 5 41 5 16 5 37 5 37 5 37 5 66 5 66 Alphabetical Index F Factory 5 8 5 16 FILE p 5 18 File Control eee 5 8 5 14 5 18 5 19 File Format BIN XML 5 18 5 20 File Format PNG BMP 5 8 5 13 File Management 6 49 File Output to USB Memory 4 28 BMG sas M 5 7 5 11 Fixed Mkr ON OFF eee 5 47 5 48 2 99 5 37 5 41 5 8 5 13 Format Media 5 18 5 20 Formula 1 ON OFF sees 5 57 5 60 Formula 2 ON OFF 5 57 5 60 Formula 3 ON OFF 5 57 5 60 Free 5 65 5 66 Freq Input Mode CALC TABLE 5 57 5 58 Freq
174. Offset setting 0 Hz Freq Offset ON OFF Off CF Step Size setting Manual 0 8 GHz 0 3 GHz CF Step Size Auto Manual Auto Channel Input OFF Span setting 8 GHz Ref Level setting 0 dBm LOG LIN selection LOG dB div setting 10 dB div Unit setting dBm ATT Auto Manual Auto ATT setting Manual 10 dB Min ATT setting 10 dB Min ATT ON OFF OFF High Sensitivity ON OFF OFF Ref Offset setting 0 00 dB Ref Offset ON OFF OFF Slide Screen OFF RBW setting Manual 3 MHz 1 MHz RBW Auto Manual Auto VBW setting Manual 3 MHz 1 MHz VBW ON OFF OFF VBW RBW ratio 1 VBW RBW ratio Auto Manual Auto SPAN RBW ratio 100 U3700 Series User s Guide A 1 Initial Setting List Function Parameter Initial set value SPAN RBW ratio ON OFF OFF Sweep Time setting Manual 90 ms 60 ms Sweep Time Auto Manual Auto EXT CFG Sweep Mode SGL CNT CNT Trigger Source Free Run Limit Lines OFF Display Line ON OFF OFF Reference Line ON OFF OFF Measuring Window OFF MKR OFF MEASI Channel Power Execute ON OFF OFF Total Power Execute ON OFF OFF Average Power Execute ON OFF OFF OBW Execute ON OFF OFF ACP Execute ON OFF OFF Spectrum Emission Exe
175. On Trace A B C Max Sweep Count Channel Position Average ONCE SLIDE Channel Width B Total Power b gt Average Power OBW d 9 Default Conditions gt Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Default Conditions Lor Execute ON OFF Average Control gt On Trace A B C Window Default Conditions L y Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C OBW Default Conditions y Range FULL WIN Window Position L Window Width Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults 5 25 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 5 26 ACP V Execute ON OFF Mode FULL CARR Config Channel Definition Graph ON OFF _ Default Conditions Spectrum Emission f Execute ON OFF Spurious Contig Bands Definition Default Conditions _ Average Control Average Control __________ Execute ON OFF On Trace A B C Results Table No 1 2 3 Default Conditions Bands Definition C y Averaging ON OFF Max Sw
176. Peak Left Next Peak Right Noise Hz Noise x Hz Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate Nyquist Filter ON OFF enu Index Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF FULL CARR Index Value 1 2 alize Correction ON OFF 5 18 5 36 5 40 5 46 5 48 5 52 5 57 5 62 5 72 5 72 5 43 5 26 5 47 5 52 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 36 5 36 5 43 5 55 5 55 5 26 5 33 5 26 5 33 5 26 5 32 5 25 5 43 5 46 5 25 5 27 5 29 5 32 5 36 5 40 5 50 5 48 5 41 5 31 5 49 5 12 5 20 5 38 5 43 5 47 5 50 5 54 5 60 5 63 5 73 5 73 5 45 5 35 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 50 5 37 5 37 5 45 5 31 5 31 5 31 5 30 5 45 5 26 5 28 5 30 5 34 5 38 Others HIDE SHOW 5 47 Paper 5 8 Pars rAT SCPI 5 cines cie 5 7 Pass Fail Config 5 65 Pass Fail ON OFF 5 36 5 65 Pause Time aste eR HERES 5 37 PBW d 5 7 rete E 5 50 Peak X dB Down 5 36 Peak Delta Y i sce 5 37 5 47 Peak List Frequency 5 47 5 52 Peak List 5 47 5 53 Peak Men eere aY 5 47 Peak to 5 54 Peak to 5 54 Peak Zoom eene 5 61 PEIZBW 5 72 POSI 5 43 Power Average
177. REE IFIEXT VIDEO TRGSRC 0 FREE 1 VIDEO 2 TRG EXT 3 TRG IF Video IF Trigger Level TRGLVL Level TRGLVL Level External Trigger Level TRGTTLLVL Voltage TRGTTLLVL Voltage Trigger Slope TRGSLP FALLINEG TRGSLP 0 RISE POS RISE POS 1 FALL NEG Trigger Delay TRGDLY Time TRGDLY Time 6 28 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Trace 6 8 6 Trace NOTE Three Traces are available A B and C In the Command List below just replace lt n gt by the letter for the selected trace ie lt n gt A B C Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Trace Mode 0 WRITE 1 VIEW 2 BLANK Write View Blank Calc Mode Trace WRITE MINIMAX CALCA 0 WRITE AVG PAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCONT 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 HOLD CONT Calc Mode Trace B WRITEIMINIMAX 0 WRITE AVG PAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCONT 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 MAX HOLD CONT Mode Trace C WRITEIMINIMAX CALCC 0 WRITE AVG PAVG 1 MIN HOLD MAXCONT 2 MAX HOLD 3 AVERAGE 4 POWER AVG 5 MAX HOLD CONT Calc Mode Max Hold ON OFF lt n gt MAX 0 OFF 1 ON Calc Mode Min Hold ON OFF lt n gt MIN 0 OFF 1 ON Averaging and Power Integer lt n gt G Integer Averaging Times 6 29 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Tra
178. Reference data is provided to help you use the product efficiently but it will not guarantee the performance of this instrument The data is described by using the following notation Specifications spec Indicates the specifications within which the performance of the product can be guaranteed Includes variations in the performance of each product uncertainty in calibrations and changes in performance due to the environment Typical value typ Indicates the average performance of the product Excludes variations in the per formance of each product uncertainty in measurements and changes in perfor mance due to the environment Nominal value nom Indicates the general performance of the product and does not refer to the guar anteed performance 7 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 1 93741 Performance Specifications 7 1 U3741 Performance Specifications 7 1 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range Built in preamp 9 kHz to 3 GHz 10 MHz to 3 GHz Frequency readout accuracy t Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate Temperature stability 32 x 10 year 32 5 x 10 0 C to 50 C Marker frequency counter Resolution Accuracy RBW lt 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN lt 100 MHz 1 Hz to 1 kHz t Counter readout x Freq reference accuracy Residual FM ILSB Freq
179. SB memory device in the dialog box Data Files Media Name Type Free Size Analyzer Memory Flash Dev 0 USB Device 121 4 MB122 1 MB U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 4 COPY 5 2 4 5 2 5 COPY Outputs a screen image according to the conditions set by pressing SYSTEM MORE 1 2 and COPY Config The COPY menu can also be displayed by pressing the SHIFT key and COPY key File size For saving the image data PNG Approximately 8 KB BMP Approximately 150 KB HELP Pressing the HELP key displays HELP which indicates the HELP mode NOTE The HELP file is loaded the first time the HELP key is pressed after the power is turned on When the HELP mode is set Press a soft menu key to display the relevant menu description Press the soft menu key again to hide the display Press the HELP key again to cancel the HELP mode Procedure 1 Select a menu 2 Press the Help key 3 Press a soft menu key 4 Press the HELP key to cancel the HELP mode 5 Repeat from step to display the HELP of other menus U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Displays the Meas 1 menu Channel Power Total Power gt b Average Power c OBW gt d ACP gt Spectrum Emission f Spurious g Channel Power hv Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF
180. SENSe ACPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe ACPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Average Power Maximum Sweep Count SENSe AVPower AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Average Power Averaging Con trol Mode SENSe AVPower AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Average Power Averaging SENSe AVPower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe AVPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Restore Power Average Setting SENSe AVPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Power Average SENSe AVPower DATA SAVE Set Power Average Trace SENSe AVPower TRACe 1 1 SENSe AVPower TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Power Average Range SENSe AVPower WINDow 21 1 SENSe AVPower WINDow ON OFF 10 Set Measuring Window Position Average Power SENSe AVPower WINDow POSition 1 1 SENSe AVPower WINDow POSition Frequency Frequency Set Measuring Window Width Average Power SENSe AVPower WINDow WIDTh 1 1 SENSe AVPower WINDow WIDTh Frequency Frequency Set VBW to RBW Ration SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATi0 Number Number Enable VBW to RBW ratio Auto SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio AUTO 1 1 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo RATio AUTO ON OF
181. Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte Standard operation Standard event Output status register register buffer ibo Service request Status byte register Figure 6 4 Status Register Arrangement 6 14 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte OPREVT OPR Averaging Power on Command error Measuring Execution error Sweeping Calibrating Standard operation status register Device dependent error Query error Standard event register Status byte register Figure 6 5 Details of Status Register 2 Event Enable Register Each event register has an enable register to determine which bit is available The enable register sets the corresponding bit in decimal value Service request enable register setting SRE Standard event status enable register setting ESE Operation status enable register setting OPR 6 15 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 3 Standard Operation Status Register Assignment in the standard operation status register is listed below Functional definition Description Always 0 Averaging Set to 1 when averaging is complete Always 0 Measuring Set to 1 when sequence measuring is complete Sweeping Set to 1 when sweeping is complete Always 0 Calibrating Set to 1 when
182. T Function Code Argument Format Output Format Correction Factor CR ON OFF Correction Factor Table CRIN Frequency Level DB Input Correction Factor Table CRDEL Deletion EMC Trace Detection EMCON EMCDET Normal 0 Normal Peak 3 Peak EMC BW Auto QPAUTO QA QPAUTO 0 Auto 200 Hz 1 200 Hz 9 kHz 2 9 kHz 120 kHz QP2 3 120 kHz 1 MHz 4 1 MHz 6 8 16 Calibration Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Calibration All CLALL RFC1 RFC2 Total Calibration CLGAIN RFC1 RFC2 CLGAIN Integer RFCI RFC2 0 gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error RBW Calibration CLRBW CLRBW Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error PBW Calibration CLPBW CLPBW Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error 6 46 U3700 Series User s Guide Function ATT step Calibration Command EXE SET 6 8 17 Save Recall Query GET Code Argument Format Output Format CLATT Integer 0 OK gt 0 Warning lt 0 Error CAL 10 M Reference Coarse CLCREF Integer CLCREF Integer CAL 10 M Reference Fine CLFREF Integer CLFREF Integer CAL 10 M Reference Default CLDREF CAL 10 M Reference Store CLSREF F Correction FC ON OFF CAL Correction
183. TO MNL All Auto 90 s 100 CENTER 20 00000 MHz SPAN 10 00 kHz VBW 1 kHz ATT 10 dB Figure 4 18 Canceling the UNCAL Message 4 24 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal This function is available only for the U3751 U3771 and U3772 This instrument may display an image signal depending on the input signal If measuring an unknown frequency signal the real signal and image signal must be identified before start ing the measurement The Image Suppression and Signal Identification functions can be used to identify the image signal Image Suppression function Detects image signals and automatically deletes them from the display Press FREQUENCY 1 2 and Image Suppression ON OFF Frequency 2 2 OFF REF 0 00 dBm MKR 6 760 GHz 1 Signal 10 0 dBi 6 27 dBm Identification ON OFF 1 2 Image Suppression ON OFF SPAN 8 000 GHz SWP 40 ms 10 dB ON Frequency 272 REF 0 00 dBm MKR 6 760 GHz 1 Signal 10 0 dB 1 6 22 dBm Identification CENTER _ 4 000 GHz l 4 Image Suppression ON OFF ttt 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10d IS is displayed at the bottom right of the screen when the Image Suppression function is set to ON White font Indicates that the calculation process of Image Suppression is correctly performed Red font Indicates that the calcul
184. The MKA value displays the level difference to the reference line 2 Press PEAK The marker level indicates the insertion loss of the filter 4 34 REF 0 00 dBm 120 CENTER 1 9000 GHz RBW 3 Measuring the 1 dB bandwidth VBW 3 MHz U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 TG Normz MKA 1 9126 GHz 1 0 70 dB Capture Hnrmz Data 3 Normalize Correction ON OFF Reference 4 Line SPAN 200 0 MHz ON OFF SWP 20 ms 10 dB 1 Start from the state of the insertion loss measurement Press MEAS2 XdB Down XdB Level 1 GHz dBm and Execute Down A marker is displayed at the right and left points on the waveform at a level which is 1 dB below the peak The marker frequency indicates the 1 dB bandwidth of the filter REF 0 00 dBm CENTER 1 3000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz X DB Down MKA 74 8 MHz 1 0 01 dB Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute XB Right Display ABL ABR More 172 SPAN 200 0 MHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB 4 35 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 7 USER Key 4 3 7 USER Key A soft menu related to operation keys and extended function keys can be set to the USER key menu The operability is improved by allocating functions which are frequently used or are located in a deep multilayer menu to the USER key menu How to set a function menu to the USER menu 1 Display a function menu which is set to
185. Trace index ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Set Trace Refresh Mode DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 REFResh MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 REFResh MODE Context index Trace index WRITe VIEW BLANk WRIT VIEW BLAN Enable Trace Video Average Pause DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG PAUSe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG PAUSe Context index Trace index 10 Enable Trace Video Average DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG STATe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG STATe Context index Trace index Set Trace Video Average Control Mode DISPlay WIN Dow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG TCONrol 3 1 DISPlay WIN Dow 1 TRACe 2 VAVG TCONrol Context index Trace index ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Select Active Trace DISPlay WINDow ACTive 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe ACTive Context index Trace index Trace index Order Peak in Position or Amplitude Order DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe MATH PEAK SORT 22 Context index FREQuency AMPLitude Set dB per Screen Division DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe YESCALe PDIVision 22 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Context index Relative amplitude Relative amplitude Set Reference Level DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel 02 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel Context index Ampl
186. U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement 4 4 2 W CDMA Channel Power Measurement This section describes a measurement example of the W CDMA signal by using the MEASI function The maximum input level of this instrument 30 dBm 50 VDC 03741 30 dBm 15 VDC U3751 U3771 U3772 RF2 10 dBm 25 VDC U3771 U3772 CAUTION 1 When measuring signal power that exceeds the maximum input level connect an external attenuator to ensure that the input level does not exceed it A band rejection filter may be required depending on the standard When turning the power on do not connect a DUT to this instrument Before turning the power off disconnect the DUT from this instrument The W CDMA mobile station signal whose frequency is 1952 4 MHz and level 15 24 dBm is measured m e EVE 3i L S EHH D Gem e D e GHB yas 8 30 dB DUT p Attenuator amp Setting measurement conditions 1 Press FREQUENCY 1 9 5 2 4 and MHz The center frequency is set to 1952 4 MHz 2 Press SPAN 1 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 10 MHz 3 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF ON 3 0 and GHz A value of 30 dB
187. Units is not allowed The ACP graph mode is not allowed in multi context mode The Carrier Band Width is not available when Nyquist Filter is ON Please change to OFF Meas 1 gt ACP gt Config gt Nyquist Filter The Carrier Band Width is not available in FULL mode screen Please change to CARR mode Meas 1 gt ACP gt Mode The ACP Power Measure is executed on Trace A This trace is actually in blank mode Please change to Write mode Trace gt Refresh gt Write The ACP Channel definition table is empty The Carrier Band Width is not available when Nyquist Filter is ON Please change to OFF Meas 1 SEM gt Config gt Nyquist Filter The SEM table is empty Impossible to insert in the SEM table Overlapping Band 9 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Error code Displayed Message Pass Fail functionality not authorized Spectrum Emission Mask active The power measure is performed on a blank trace The OBW Power Measure is active The Power Measure environment is not valid Please do ensure you have already save an environment for this Power Measure The power measure trace is in blank mode Please change to Write mode Trace gt Refresh gt Write Scale is Linear Mode Please select dB div scale Level gt dB div The target stored trace is the same to the active trace Impossible to set all the trace i
188. W adjustment and minimizing the level error when switching RBW PBW Noise power bandwidth IMPORTANT Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more Required equipment This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Conversion adaptor BNC f SMA m Input cable BNC m BNC m 4 13 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 1 Calibration Turning on the power supply 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turn on the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turn on the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off NOTE Before turning the power on remove the USB memory key Otherwise the system does not start Initialization Initializes the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB center ICENTER 4 000 GHz Stop Offset ON OFF 4 Frequency 5 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input
189. WR OPT 10 and OPT 15 cannot be installed together N type female 500 nom Input attenuator gt 10 dB lt 1 5 1 External trigger input Can be selected as the trigger input of RF input 2 when OPT 10 is installed The input connector is a single line only 21 4 MHz IF output 7 16 When OPT 10 is installed it is only the IF output which corre sponds to RF input 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 2 Option 15 75 Input 7 5 2 Option 15 75 Input Frequency Frequency range 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz Built in preamp 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz Tunable frequency 9 kHz to 3 GHz Amplitude Amplitude measurement range 134 dBuV to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Input attenuator gt 10 dB Average continuous power 134 dBuV Preamp Off 120 dBuV Preamp On DC voltage 50 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 31 2 dBuV to 148 8 dBuV Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average Amplitude Accuracy Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency 20 MHz Amplitude 20 dBm Accuracy 0 4 dB Scale display accuracy Log 0 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 4 dB Total level accuracy After performing the automatic calibration Signal level 98 8 dBuV to 58 8 dBuV Preamp Of
190. White White and Black User Password Date Time Edit Date Time Displays the System 2 2 menu Selects the standard color Selects the second set of colors Selects the black and white mode white traces Selects the white and black mode black traces Sets the password used to lock the panel The password is set to 0 0 0 0 when this instrument is shipped from the factory The password can be changed in the dialog box Password Change Old Password New Password Confirm New Password A password can be initialized 0 0 0 0 through the GPIB GPIB AT command RPWD Displays the Date Time menu Sets a date and time They are set or changed in the dialog window Date Time Configuration Year Month Day 98 29 Hour Minute o RI Year Set a year Month Set a month Day Set a date Hour Set an Minute Seta minute Format Show ON OFF Copy Config Copy Copy Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Sets date display formats They are set or changed in the dialog window Date and Time Format MDY YMD Date Format Day Format Hum Short Long Month Format Num Short Long Year Format Short Long Time Format 24 Hours 12 Hours Switches ON and OFF the date display ON Displays the date OFF Hides the date display Displays the Copy menu O
191. age which was generated because of the fast sweep time by changing the RBW setting Required instruments This instrument Conversion adaptor N m BNC f Input cable BNC m BNC m Turning on the power supply IMPORTANT Use this instrument within the specified temperature range to perform accurate measurements Perform calibration after allowing a warm up time of 5 minutes or more 1 Verify that the AC power switch on the rear panel is set to OFF 2 Connect the included power cable to the AC power connector on the rear panel CAUTION To prevent damage do not supply a voltage and frequency which exceed the specified range to this instrument 3 Connect the power cable to an electrical outlet 4 Turn on the AC power switch on the rear panel After turning on the AC power switch wait for three seconds or more 5 Turn on the power switch on the front panel MEMO The display may be different depending on the state of the instrument when the power was last turned off Initialization In 6 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message itialize the settings of this instrument Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded Connecting the input signal Connect the calibration signal 7 Attach the N m BNC f adaptor to the INPUT connector on the front panel Connect the included BNC m BNC m input cable to the CAL OUT connector on
192. al The differences of frequency and level between two signals are displayed in the marker area MKA 20 00 MHz 52 21 dB U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers REF 10 00 dBm 20 00 MHz 10 0 dB 52 21 I DELTA MARKER 20 00 MHz 3 Fixed Mkr 4 1 Mkr 100 110 CENTER 30 00 MHz SPAN 40 00 MHz RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 15 Measuring the Difference of Frequency and Level by Using the Delta Marker 4 21 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 3 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message 4 3 3 4 22 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message The setting among the resolution bandwidth RBW video bandwidth VBW frequency span Span and sweep time Sweep Time affect to each other If the combination of these settings in the manual setting is inappropriate the UNCAL message is dis played at the bottom to the right of the scale If the UNCAL message is displayed the measurement level accuracy cannot be guaranteed Change the following settings to cancel the UNCAL message Expand the resolution bandwidth RBW Expand video bandwidth VB W Slow the sweep time Sweep Time IfRBW or VBW cannot be changed narrow the frequency span Span IMPORTANT Accurate measurement data cannot be acquired while the UNCAL message is displayed This section describes how to cancel the UNCAL mess
193. alization Initialize the settings of this instrument 6 Press SHIFT and SYSTEM PRESET Initial setting conditions are loaded 7 Regarding U3771 and U3772 press SHIFT and RF1 to select RF INPUTI 4 30 Connecting the cable 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 Attach the N m BNC f adapters to the RF INPUTI connector and the TG OUTPUT connector on the front panel and then connect the BNC m BNC m cable to both connectors 03771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 0 Figure 4 19 Connecting TG Mesurement Setting the measurement conditions to allow easier measurement of the input sig nal Press FREQUENCY 1 9 0 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 1900 MHz Press SPAN 2 0 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 200 kHz Press AMPLITUDE dB div and 2dB div The level display scale is set to 2 dB div Press TG Level 5 and MHz dBm The output level of the tracking generator is set to 5 dBm Press TG ON OFF to turn on the TG output U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 6 Measuring by using the TG OPT76 OPT77 REF 0 00 dBm 2 0 TG TG LEVEL
194. als within the 1 Hz bandwidth will be lower than this by about 10 log 1 Hz 1 kHz dB or about 30 dB Consequently it is expressed as 100 dBc Hz at 20 kHz apart from the carrier when the resolution bandwidth is 1 kHz 70 dB Figure A 6 Noise Sidebands Residual FM The short term frequency stability of the local oscillators built in the spectrum analyzer is expressed as re sidual FM The frequency width fluctuating per unit time is expressed as p p This also determines the mea surement limit value when measuring the residual FM of a signal Residual Response Residual response is how much the spurious signal which is generated by the spectrum analyzer is sup pressed after being treated as an input signal Residual response is generated by the leaking of signals such as local oscillator output in the spectrum ana lyzer This should be taken into consideration when analyzing a low level input signal Frequency Response This term represents the amplitude characteristics for given frequencies frequency characteristics In the spectrum analyzer frequency response means the frequency characteristics flatness of the input at tenuator and mixer for the input frequency and is given in AdB U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Spurious Response Spurious responses that mean any non measured signal are classified according to their characteristics Second Harmon
195. ange LBRNG ABOVE BELOW LBRNG 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW 6 8 8 Display Function Display Line Level Command EXE SET Query GET Code DLN DLN ON DLN OFF Argument Format Code DLN Output Format Level DLNON 0 OFF 1 ON Reference Line Level RLN RLN ON RLN OFF RLN Level RLNON 0 OFF 1 ON Window Center Position WLX Frequency Time WLX Frequency Time Window Width WDX Frequency Time WDX Frequency Time Window Sweep WDOSWP ON OFF WDOSWP 0 OFF 1 ON Zoom MLTSCR 7 MLTSCR 0 OFF 1 ZM 2 FT 3 TT 4 DUAL VIEWER Zoom Position ZMPOS Frequency Time ZMPOS Frequency Time Zoom Width ZMWID Frequency Time ZMWID Frequency Time Frequency Pos FTPOS Frequency FTPOS Frequency Select Active Context CTXTSEL Integer 0 1 SCRSEL 0 1 6 33 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 9 Marker Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format 2 Channels Viewer DUALCH ON OFF Code DUALCH Output Format 2 Channel Preset DUALCHINIT 6 8 9 Marker lt gt lt 011213141516171819 10 NOTE Marker 015 the reference marker Command EXE SET Function Query GET Code Argument Format All Markers Off M
196. anual Auto Manual 20 00 dB 20 00 dB 20 00 dB Ref Level 0 00 dBm 0 00 dBm 0 00 dBm Preamp On Off On On Off Limit 13 00 dBm 41 00 dBm 13 00 dBm Press RETURN The spurious measurement menu is displayed 4 49 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement 4 50 Measuring the spurious response 10 Press Execute ON OFF ON The spurious response in each frequency band that changes after a sweep is mea sured according to the measurement conditions set in the Spurious Bands table Characters that indicate a frequency band in which the spurious response is being measured are displayed in yellow If the measured value is equal to the set limit value or less the judgment is PASS If the measured value is more than the set limit value the judgment is FAIL REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 100 CENTER 515 0 MHz No Start MKR 96 9 MHz 56 05 dBm SPAN 970 0 MHz SWP 190 ms Spurious Stop RBW Limit 2 999 995000 MHz 1 893500000 GHz 1 000 MHz 13 00 dBm 3 1 893495000 GHz 1 919600000 GHz 300 000 kHz 41 00 dBm 4 1 919595000 GHz 1 987500000 GHz 1 000 MHz 13 00 dBm 11 Press Results Judge Spurious Execute ON OFF On Trace A 4 Bands Definition 5 Results 6 Table No Default Conditions Measurement results in each frequency band are displayed Measure Conditions Band Start Frequency Stop Frequency Resolution BW
197. asu rement 4 43 White and Black 5 8 A 5 25 Window HIDE SHOW 5 65 Window Position 5 25 5 47 5 51 5 66 5 69 Window Sweep ON OFF 5 65 Window Width 5 25 5 47 5 51 5 66 5 69 Work Request 9 3 WiC 5 43 Write Protect ON OFF 5 8 5 18 X X ABS CF FA 5 65 X dB DOW u a nE 5 36 X dB Level 5 cites 5 36 X Search Domain 5 47 Y Y ABS REF DL ee 5 65 Y Range ON OFF 5 47 Y Search Domain 5 47 5 51 Z Zero 5 61 Zoom and Contexts 5 65 Zoom Position 5 66 Zoom 5 66 1 8 5 12 5 29 5 67 5 29 5 50 5 65 5 67 5 70 5 67 5 29 5 50 5 65 5 67 5 70 5 44 5 14 5 19 5 68 5 37 5 37 5 50 5 68 5 49 5 50 5 69 5 70 5 70
198. ation process of Image Suppression is being performed or the calculation results are indefinite For example when the center frequency is changed or the frequency of the input signal changes 4 25 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal Signal Identification function The frequencies of Image signals are shifted and displayed in each sweep The displayed frequencies of real signals do not change Press FREQUENCY More1 2 and Signal Identification ON OFF Marker REF 0 00 dBm Marker 2 Marker 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 1 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB Real signal Image signal Marker REF 0 00 dBm 10 0 dB Marker 2 Marker 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 1 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz ATT 10 dB 4 26 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 3 5 1 Output to a Printer Printer connection Output to a printer When using a printer which is used for the first time 1 2 3 Turn off the power of the printer and this instrument and connect the printer to the USB connector on the front or rear panels of this instrument Turn on the power of the printer Turn on the power of this instrument Anytime after the second time the printer is used the printer can be connected to this instrument even if the power of this instrument is turned on Specify the printer as the output dev
199. bcnt interpret the header tmp buf 0 And amp HFF amp ch Chr tmp If ch lt gt Then Exit Su this is incorrect header is a tmp buf 0 And amp HFFOO amp 256 Hsize tmp Asc 0 header size sSize first character of the next Hsize characters describe the buffer size in bytes For i 1 To Hsize 2 word buf i tmp word And amp HFF amp ch Chr tmp sSize sSize ch tmp word And amp HFF00 amp 256 ch Chr tmp sSize sSize ch Next now we know how many bytes the binary buffer contains size CInt sSize Dim offset As Integer offset 2 number of integers we have read in the buffer assuming the number of bytes is on 4 digits For i 1 To size 2 loop on each integer and re interpret the bytes word buf offset i trace i word And amp HFF amp 256 word And amp HFF00 amp Next End Sub 6 112 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 4 Example Programs in which SCPI Commands Are Used Example 10 Entering data to trace A buffer in ASCII format Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa Dim buf As String Dim tracePoint As Integer get trace A in view mode otherwise sent data would be cleared immediately by the next acquisition Call ibwrt spa DISP TRACE1 MODE VIEW select ASCII as the trace transfer format Call ibwrt spa FORMAT ASCII build the trace setting
200. ce Function Averaging and Power Averaging Times Active Trace Command EXE SET Query GET Code SWPCNT Argument Format Integer Code SWPCNT Output Format Integer Average Start lt n gt AVG lt n gt GR Average Stop lt n gt AVG lt n gt GS lt n gt AVG 0 OFF 1 ON Average Pause lt n gt GP Average Continue lt n gt GC lt n gt GP 0 Continue 1 Pause Average 1 Time lt n gt GSGL Average Continuous lt n gt GCNT lt n gt GSGL 0 sliding 1 once Power Average Start lt n gt PAVG Power Average Stop lt n gt PAVG lt n gt PAVG 0 OFF 1 ON Power Average Pause lt n gt PGP Power Average Continue lt n gt PGC lt n gt PGP 0 Continue 1 Pause Power Average 1 Time lt n gt PGSGL Power Average Continuous lt n gt PGCNT lt n gt PGSGL 0 sliding 1 once ABA B A gt A BAA A DL gt A ADLA B AOB BAB A BOB ABB B DL B BDLB A B gt C ABC B A gt C BAC Trace Subtraction TRSUB OFF ABA BAA ADLA BAB ABB BDLB ABC BAC TRSUB Math Trace Store Current trace trace n STORE TRA TRB TRC Number of Trace Points 6 30 TPS TP 501 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 6 Trace
201. ches the delta marker display function ON and OFF ON Displays a delta marker at the same position as a normal marker The relative values of frequency and level to the normal marker are displayed in the marker area OFF Hides the delta marker Sets the reference in the delta marker mode Selects the reference marker Selects the reference line Switches the fixed marker function ON and OFF ON Maintains the frequency and level of the delta marker OFF Cancels the fixed marker function Switches the inverse number display function for the delta marker value ON and OFF ON Displays a frequency value on the time axis and a time value on the frequency axis OFF Cancels the inverse number display function Displays the Peak menu Does not move the marker Refer to 5 2 10 PEAK Clears all markers The marker display position is set at the center of the screen default value Displays the Marker 2 2 menu Hides all markers except for the active marker Clears all markers except for the active marker Switches the list display of enabled markers ON and OFF ON Displays a list of frequencies and levels in order of marker number OFF Hides the display of marker list Switches the step size between auto and manual settings when the marker is moved by the step key AUTO Setsthe marker step size to 1 10 of the frequency span Sets step size manually U3700 Series User s Guide Mode Ind
202. command header first buf trace data tracel note the ending space required then each point amplitude separated by a comma For 1 0 To 1000 tracePoint 7000 50004 Sin i 508 Debug Print tracePoint buf buf CStr tracePoint Next send the trace setting command Call ibwrt spa buf End Sub Example 11 Outputs a current screen image as bitmap data and writes it to a file Data which is approximately 150 KB for the BMP format or approximately 7 KB for the PNG format is output Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa MMEM DUMP BMP Requests bitmap data output Call ibrdf spa bitmap bmp Writes bitmap data to a file Example 12 Writes a screen image that is copied into a USB memory to a file Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa MMEM IMAG copy020 png Specifies a screen image name and requests its output Call ibrdf spa copy020 png Writes a screen image to a file 6 113 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of this instrument The performance of this instrument is guaranteed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified The specified calibration period must be adhered to After turning on the power and warming up for 5 minutes or more under the specified environmental conditions After automatic calibration has been performed
203. creen and rear panel 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel This section describes the names and functions of each part on the front panel U3771 SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 O z e gt Ges Cad LE 1 9 J 711 Lg CREE BKSP I 8 5 Figure 4 1 Front Panel 1 POWER switch with lamp Switches the power supply between ON and OFF The lamp turns on while the power turns on 2 Extended function key block The keys in this block set the extended functions 3 PHONE connector 8 ohm earphone terminal for demodulated AM FM audio signals 4 USB connector Enables a memory device or printer to be connected 5 Color LCD Displays measurement data or setting conditions 6 Softkey block The keys in this block select items from the soft menu on the dis play 4 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 2 7 Input connector lamp Indicates the input connector is enabled U3741 U3751 Only RF INPUT 1 is enabled 8 Input and output connectors block The connectors in this block are used in measurements 9 Op
204. cute ON OFF OFF Spurious Execute ON OFF OFF MEAS2 Noise Hz Execute ON OFF OFF XdB down XdB setting OFF Intermod Execute ON OFF OFF Harmonic Execute ON OFF OFF Frequency Counter Execute ON OFF OFF TRACE Refresh Mode setting Write Active Trace setting A Trace Detector Normal Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Calc Mode setting Write Detector Auto Manual Auto Detector Avg Mode RMS Video RMS SYSTEM Annotation ON OFF ON GPIB Address 8 LAN IP Address refer to 6 3 2 Color Pattern Colorl A 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 1 Initial Setting List Function Parameter Initial set value GPIB Address GPIB address of this instrument Freq Reference INT EXT Ext Reference Display Title setting A 3 U3700 Series User s Guide A 2 Principle of Operation A 2 Principle of Operation This section describes a root Nyquist filter used for input saturation and ACP measurement based on the oper ating principle of this instrument A 2 1 Input Saturation When a large level signal is applied to this instrument measurement errors may become larger depending on the attenuator setting Input saturation may be suspected as a cause of this This section describes input saturation Cause of Input Saturation A block diagram of the input section of this instrument is shown in Figure A 1 The signal entering from the input connector is input into the mixer through the attenuator
205. d complete the correction table REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 10 0 dB 3 15 dB Correction Factor Table No Frequency Level 2700000000 Cowon GHz 315 db 2 3 4 2006 6 7 8 3 90 100 1 500 GHz 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 00 dB Using the correction table U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table 14 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 and Correction Factor ON OFF ON The displayed measurement value is corrected based on the correction table Correction Factor OFF Correction Factor ON REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 10 0 dB 3 13 dB REF 0 00 dBm 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ED 90 100 ES CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz ATT 10 00 dB Level 2 2 1 Ref Offset ON OFF 2 input Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON OFF 4 correction Factor ON OFF 5 Edit Corr Grid Values ON OFF Level 2 2 REF 0 00 dBm MKA 3 000 GHz 1 10 0 dB e Ref Offset ON OFF 2 input Impedance 50 75 3 High Sensitivity ON 4 correction Factor ON OFF 5 Edit Corr Grid Values SPAN 3 000 GHz ON OFF ATT 10 00 dB CENTER 1 500 GHz RBW 3 MHz Cable loss 3 13 dB at 3 GHz REF 0 00 dBm DL 12 90 dBm 10 0 dBi 5 4 0 00 dBm 100 CENTER 2 10000 GHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 KHz Channel Power SPAN 10 00 MHz ATT 10
206. dBm 2 f GHz dB Band0 125 dBm 1 2 f GHz dB Bandl 141 dBm 3 f GHz dB TBD Band0 142 dBm 1 4 f GHz dB Band1 Preamplifier Off Preamplifier Off Preamplifier On Preamplifier On 124 dBm 2 f GHz dB 123 dBm 1 5 f GHz dB 114 dBm 112 dBm 108 dBm Band0 Band1 Band2 Band3 Band4 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Tracking Generator Description Specifications Frequency range 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz Frequency offset Range Resolution Accuracy 0 to 1 GHz 1 kHz 300 Hz Output level range 107 to 47dBuV 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy 0 5 dB 20 MHz 97 dByV 20 C to 30 C Output level flatness Reference signal level 97 Frequency 20 MHz 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz Output level switching uncertainty Reference level 97 dBuV 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 107 to 47 dBuV 2 0 dB 1 MHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to 47 dBuV 3 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to 77 dBuV Frequency Offset OFF 4 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 77 to 47 dBuV_ Frequency Offset OFF 5 0 dB 100 kHz to 2 2 GHz 107 to 47 dBuV Frequency Offset ON Spurious output Harmonics Non harmonics Output level 97 dBuV 100 kHz to 1 MHz 1 MHz to 2 2 GHz Frequency Offset OFF TG leakage lt 39 dBuV Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance VSWR 75 Q nom lt 2 typ Output level lt 97 dBuV Maximum allowable input 117 dBuV 10 V U3700 Se
207. e Correction Delta Ref Line ON OFF 7 Reference Line OFF 3 Connect the DUT to the TEST port of the SWR bridge Press VSWR ON OFF ON A return loss and VSWR at the marker point are displayed REF 0 00 dBm 100 2 4130 GHz RBW 3 MHz Return Loss VSWR 4 60 2007 Jun 14 19 22 TG Nonnz MKA 2 4210 GHz 24 42 dB SPAN 500 0 MHz ATT 10 00 dB VSWR 24 42 dB 1 13 1 Capture Normz Data 3 Normalize Correction VSWR OFF Delta Ref Line OFF 7 Reference Line ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION This chapter describes the configurations and functions of the soft keys displayed on the touch screen Menu Index This section can be used to refer to the keys in this chapter Menu Map This section shows the menu configurations of the panel keys Functional Descriptions This section describes the functions of the panel keys and soft keys 5 1 Menu Index Operation Key Pages Operation Key Pages AM Meas ON OFF 5 37 5 40 Average ONCE SLIDE 5 25 5 26 ee ces 5 25 5 30 5 27 5 28 0 5 5 62 5 63 5 29 5 30 1 5 62 5 63 5 32 5 36 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF 5 47 5 48 5 38 5 40 T0 dB div k RERO 5 62 5 63 5 43 5 44 2 Channel ON OFF
208. e Please change the context mode Ext Cfg gt Zoom amp Context This functionality is not allowed on multi context Mode Please change the context mode Ext Cfg gt Zoom amp Context gt Reset Context The Frequency Reference INT mode is not available with crystal option The crystal option is required Not available in Zoom F F mode Not available in Zoom T T mode Not available in F T mode Ext config Not available in T T mode Ext config The trace subtract result should be in Write mode Please change it operandl operand 2 gt result Trace gt Refresh gt Write The second operand trace should not be in Blank mode Please change it operandl operand 2 gt result The first operand trace should not be in Blank mode Please change it operand operand 2 gt result The table selected for the spurious measure is empty Please fill the table Impossible to change the Fundamental Frequency Please change to Funda mental mode ON Meas2 gt Harmonics gt Fundamental Impossible to execute recall functionality The file is not compatible with this FUS version The TTL Trigger level is available only in EXTERNAL mode The Trigger level is available only in IF or VIDEO mode The Trigger slope is not available in FREE RUN mode The Trigger video is only available in zero span mode The ACP graph mode is ON Watt and Volt
209. e SHIFT key again to cancel the shift mode The green LED turns off and the shift mode is unavailable Other keys Nothing is printed on these keys but they have the functions shown below USER Sets and cancels the USER menu COPY Displays the Copy menu Select Marker Returns one selected marker number Displaying a dialog box Pressing certain soft keys displays a dialog box Selecting items Select the horizontal items by using the data knob and select the vertical items by using the step keys Entering numeric values Enter values by using the keypad and unit key Determining the setting Press the unit key ENTER to determine U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 4 3 1 Basic Measurement 4 3 Basic Measurement This section uses the following measurement examples to describes basic measurement procedures which will allow the user to become familiar with the operation of this instrument 431 Calibration 432 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 433 How to Cancel the UNCAL Message 4 3 4 Identifying an Image Signal 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output Calibration Correcting the measurement by using the calibration factor which is acquired from the calibration can increase the measurement accuracy Calibration items Total Gain Measuring the calibration signal of 20 dBm and acquiring the level difference Step ATT Minimizing the level error when switching STEP ATT at 20 MHz RBW Optimizing the RB
210. e input signal is greater than a certain value the correct value is not displayed on the screen and the input signal appears as if it were compressed This phenomenon is called gain compression and it reflects the lin earity in the input signal range Normally the gain compression for a spectrum analyzer is specified as the input signal level that produces a 1 dB error from a perfect linear response A 7 U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary A 8 Maximum Input Level This is the maximum level allowed for the input circuit of the spectrum analyzer The level can be modified by the input attenuator Noise Sidebands Noise sidebands are used to show the purity of the oscillator Spectrum analyzer efficiency is reduced by noise generated in the local oscillator and phase lock loop of the analyzer This noise will appear in the vicinity of the spectrum on the screen Therefore the sideband noise of the analyzer is defined and the signals that are larger than the sideband noise of the analyzer can be analyzed The spectrum analyzer s noise sideband characteristics are shown in the following example Example Suppose the noise level measured in the resolution bandwidth of 1 kHz is 70 dB at 20 kHz apart from the carrier The noise level is normally expressed by the energy contained in the 1 Hz band width Figure A 6 b With a bandwidth of 1 Hz the following applies Since the value is 70 dB when the bandwidth is 1 kHz the sign
211. e manual mode Displays UNCAL while the manual settings are inappropriate Displays IS while the image suppression function is set to On Displays LOF while the reference offset is set to On Displays FOF while the frequency offset is set to On Displays the marker frequency time and level Displays the current date and time Displays the currently performed measurement function Displays the selected trace mode and trace detector mode The trace with displayed at the beginning is the active trace For a display of two traces or more the trace with is displayed at the front Displays 501 pts while the number of trace points is set to 501 points Displays 75 while the Input Impedance is set to 75 Q Displays Ref EX1 while the external reference signal is selected R3131 mode Displays while the R3131 mode is set to ON in 03741 R3162 mode Displays while R3162 mode is to ON in U3751 U3771 U3772 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 3 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rear Panel Names and Functions of Each Part on the Rear Panel This section describes the names and functions of each part on the rear panel EIC FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGANGT RISK OF FIRE REPLACE WITH AND RATING FUSE ABE WARNING 9 EA ZUROBI F AEBIEOTHED OPERATOR GERVICEAGLE PARTS INSIDE SERVICING TO PROVIDED BY TRAINED INDMDUSLS
212. e memory Blank Hides the trace Traces A B and C cannot be set to Blank at the same time Trace A B C Selects the applied trace memory Displays the Calc Mode menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Write Displays the waveform data acquired in the default settings Min Hold Displays the minimum value of points in each trace sample Max Hold Displays the maximum value of points in each trace sample Average Displays the Video Average menu The Video average performs averaging of the display data Average START STOP START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point in which averaging was paused Average ONCE SLIDE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Power Average Displays the Power Average menu Performs averaging of power W and draws waveforms Average START STOP START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays t
213. e settings for the channel power measure ment Displays the Ch Avg menu Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the average channel power OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Selects a trace in which to execute the channel power measure ment Activates the settings of the measuring window position Activates the setting of the measuring window width Displays the Pow Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Total Power Measures the total power in the measuring span Displays the Toal Pow menu The total power can be obtained by using the following equation X2 5 SPAN 1010 gt 10 x X Toor Total power to be obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm SPAN Span setting value PBW Noise power bandwidth 1 2 1001 Execute ON OFF ON Performs a total power measurement OFF Cancels the total power measurement Average Control Performs the average settings for the total power measurement Displays the Tot P Avg menu Averaging ON OFF Switches the averaging function ON a
214. e to be executed by the commands received Generating response data When the parser executes a query this instrument generates data on the output buffer as its response that is a query must be sent immediately before outputting data U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 Command Syntax 6 5 Command Syntax This chapter describes the command syntax 6 5 1 Command Syntax The command syntax is defined in the following format Header Data 1 Header Two types of header are available the common command header and the simple header The common command header starts with an asterisk The simple header is a functionally independent command that has no hierarchical structure If a question mark is attached immediately after a header it becomes a query command 2 Spaces Spaces may be used to separate headers from data to ease readability 3 Data When the command requires more than one data item list these data items by delimiting them with commas A space may be inserted before or after the comma For more information on data types refer to Section 6 5 2 Data Formats 4 Writing more than one command You can write multiple commands by delimiting them with semicolons in one line U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 2 Data Formats 6 5 2 Data Formats This instrument uses the following data formats for the input and output data
215. e used A USB port is located on the front and rear panels Attempt to change the USB memory key to a different port An incorrect measured value which is approx 6 dB higher than the correct level is displayed Is the Input Impedance set to 75 2 Set it to 50 Q AMPLITUDE Input Impedance 50 9 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle This product should be disposed of according to the regulations and laws that are established in your country and municipality Before this product is disposed of separately collect components shown in the table below to prevent the spread of substances which may be harmful to the global environment humans and ecology Substance Component Polychlorinated biphenyls PCB con taining capacitors Used Not used Not used Location Parts and material Mercury containing components Used LCD monitor Fluorescent tube Batteries Used BPG 032411 Lithium ion battery Printed circuit boards Used Panel Power supply Board Printed circuit board Toner cartridges Not used Plastic containing brominated flame retardants Used WBL FUS FRONT E BEB 032400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 Connectors inductors tantalum capacitor
216. e used to obtain the optimal resolution in a signal spectrum analysis according to the frequency span When switching from one resolution bandwidth filter to another while mea suring one signal an error is generated because of the differences in loss between resolution bandwidth fil ters This error is defined as the bandwidth switching uncertainty 1 dB 1 Switching uncertainty ms mnam Figure A 10 Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty Average Noise Level This sensitivity represents spectrum analyzer s capability of detecting the smallest signal and is directly re lated with noises generated from a spectrum analyzer itself The sensitivity however varies depends on the used resolution bandwidth In general the maximum input sensitivity of a spectrum analyzer is expressed as average noise level when the instrument is used with its minimum resolution bandwidth 11 U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio This shows the state of impedance matching when a spectrum analyzer is connected to a signal source that includes ideal and nominal output impedance The VSWR is expressed as the ratio of the maximum value to minimum value of a standing wave which consists of traveling and reflected waves The VSWR is another expression of the reflection coefficient or return loss Referring to Figure A 11 the signal E1 at the receiving end the spectrum a
217. e waveform is equal to or less than the mask values the result is Pass Abs and Rel Compares the waveform with both the Limit Abs Start Limit Abs Stop values and the Limit Rel Start Limit Rel Stop values If both conditions are satisfied Pass is displayed Abs or Rel Compares the waveform with both the Limit Abs Start Limit Abs Stop values and the Limit Rel Start Limit Rel Stop values If either of the conditions is satisfied Pass is displayed U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Limit Abs Start Sets the absolute mask value at the position of the start frequency Limit Abs Stop Sets the absolute mask value at the position of the stop frequency A mask value at a position between the start and stop frequencies is calculated by using the linear interpolation Limit Rel Start Sets the relative mask value at the position of the start frequency Limit Rel Stop Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Spurious Execute ON OFF On Trace A B C Bands Definition 5 34 The set mask value is used to compare with the offset value from the measured reference power Sets the relative mask value at the position of the stop frequency A mask value at a position between the start and stop frequencies is calculated by using the linear interpolation Displays the SEM Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the Spurious menu ON Performs
218. ecute X dB Right 5 36 5 37 5 62 5 64 EXT nete erred 5 65 Input and Output 7 5 7 9 Ext Trigger Level 5 65 5 66 7 14 External neris 5 65 5 66 Input Impedance 50 75 5 62 5 63 Factory Init sss 5 8 5 16 Iro V 5 62 5 64 PILE ia eine weaves 5 18 Insert Band ue eee 5 26 5 35 File Control 5 8 5 14 Insert Channel 5 26 5 31 5 18 5 19 Insert Entry 5 5 47 5 50 File Format BIN XML 5 18 5 20 5 52 5 65 File Format PNG BMP 5 8 5 13 5 69 lun A TEUER 5 7 5 11 Insert 5 57 5 59 Fixed Mkr ON OFF 5 47 5 48 Intermod Jaa eR 5 36 5 38 FM Megs asasasssaastasassquwasawsaqhessapany 5 37 5 41 THOS conania 5 18 5 21 Format 5 8 5 13 LAN IP Address 4022222222 5 7 5 10 Format Media 5 18 5 20 tette evo 5 61 Formula 1 ON OFF sese 5 57 5 60 Level eeu ee RES 5 65 5 66 Formula 2 ON OFF 5 57 5 60 Limit Line 1 2 5 47 5 50 Formula 3 ON OFF 5 57 5 60 5 52 5 65 Free R h
219. eep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ch Windows ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Roll Off Factor Insert Channel Delete Channel Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ref Power CHN PEAK Ch Windows ON OFF Show Mask ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Roll Off Factor Delete Band L Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Insert Band Delete Band Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Previous Band Next Band Restore Defaults Save Defaults Channel Power Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Channel Position Channel Width Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Activates the measuring window and displays the Channel P menu The channel power can be obtained by using the following equation P n X2 A SPAN 10log X 10 x aw po xij Channel power to be obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm SPAN Channel Width setting value PBW Noise power bandwidth Trace point at the window s left edge X2 Trace point at window s right edge ON Performs a channel power measurement OFF Cancels the channel power measurement Performs the averag
220. eep Time mode to ON U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 13 Counter 6 8 13 Counter Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz Resolution Query 0 1 kHz 1 100 Hz 2 10Hz 3 1 Hz Counter Position CNPOS Frequency CNPOS Frequency Counter Position Auto CNPOSA ON OFF CNPOSA 0 OFF Position Linked to Marker 1 ON Counter COUNT ON OFF COUNT 0 OFF 1 ON Counter Value CNRES Frequency U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power 6 8 14 Power Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Measure Mode PMEASMODE 0 OFF 1 CHPOW 2 TOTPOW 3 AVGPOW 4 OBW 5 6 SEM 7 SPU Measure OFF PMEASOFF Measure Averaging PMEASAVG PMEASAVG 10 1 ON PMEASAVGONCE ONCE MULT PMEASAVGON 0 ONCE 1 MULT Measure Averaging Times PMEASTM Integer Measure Trace PMEASTRACE TRA TRB TRC PMEASTRACE 0 TRA 1 TRB 2 TRC Channel Power ON OFF PWCHON ON OFF PWCHON 0 OFF 1 Channel Power Average PWCHTM Integer PWCHTM Integer Times Channel Power PWCH Level Channel Power Spectral PWCHPSD dB Density Power Measure Save PWCHSAVE Power Measure Restore PWCHLOAD
221. el 500 nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V GPIB 488 bus connector USB A USBI 1 on the front and rear panels LAN RJ45 on the rear panel 10 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Video out VGA 15pin f on the rear panel U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 73 U3771 U3772 Performance Specifications 7 3 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range RF Input 1 Frequency band Built in preamp Frequency range RF Input 2 Frequency band 9 kHz to 8 GHz 9 kHz to 3 1 GHz 3 0 GHz to 8 GHz 10 MHz to 8 GHz U3771 U3772 Band0 10 MHz to 31 8 GHz 10 MHz to 43 GHz 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 3 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz Band1 N 1 7 8 GHz to 14 573 GHz Band2 N 2 14 4288 GHz to 28 0 GHz Band3 N 4 27 8 GHz to 31 8 GHz 4 6 03771 27 8 GHz to 43 0 4 N 6 03772 U3771 U3772 Band0 N 1 Frequency readout accuracy Marker readout x Freq reference accuracy SPAN x SPAN accuracy Residual FM Internal frequency reference stability Aging rate Temperature stability 2 x 10 year 32 5 x 10 6 0 C to 50 C Marker frequency counter Resolution Accuracy RBW lt 100 kHz Signal level S N gt 50 dB SPAN lt 100 MHz 1
222. elta Y Ly Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Volume Pause Time U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Restore Defaults Save Defaults Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List A 20 Refresh Cale Detector Detector AUTO MNL Det Avg Mode RMS Video Math Trace A B C Refresh Write View Blank Trace A B C Write Min Hold Max Hold Average Power Average Max Hold Continuous Trace A B C Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Trace A B C Subtract Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Store Trace A B C L Average ONCE SLIDE OFF A B gt A B A gt A gt Display Line More 1 2 OFF A B gt C B A gt C A DL A B DL9B Display Line ON OFF TRCOA TRCOB TRC gt C Trace A B C Peak Menu a MKR Select Marker Marker ON OFF Marker Trace A B C Delta Mode Peak Menu Clear All More 1 2 Others HIDE SHOW Clear Others Display List ON OFF Mkr Step AUTO MNL Mode Index Value Signal Track
223. ement range U3741 9 kHz 3 GHz 03751 9 kHz 8 GHz U3771 9 kHz 31 8 GHz U3772 9 kHz 43 GHz High speed and high accuracy sweep Frequency span accuracy 196 or less 20 ms sweep time Extremely low noise level 135 dBm 5 GHz typical value built in preamplifier ON 120 dBm 40 GHz typical value High measurement level accuracy 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz 3 1 GHz 1 0 dB Frequency range 3 1 GHz 8 GHz 3 way power supply system AC DC and attachable battery Compact Approximately 308 mm W x 175 mm H x 209 mm D Lightweight U3741 Approximately 5 0 kg or less without option U3751 Approximately 5 6 kg or less without option U3771 U3772 Approximately 6 kg or less without option Conventions of Notation Used in This Document The panel and soft key notations used in this manual are described below Panel key Bold Example FREQUENCY SPAN Soft keys Bold italics Example Center Span NOTE Screen displays and diagrams such as external view of the main unit in this manual are those of the U3771 in the U3700 series 1 4 U3700 Series User s Guide 1 4 Advantest Homepage Advantest Homepage The product information for the U3700 series Spectrum Analyzer is published on the Advantest homepage http www advantest co jp On the homepage sample software can be downloaded and the following information can be browsed Appli cation notes such as the GP IB command table and tec
224. ency Frequency Full Span FS Zero Span ZS Last Span LTSP LS Frequency Setting Mode FINPMD CALC TBL FINPMD 0 CALC 1 TBL Set Start Channel Offset FACHO Frequency FACHO Frequency Set Stop Channel Offset FBCHO Frequency FBCHO Frequency Start Channel Offset FACHOON ON OFF FACHOON 0 OFF 1 ON Stop Channel Offset FBCHOON ON OFF FBCHOON 0 OFF 1 ON Set Center Channel Set ting CFCH Integer CFCH Integer Channel Number Set Start Channel Setting FACH Integer FACH Integer Channel Number Set Stop Channel Setting FBCH Integer FBCH Integer Channel Number Center Channel Setting CFCHON ON OFF CFCHON 0 OFF 1 ON Start Channel Setting 6 24 FACHON ON OFF FACHON 0 OFF 1 ON U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 1 Frequency Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Stop Channel Setting FBCHON 0 OFF 1 ON Channel Type 1 Input3 CHCALCI Integer Formulas Integer CHCALC2 Frequency Frequency ok Integer CHCALC3 ok Formula 1 for Type 1 CHCONI CHCONI 0 OFF 1 ON Formula 2 for Type 1 CHCON2 CHCON2 0 OFF 1 ON Formula 3 for Type 1 CHCON3 CHCON3 0
225. ency channel center frequency max power Frequency absolute power Amplitude power relative to the carrier Relative amplitude test result Pass Fail Result Read Spectrum Emission Mask Refer ence Power 1 READ SEMask RPOWer Amplitude Read All Spurious Results 1 2 3 4 READ SPURious BAND 1 Spurious band index number of rows spurious frequency Frequency spurious level Amplitude test Pass Fail Result Read Total Power 1 READ TOTPower Amplitude Read Power Spectral Density for Total Power Measurement 1 READ TOTPower DENSity Power Herz 6 93 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 14 Function description Set Averaging Count Subsystem SENSe SCPI command SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt 2 1 SENSe 1 AVERage COUNt Parameter Context index Integer Query reply Integer Remarks Enable RMS Detector SENSe 1 AVERage TYPE 2 1 SENSe 1 AVERage TY PE Context index RMS VIDeo RMS VID Set EMC Filter SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC 91 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC Context index AUTO W200 W9K W120k W1M AUTO W200 WOK W120 WIM Set EMC Enable SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC STATe 1 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth EMC STATe Context index 10 Set Video Bandwidth SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo 02 1 SENSe 1 BANDwidth VIDeo
226. ency Reference 7 18 7 5 4 Option 28 EMG Filter uu 7 19 7 5 5 Option 53 Time Domain Analysis Option sese 7 19 7 5 6 Option 70 High C N MM n 7 19 7 5 7 Option 75 75 Q Tracking Generator 7 21 4 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator 7 22 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 7 23 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES 8 1 8 1 n qe 8 1 8 2 PAG CCSS OEIC MEET m 8 2 9 MAINTENANCE e 9 1 9 1 Cleaning 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 9 1 2 Cleaning of Other Parts RR Tm 9 2 9 2 About CA ALLO a ua EM 9 2 9 3 About Replacement of Limited Life Parts 9 2 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument 9 3 9 5 T ranaportatI m usya 9 3 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 3 9 6 1 Work E a 9 3 9 6 2 Destination and Phone Number for Contact 9 3 9 7 Last OE Error esed BER uu 9 4 9 8 In Case of TDI ICU UY MR Xn 9 9 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle a 9 10 APPENDIX n E 1 Al Tnitial
227. ently set conditions Displays the Harmonic menu ON Executes the harmonic measurement function OFF Terminates the harmonic measurement function START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF Frequency Counter Execute ON OFF Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution Resolution 1 kHz Resolution 100 Hz Resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 Hz More 1 2 AM Meas ON OFF PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point at which averaging was paused ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Selects a trace in which to execute the harmonic measurement Sets the measuring harmonic order The measuring order can be set from 1 to 10 The default value is 3 ON Sets the fundamental frequency The measuring span is set in the range that includes the fundamental and set harmonic order frequencies OFF Sets the current center frequency to the fundamental frequency Displays the Counter menu ON Sets a frequency counter mode OFF
228. enu and Limit Line table Limit Line Frequency Level 1 Edits limit 1 2 Edits limit 2 Deletes a line on which cursor is positioned in limit line table Inserts a line in the limit line table Clears all settings in the limit line table Displays the Peak 2 2 menu Moves the active marker to the minimum value of the trace in the search range Moves the marker to the next lowest peak from the current marker position in the search range Automatically sets the delta marker mode moves the reference marker to the maximum value and moves active marker to the minimum value Lists peak levels and peak frequencies in order of frequency MKR 180 3 MHz 92 05 dBm MARKER 7 480 3 MHz Peak List STOP 200 0 MHz Frequency SWP 20 ms Marker List 6 40 0 MHz 60 1 MHz 80 0 MHz 100 0 MHz 140 5 MHz 56 99 dBm 65 18 dBm 84 37 dBm 88 15 dBm 91 83 dBm 160 2 MHz 180 3 MHz 90 75 dBm 92 05 dBm Display List ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Peak List Level Lists peak levels and peak frequencies in order of peak level Display List ON OFF Switches the peak list display ON Displays the list OFF Hides the list U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 11 gt 5 2 11 gt If the key is pressed active marker data such as frequency and level can be used as data of other function Displays the Mkr to menu
229. er When turning on the power do not connect a DUT to this instrument 2 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 1 3 SETUP SETUP This chapter describes how to set up this instrument on delivery Topics covered in this chapter are 3 1 Inspection on Delivery 3 2 Locating This Instrument 3 3 Power Supply 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals 3 5 Checking Operations Inspection on Delivery After receiving the product inspect the outside and the accessories according to the following procedure 1 Check that the shipping container and the cushioning material are not damaged IMPORTANT If the shipping container or the cushioning material is damaged keep them until the following inspections are complete Check that the outside of the product is not damaged WARNING If any outside components of the product such as the cover panel front or rear LCD display power switch or connector are damaged do not turn on the power You may receive an electrical shock Check that the standard accessories listed in Table 3 1 and option accesories listed in Table 3 2 are complete and they are not damaged If any of the following occur contact an Advantest sales representative The shipping container or the cushioning material is damaged or signs of stress are found The outside of the product is damaged The standard accessories are incomplete or are damaged Defects are found in the operat
230. er Off 122 dBm 1 2 f GHz dB Bandi Preamplifier Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB TBD Band0 Preamplifier On 139 dBm 1 4 f GHz dB Band Preamplifier On 121 dBm 2 f GHz dB Band0 120 dBm 1 5 f GHz dB Band1 111 dBm 118 dBm typ Band2 109 dBm 117 dBm typ Band3 105 dBm 112 dBm typ Band4 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 10 MHz gt 8 dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp Second harmonic distortion RF Input 1 RF Input 2 Preamp Off 70 dBc Mixer input level 40 dBm Frequency gt 200 MHz lt 75 dBc typ Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 300 MHz 40 dBc Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency 300 MHz 31 8 GHz 03771 300 MHz 40 GHz U3772 Third order intermodulation distortion TOI Frequency range gt 10 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm 2 Signal separation 1 MHz 50 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses Image Suppression On Span lt 5 GHz lt 60 dBc Residual responses Frequency range gt 10 MHz 80 dBm Preamp Off 7 13 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 3 6 Input and Output 7 3 6 Input and Output Description Specifications RF input 1 Connector Impedance VSWR RF input 2 Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 500 nom lt 1 71 lt 3 0 GHz 40 Input attenuator gt 10 dB lt 2 0 1 gt 3 0 GHz Bandl Input attenuator gt 10 dB Type K f on the
231. er Spectral Density for 1 FETch CHPower DENSity Power per Herz Channel Power Measurement Fetch Harmonics Results 1 2 3 4 5 FETch HAR number of rows Monics marker index Integer frequency Frequency amplitude Amplitude amplitude difference Relative amplitude Fetch Intermodulation Results array 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 number of rows FETch IM Lower Frequency Marker Index Integer Lower Frequency Marker Number Integer Lower Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Upper Frequency Marker Index Integer Upper Frequency Marker Number Integer Upper Frequency Distortion Amplitude Amplitude Intermodulation Product Amplitude Lower Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Upper Frequency Test Result Pass Fail Result Fetch the Intermodulation Gap 1 FETch IM DELTa Frequency Fetch the Intermodulation Frequency Ref 1 FETch IM REFerence Frequency erence 6 89 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Fetch OBW Results 1 2 FETch OBW Occupied Bandwidth Frequency Frequency Error Frequency Fetch Spectrum Emission Mask Results 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 number of rows FETch SEMask channel enabled 10 channel start frequency Frequency channel stop frequency Frequency channel center frequency max power Fre
232. er limit of the vertical scale a value greater than 14592 is transferred 14592 Trace data value 1792 i i i i i i i i i 1 101 201 301 401 501 601 701 801 901 1001 51 101 151 201 251 301 351 401 451 501 Number of data points Figure 6 7 Relationship between the Screen Graticule and Trace Data Trace data can be input or output in either ASCII or binary format Specify the output by using 16 bit integer data or the absolute value when outputting a value with binary data For the FORM1 or FORM3 format transfer data in order from the high order byte of the data For FORM2 or FORM4 format transfer data in order from the low order byte NOTE Only dB can be used as a unit for the absolute value output When the Units setting is Watts or Volts a value with a unit of dBm is output U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Table 6 4 Trace Point Specification Codes TPS Sets the number of measurement points to 501 TPL Sets the number of measurement points to 1001 Table 6 5 Binary Data Output Format Specified Code GPIB code Description Byte order 16 bit integer value from 1792 to 14592 16 bit integer value from 1792 to 14592 Order swap Absolute value IEEE 32 bit floating point type Absolute value IEEE 32 bit floating point type Order swap 1 When not specified FORM1 is used 2 The input format cannot be specified 6 6
233. eration key block Figure 4 2 1 Key lock key with lamp 2 LOCAL key REMOTE lamp 3 SYSTEM setting Preset key 4 APPLICATION key 5 FILE key 6 COPY key 7 HELP key 8 SHIFT key with lamp The keys in this block are used for changing settings Leck 1 CE APPLI 4 FILE 5 copy 6 7 HELP Csurr Extended Function Key Block Locks the key input Toggles the key lock between ON and OFF The lamp turns on while the key input is locked Cancels the remote control function The lamp turns on when the instrument is in the remote state Sets the operational conditions of an interface Initializes the settings of this instrument Switches between the applications of this instrument Loads and saves data Outputs screen data Explains the soft menu NOTE HELP is loaded and functions when the HELP key is pressed at the first time after the power is turned on Sets the shift mode which allows the functions indicated by the green font to be selected Turns on while the shift mode is set 1 2 3 CLEAR key Soft menu key RETURN key U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel CLEAR lt lt Figure 4 3 Soft Key Block Cancels data entry mode The soft key 1 to 7 correspond with the soft menu to 7 indicated to the left respectively Press the soft key to select the soft menu Returns to the pr
234. erence Power SEMRFPOW dBm SEM Measurement Value SEM Channel Number Start Frequency Stop Frequency Frequency Absolute Power Relative Power Judge Spurious Measurement Execution 6 44 SPURI ON FREQ OFF SPURION 0 OFF 1 ON U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 14 Power Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format SPU Measurement Result n lt DLM gt m1 lt DL M gt fl 11 jl1 lt DLM gt 101 jm1 lt DLM gt m2 lt D LMbfl jl1 lt DLM gt fm2 Im2 jm2 lt DLM gt mn lt DLM gt fl 1 lt gt fmn Imn jmn lt DLM gt 2 SPU Table Selection SPRTBL Integer 0 1 2 SPRTBL Integer 0 1 2 SPU Table Input Freq SPRIN SPRFIN Freq start pud Freq stop AUTO Freq rbw AUTO Freq vbw AUTO Time swp Level ref level AUTO Level att preamp Level Limit SPU Freq Table Deletion SPRFDEL Number of points 0 thru 5 fnL nth frequency Low InL nth level Low fnH nth frequency High InH nth level High lt DLM gt Delimiter 2 n Number of measurement points 0 thru 15 m Number of spurious signal 0 thru 10 f Spurious frequency l Spurious level J Spurious judgment result 0 Pass 1 Fail lt DLM gt Delimiter 6 45 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 15 EMC 6 8 15 EMC Command EXE SET Query GE
235. erforms averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average On Trace A B C Selects a trace in which to execute the average power measure ment Window Sets a measuring range in which to execute the average power measurement Displays the Avg P Win menu Range FULL WIN FULL Measures the average power in the full measuring span WIN Measures the average power in the measuring window Window Position Sets the measuring window position Window Width Sets the measuring window width Default Conditions Displays the Pow Default menu Restore Defaults Recalls the saved setting conditions Save Defaults Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 OBW Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C OBW Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults ACP Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Displays the OBW menu ON Performs an occupied bandwidth measurement OFF Cancels the occupied bandwidth measurement Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the occupied bandwidth power OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of ti
236. ert Entry Table Init Ref Disp Lines Display Line ON OFF Reference Line ON OFF Zoom and Contexts Graphic Z 1 Screen U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG Extended Configuration options ON Sets the offset dB of the vertical axis from the limit line The limit line display is shifted by the level offset ON Displays the display line Sets the position of the display line OFF Hides the display line Displays the Limit Line menu 1 Edits limit line 1 2 Edits limit line 2 Deletes a line on which the cursor is positioned in the limit line table Inserts a line in the limit line table Clears all settings in the limit line table Displays the Display menu Switches the display of the display line which is used as the ref erence line when trace levels are compared between ON and OFF ON Displays the display line OFF Hides the display line Switches the display of the reference line which is used as the ref erence to display level data in relative value between ON and OFF ON Displays the reference line The reference line position can be changed OFF Hides the reference line Displays the Zoom Contexts menu Displays the G Zoom 1 Screen menu Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Window Position Window Width ON Zooms in the area selected by the window OFF Cancels the zoom in display Sets the center position of the window Sets the window width U3700 Series User s Guide
237. es to the stop frequency setting text field Press 1 and GHz The stop frequency is set to 1 GHz and the cursor moves to the RBW selection button from Auto and Manual If selecting Auto press Hz If selecting Manual turn the knob clockwise for one click to select the Manual button and then press Hz U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 4 W CDMA Spurious Measurement 5 Select Manual and then press 1 0 0 and kHz The RBW is set to Manual and 100 kHz Spurious Bands No 1 2 Start eed Stop PT RBW Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual u L vBw Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual SWP Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Preamp it 6 Repeat the above procedure and set the VBW to Manual and 100 kHz the SWP to Auto the ATT to Manual and 20 dB the Ref Level to 0 dBm and the Preamp to Off The cursor moves to the limit value setting text field 7 Press 1 3 and GHz The limit value is set to 13 dBm and then the cursor moves to the start frequency setting text field of the next frequency band 8 Repeat the above procedure and complete the Spurious Bands table Spurious Bands No 2 3 4 Start Stop RBW Auto Manual Manual Auto Manual 1 000 MHz 1 000 MHz Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual 300 000 knz 1 000 Mi SWP Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual ATT Auto Manual Auto M
238. escriptions 4 1 Paper Format eere 5 8 5 1 Parser 5 7 5 1 6 32 Pass Fail Config sss 5 65 5 68 Pass Fail ON OFF 5 36 5 39 5 65 5 68 Pause Titties aq akka ayaka tend 5 37 5 42 PBW 5 7 5 11 sana asas aaa 5 50 Peak orean nasua 6 37 Peak X dB Down 5 36 5 38 Peak and Marker Move 6 36 Peak Delta 5 37 5 41 5 47 5 50 Peak List Frequency 5 47 5 50 5 52 Peak List Level 5 47 5 50 5 53 Peak Menu 2 5 47 5 48 5 54 Peak to 5 54 Peak Zoom 5 61 PEL BW Z aaa sus saa 5 72 5 73 q khawaq waqay 5 43 5 45 6 42 Power Average 5 43 5 44 Power Supply 3 4 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE UST700 ient pn 2 1 Proses 6 50 Previous Band 4 22 2222 5 26 5 35 Principle of Operation A 4 Print Config 2 5 8 5 15 U3700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Product Overview 1 2 5 29 5 30 Program Examples Using VB 6 54 5 32 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 39 Q 5 26 5 35 QUICK GUIDE
239. est 1 An error that occurred when the calibration was performed 2 An error that was detected while the self test was performed 3 Others U3700 Series User s Guide 9 8 In Case of Difficulty Check the following basics before calling Advantest Description Warning 7 83 Frequency Reference Unlocked is displayed Is the Frequency Reference set to EXT 1 Set it to INT 2 If EXT is used as the Frequency Reference Is a frequency reference signal input to the REF IN con nector on the rear panel Is the input reference frequency equal to the reference frequency set in this instrument 9 8 In Case of Difficulty Operation SYSTEM Frequency Reference INT Ref Freq After the power is turned on the system does not boot up Is a USB memory key inserted Remove the USB memory key and then turn the power on again Any key input cannot be accepted Is the key lock set to ON Is the LOCK key lamp illuminated Set the key lock to OFF LOCK password x x x x Hz Hz Turning off and on the power is also recommended If you do not remember the User Password Perform the Initialization by using the GPIB The User Pass word returns to 0 0 0 0 Command RPWD The USB memory key is not recognized l Check its format If formatting the USB memory key on a PC use the FAT format Some formats such as NTFS are not recognized The USB memory key with a security function cannot b
240. evious soft menu 4 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 4 RF INPUT 2 RF INPUT 1 500 500 OUTPUT Y RF INPUT 1 750 750 REVERSE PWR 117dB4aV 134 10V DC 50V DC U3741 For the 75 option OPT15 and OPT75 Figure 4 4 Input and Output Connectors Block CAL OUT connector Outputs the calibration signal TG OUTPUT connector Outputs the tracking generator signal Option RF INPUTI connector Input the signal to be measured Measurement frequency range U3741 9 kHz 3 GHz U3751 U3771 U3772 9 kHz 8 GHz RF INPUT2 connector Input the signal to be measured Measurement frequency range U3771 10 MHz to 31 8 GHz U3772 10 MHz to 43 GHz CAUTION 1 Do not apply an RF power or DC voltage that exceeds the limited value to the INPUT and OUTPUT con nectors Be careful of static electricity Internal circuit components such as the input attenuator and mixer may be damaged The precision microwave connector is used as the RF INPUT2 connector This connector is compatible with the K connector K connector is a trademark of Anritsu Corporation and can be connected to a common SMA connector Be careful when handling this connector because the connector is delicate and is damaged easily Use the included adapter HE A PJ if the connection and disconnection to this c
241. ex LEFT Marker index Execute Next Peak Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MA Ximum Context index NEXT Marker index Execute Next Peak Search to the Right CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MAXimum Context index RIGHE Marker index Execute Maximum Peak Search CALCulatez 1 MARK erZ2 MAXimum Context index PEAK Marker index Execute Next Minimum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MINimum Context index NEXT Marker index Execute Minimum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 MINimum Context index PEAK Marker index Execute Minimum Maximum Search CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 PTPeak Context index Marker index Enable Marker CALCulatezz1 MARKerZ2 S TATe 03 Context index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 STATe Marker index ON OFF Select Marker Trace CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 TRACe 3 Context index Trace index 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 TRACe Marker index Trace index 6 78 Function description Set Marker Position SCPI command CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 X 3 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 X Parameter Context index Marker index Frequency Time U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Position Hz s Remarks Get Marker Absolute Position 1 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 X ABSolute Context index Marker index Position Hz s Get Marker Coordinates 1 2 CALCulate 1 MARKer 2 XY Context index Marker index
242. ex Value Signal Track Signal Track ON OFF Y Range ON OFF 5 2 9 MKR Selects either Index or Value as the marker position setting Index Maintains the marker position at the point on the screen If the center frequency is changed the marker does not move and remains at the same position on the screen Value The marker position retains the frequency information If the center frequency is changed the marker position moves according to the frequency Displays the Sig Track menu Switches the signal truck function ON and OFF ON Performs the peak search for the same peak in each sweep and sets the marker frequency to the center frequency OFF Cancels the signal truck function Sets the margin when the signal track function detects the peak U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK 5 2 10 PEAK Displays the Peak menu Displays the marker at the maximum level of the trace in the search range and displays the frequency and level of the marker However the frequency of the feed through zero carrier is excluded PEAK m Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config Delta Y L Mor 1 2 Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain Couple to Win OFF IN OUT L Y Search Domain Window Position Min Peak _ Window Width Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Peak List Frequency Display Line ON OFF Peak List Level Couple to rune 1 OFF ABV BLW Display
243. f Input attenuator 10 dB REF 107 dBuV Temperature 20 C to 30 C 0 9 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz 2 1 dB Frequency range 9 kHz to 2 2 GHz 7 17 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference Dynamic Range Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Ref level lt 63 8 dBuV RBW 100 Hz 12 dBuV 2 f GHz dB Preamp Off 27 dBuV 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 20 MHz gt 102 dBuV Preamp Off gt 82 dBuV Preamp On Second garmonic distortion lt 70 dBc Preamp Off Mixer input level 77 dBuV Frequency gt 20 MHz Third order intermodulation distortion TOI Frequency range gt 10 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 88 8 dBuV Frequency separation 200 kHz 60 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and lt 60 dBc Mixer input level 88 8 dBuV Out of band responses Residual responses Frequency gt 1 MHz Preamp Off 21 dBuV Input and Output RF input Connector Type N f on the front panel Impedance 75 nom VSWR Input attenuator 2 10 dB lt 1 6 1 Calibration signal output Connector BNC f on the front panel Impedance 75 Q nom Frequency 20 MHz Level 20 dBm 7 5 3 Option 20 High Stability Frequency Reference Description Specifications Reference frequency stability Aging rate 32 x 10 8 day 1 x 1077 year Warm up
244. f tcpClient SendData RFACT 0 22 amp vbLf tcpClient SendData ACPTM 10 amp vbLf tcpClient SendData PMEASAVG ON amp vbLf tcpClient SendData CLS OPR 16 SRE 128 Sets status byte Stb Space 10 Do tcpClient SendData STB 4 vbLf Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Sets average times Sets average func tcpClient SendData ACP amp vbLf Starts measurement Clears Channel Space param Sets ACP mode to Carrier Sets Channel Bandwidth tcpClient SendData CSBSIN 5MZ 3 84MZ amp vbLf Adj Channel param tcpClient SendData CSBSIN 10 2 3 84 2 amp vbLf Adj Channel param Sets Nyq Filter operation to on Sets Symbol rate of filter Sets Roll off factor of filter to ON Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData Stb If CLng Val Stb And 128 Then Exit Do Loop tcpClient SendData ACP vbLf tcpClient GetData ResultACP Reads out all meas Call MsgBox ACP results 6 ResultACP End Sub results of ACP U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 SCPI Command Reference 6 10 SCPI Command Reference This chapter describes the SCPI command reference for this instrument 6 10 1 Command Reference Syntax This section describes the function syntax and parameter of each SCPI command discussed in this chap ter Function description How to use a command or operations when the command is executed are described SCPI command
245. ff Factor Bands Definition Delete Band Init Table Start Stop Integral BW Judee U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 ON OFF Sets a symbol rate Activates the Nyquist filter Cancels the Nyquist filter Sets a roll off factor Displays the SEM Bands menu and SEM Table window Deletes a column of measurement conditions from the current cursor position Initializes all data in the table SEM Table No Start Stop IBW Absolute Absolute Absolute Relative Relative Relative Judge Abs and Rel Abs and Rel Abs and Rel Abs or Rel Abs or Rel Abs or Rel Lin Abs Stort SL 5 pn 7777 Lim abs Stop p Lim Rel Start Sets offset frequency from the center frequency as the start frequency of emission mask judgment frequency band Sets the offset frequency from the center frequency as the stop fre quency of the emission mask judgment frequency band Sets the power integral bandwidth at each frequency point Specifies how to compare the waveform with the set mask values absolute or relative values when the mask judgment is per formed Absolute Compares the waveform with the mask values set in Limit Abs Start and Limit Abs Stop If the waveform is equal to or less than the mask values the result is Pass Relative Compares the waveform with the mask values set in Limit Rel Start and Limit Rel Stop If th
246. frequency span is changed to 1 10 of the currently set value Searches the maximum signal level in the full band and captures the signal then finally sets the frequency span to a value before AUTO TUNE starts The reference level is set to the peak level of the searched signal ON Starts AUTO TUNE OFF Stops AUTO TUNE U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE Displays the Level menu and enables the settings related to the amplitude display AMPLITUDE Ref Level ATT ATT AUTO MNL Min ATT Attenuation 0 dB 5 62 Ref Level ATT gt ATT AUTO MNL dB div Min ATT Vertical Scale LIN LOG Attenuation 0 dB Units L gt 10 dB div Slide Screen ON OFF 5 dB div More 1 2 2 dB div 1 dB div Ref Offset ON OFF L 0 5 dB div Input Impedance 50 75 dBm High Sensitivity ON OFF dBmV Factor Edit Factor dBuVemf L Round Grid Values ON OFF dBpW Watts L Volts Ls Insert Delete Init Table Sets the reference level Displays the Attenuation menu tings AUTO Automatically sets the attenuator value according to the reference level Sets the attenuator value manually Sets the minimum value of the attenuator This setting is enabled only when the attenuator is set manually Sets the attenuator to 0 dB Displays the confirmation window before setting This setting can be set by selecting OK with step
247. front panel 500 nom 1 7 1 40 Input attenuator gt 10 dB 2 0 1 typ Bandl Band2 Band3 Input attenuator gt 10 dB 2 5 1 typ Band4 Input attenuator gt 10 dB Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 500 nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on the rear panel 10 kQ nom DC coupling 0Vto5 V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Amplitude BNC f on the rear panel 500 nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear panel 500 nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V 488 bus connector USBI 1 on the front and rear panels RJ45 on the rear panel 10 100Base T Protocol TCP IP 7 14 VGA 15pin f on the rear panel U3700 Series User s Guide 7 4 General Specifications 7 4 General Specifications Description Specifications Operation environment Ambient temperature 0 C to 50 C Relative humidity 85 or less no condensation Storage environmental range Ambient temperature
248. gt a Delta ON OFF Ref Object Fixed Mkr ON OFF 1 Delta Mkr ON OFF Signal Track ON OFF Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config More 1 2 p gt Min Peak Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Peak List Frequency Peak List Level Display List ON OFF v Y Range ON OFF Peak Delta Y Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain gt Y Search Domain U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Reference Marker Reference Line Couple to Win OFF IN OUT Window Position Window Width Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init 21 U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List PEAK Select Marker Next Peak Next Peak Right Next Peak Left Config More 1 2 Min Peak Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Peak List Frequency Peak List Level Display List ON OFF MKR gt L A 22 Y Search Domain Peak Delta Y Continuous Peak ON OFF X Search Domain to Mkr to Ref Peak to CF Peak to Ref Delta to Span Delta to CF More 1 2 Mkr to CF Step Delta to CF Step Mkr to Mkr Step Delta to Mkr Step Couple to Win OFF IN OUT Window Position Window Width Couple to DL OFF
249. hannel width is displayed in the center of the screen 750 Channel P REF 68 75 1 10 0 aB Execute s VBW ON OFF 300 kHz 2 Average Control On Trace A Channel Position Channel Width 7 Default ET CENTER 557 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz Conditions SWP 20 ms 6 Press Channel Width 5 6 and MHz The channel width is set to 5 6 MHz 4 53 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 7 Press Execute ON OFF ON The channel power measurement begins 8 The measurement result is displayed in the Channel Power window 58 33 dBuV Figure 4 21 Measuring the noise level N Setting this instrument Measurement mode Noise Hz measurement function Measurement noise area frequency Noise that is adjacent to the measurement signal and not affected by the signal SPAN 10 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 1 kHz Measurement bandwidth 5 6 MHz A value for the Noise Hz conversion Averaging count 30 times 750 Noise Hz REF 68 75 MKR 561 14 MHz 10 0 dB 17 08 68 7 NOISE HZ 5 600MHz Noise x Hz 3 dBm Hz ON OFF 4 dBpV sqrt Hz 5 dBc Hz 31 3 CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SPAN 10 00 MHz 1 S Noise Marker 1 Noise 5 600 MHz 34 26 dByV sqrt Hz Figure 4 22 Measurement Display for Noise Power Converted into 5 6 MHz Bandwidth Proced
250. he current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point in which averaging was paused Average ONCE SLIDE Max Hold Continuous Trace A B C Detector Normal Posi Nega Sample Average Trace A B C Detector AUTO MNL Det Avg Mode RMS Video Math Subtract OFF A B gt A B A gt A gt U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Displays the maximum value for each trace sample The trace is not reset in this function which is different from the Max Hold function in the Calc menu The Max Hold operation starts at a trace point when the key is pressed This function can be used when the Detector mode is set to MNL Selects the applied trace memory Displays the Detector menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Sets the normal detection mode in which a positive or negative peak is automatically detected at each trace point Sets the positive peak detection mode Sets the negative peak detection mode Sets the sample detection mode Sets the average detection mode The average detection mode includes RMS power average and Video Trace average which can be selected in the Det Avg Mode menu Selects the applied trace memory Switches the de
251. hnical notes How to access Select English PRODUCTS amp SUPPORTS Electronic Measuring Instruments and Product from the top page and then choose a product model to be browsed 1 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 2 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE U3700 This chapter describes precautions when using this instrument Read this chapter before using this instru ment 21 Ifa Fault Occurs If any smoke smell or noise emanates from this instrument turn off the MAIN POWER switch remove the power cable from the AC power connector and then contact an Advantest sales representative immediately 2 2 Removing the Case The case of this instrument should only be opened by Advantest service engineers 23 Electromagnetic Interference This instrument may cause electromagnetic interference and affect television and radio If this instrument s power is turned off and any electromagnetic interference that may be present is reduced then this instrument has caused the interference Electromagnetic interference from this instrument may be prevented by the following precautions Changing the direction of the antenna of the television or radio Placing this instrument on the other side of the television or radio Placing this instrument away from the television or radio Using a different power source for the television or radio and this instrument 2 4 Note when Turning on the Pow
252. ic Distortion This is the distortion caused by the non linearity of a spectrum analyzer especial ly generated in the mixer when an ideal and undistorted signal is input to the spec trum analyzer This performance determines spectrum analyzer s capability of measuring harmonic distortion see Figure A 7 Third Order Distortion The third order distortion is caused by the non linearity of a spectrum analyzer when two signals with different frequencies fl and f2 are input and two signals of 2f1 f2 and 2f2 fi are generated near the input signals The amplitude of these sig nals depends on the mixer input level see Figure A 7 The maximum value is specified Image Multiple Out of band responses In addition to the two types of spurious signals described above a spurious called non harmonic spurious is generated at particular frequencies by the spectrum analyzer There are three types of responses in the non harmonic spurious the im age multiple and out of band responses 10 20 2nd order 30 harmonics Distortion 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 ndamental Display level dB 60 40 20 0 20 40 Input level dBm Figure A 7 Spurious Response Zero Span The spectrum analyzer sweeps the time in the horizontal axis at certain frequency but does not sweep fre quencies in this mode U3700 Series User s Guide A 3 Glossary Occupied
253. ice in COPY Config SYSTEM More1 2 Copy Config or SHIFT COPY Select PRT printer from the Copy Device menu Press the COPY key or Copy in the Copy menu to start printing Printers whose operation has been checked Manufacturer Model name Epson PM 900C PM 760C PM 740C PM 2200C PM G720 PX V500 HP 5650 HP6122 Deskjet5740 Deskjet6840 Photosmart7830 Canon 1P4200 MEMO The printing time can be reduced by performing the following 1 Start copying during a sweep stop 2 Use White and Black for Color Pattern 4 27 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 3 5 2 File Output to USB Memory Connecting a USB memory device 1 Connect a memory device to a USB port on the front or rear panels of this instru ment 2 Press SYSTEM 1 2 Copy Config Screen Shot Config and Media A dialog box is displayed Select a memory device by using wr key and confirm it by using the Hz key ScreenShot REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dBi i File Format PNG BMP 2 Auto Inc ON OFF Copy Files Media 3 Auto Inc Name Free Size 22525 Dev 0 USB Device 121 7 MB122 1 MB Menu OFF 5 Media CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 dB 3 Press the Media key The dialog box closes File output 1 Selecting a file format Select the PNG or BMP format by pressing SYSTEM More1 2 Copy Config Screen Shot Config and File Fo
254. ices that has two or more LAN interfaces such as an Ethernet hub The LAN cable used in this case is connected as shown in Table 6 3 U3700 series rear panel External controller LAN cable Figure 6 2 LAN Setup 6 6 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN Table 6 2 Connection of IOBASE T Cross over Cables Connector A Connector B Signal name EE di Signal name Pin number Pin number RX 1 3 TX RX 2 6 TX TX 3 1 TX 6 2 RX Not Used 4 4 Not Used 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 Signal Name Pin 1 TD 2 TD 3 RD 6 RD Figure 6 3 Connection of Cross over Cables Table 6 3 Connection of IOBASE T Straight Cables Signal name p Line color Pair number Pin number RX 1 White Orange 2 RX 2 Orange TX 3 White Green 3 TX 6 Green Not Used 4 Blue 1 5 White Blue 7 White Brown 4 8 Brown 6 7 6 8 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 3 2 Setting the IP Address 6 3 2 Setting the IP Address Press SYSTEM Remote Control and LAN IP Address 1 Setting the IP Address Manually Enter a check mark into the Use the following IP address check box IP Address Subnet Mask Network Setting Default Gateway Obtain an IP address automatically Set the above items v Use the following IP address Padus EU KU HC HKI Subnet
255. in level order is displayed 1 Resolution Execute mE Resolution 100 Hz Select the ON mode 3 Resolution Select a resolution 10 Hz Resolution 1 2 U3741 U3751 U3771 U3772 QUICK GUIDE SAVE file format 7 4 setting More 12 gt Me mat BIN Binary dat XML Extensible Markup Language xml Selectthe BIN or XML mode Data Files Media SAVE or RECALL Sue 4 Analyzer Memory Flash rune Memory Hash Media setting Dev 0 USB Device 13 6 124 5 Select Data Files Media Items SAVE Items setting Setup Traces c Traces Context B B Limit Lines 12 Channel L on ACP on SEM on L o Spurious lt gt lt Corr Factor Select SAVE Items SAVE execute Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 13 4 MB Free 7 124 5 MB Files File Info fus00 dat RECALL execute File Hame 500 A gt F w ON Choose a recall file with the data knob FEES iode and press a unit key Traces Context Limit Lines O1 Channel Move a cursor to point with nd UP DN keys and press a unit key SEM File name Tus00 dat GUIDE 3 U3741 U3751 U37
256. ing was paused ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and repeats averaging continuously by using the last data Selects a trace in which to execute the inter modulation measure ment Sets the measuring order The third fifth seventh and ninth orders can be set Limit Setup Pass Fail ON OFF Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Harmonic Execute ON OFF Average Control Average START STOP Max Sweep Count U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Displays the Limit Setup dialog box 3rd Order Limit Sets the limit value of the third order distortion signal 5th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the fifth order distortion signal 7th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the seventh order distortion signal 9th Order Limit Sets the limit value of the ninth order distortion signal Limit Setup 3rd Order Limit 0 00 dB Sth Order Limit 0 00 dB 7th Order Limit 0 00 dB 9th Order Limit 0 00 dB Switches the Pass Fail judgment due to the comparison with the limit value set in the Limit Setup dialog box ON and OFF ON Performs the Pass Fail judgment If the measurement result is larger than the set limit value a Fail judgment is performed OFF Does not perform the Pass Fail judgment Displays the IM Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the curr
257. ing SETDATE Date YYMMDD SETDATE Date Time Setting SETTIME Time HHMMSS SETTIME Time Reset user password RPWD for front panel lock Option List Opt1 Opt2 Optn lt DLM gt Option 75 Ohm Input 1 Installed High Stability 0 Not installed EMC Filter 3GPP Demod TG 30 dBm TG 60 dBm 75 Ohm TG 60 dBm U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 23 TG 6 8 23 TG Function Command EXE SET Query GET Code TG Argument Format Code Output Format 0 OFF 1 ON TGF TG Level TGL Level TGL Level TG Frequency Offset TGO ON TGO Frequency TGO TGOON Frequency 0 OFF 1 ON TG Level Offset TGLO ON TGLO ON OFF TGLO TGLOON DB 0 OFF 1 ON Capture Normalize Data Active Trace CAPND Normalize Correction Active Trace NORM ON OFF Capture Normalize Data Trace n lt n gt RX Normalize Correction Trace n A B C lt n gt NORM ON OFF lt n gt NORM Normalize Execute Active Trace AR Delta Reference Line TGDLTRLN ON OFF TGDLTRLN 0 OFF 1 ON VSWR ON OFF VSWRON ON OFF VSWRON 0 OFF 1 ON VSWR Measurement Value VSWR Real VSWR Return Loss Value 6 52 VSWRLOSS DB Real U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 24 Units 6 8 24 Units Functio
258. ion check 3 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 1 Inspection on Delivery Power cable Table 3 1 Standard Accessories Quantity 01412 U3751 U3771 U3772 Input cable 50 A01037 0300 N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U Ferrite core ESD SR 120 Ferrite core E04SR150718 BNC SMA adaptor HRM 517 Adapter for RF INPUT2 HE A PJ U3700 Series User s Guide BU3700S The quantity decreases to zero when the 75 2 option 15 is included Input cable 75 Q Table 3 2 Option Accessories Quantity A01045 OPT76 OPT77 N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U C15 type adapter NCP NFJ NC BNC adapter 165 Table 3 3 OPT10 Accessories N m BNC f adaptor JUG 201A U 3 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 Locating This Instrument Locating This Instrument This section describes the installation environment in which this instrument runs successfully Operating Environment Install this instrument in an environment in which the following conditions are satisfied Ambient temperature 0 C to 50 C operating temperature 20 C to 60 C storage temperature Relative humidity 85 percent or less with no condensation An area free from corrosive gas An area away from direct sunlight A dust free area An area free from vibrations A low noise area Although this instrument has
259. ions must be 10 cm or more larger than the physical size of this instrument because cushioning materials are placed inside Place the instrument so that it is covered with cushioning or plastic foam material on all sides The cushioning material must be 4 cm or more thick Seal the carton case with an industrial stapler or packing tape 9 6 Notes for Requesting Repair Replacement of Parts and Periodic Calibration 9 6 1 9 6 2 Work Request Attach a tag indicating the following data to this instrument when you send it to a sales representative Your company name and address Name of the person in charge Serial number on the rear panel What work to request repair or periodic calibration Destination and Phone Number for Contact Call Advantest MS Measuring Instruments Call Center 9 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages 97 List of Error Messages This section describes error messages which are displayed because of function restrictions or errors in oper ation of this instrument Error code Displayed Message Some formula parameters are out of range The system has adjusted auto matically the value Some channel table parameters are out of range The system has adjusted automatically the value Some limit line table parameters are out of range The system has adjusted automatically the value The table is full Impossible to insert a new item No formula for this channe
260. it depends on the setting of each UNIT ExampleSpecify ML and output as the marker level D DDD E DD CRLF T T T T 1 2 3 4 The maximum size of data 1 2 3 is 19 bytes and the unit is sec ExampleSpecify SW and the output sweep time DDDD CRLF T 2 4 The maximum size of the data in bytes corresponds to the maximum size of the output data ExampleThe ON OFF status or Averaging count is output Supplement 1 Sign a space for plus sign for minus sign 2 Mantissa of data 3 Exponent of data 4 Delimiter CR LF in initial setting can be changed with DLn code 6 57 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 1 Reading and displaying the marker level Dim sep As Integer Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa 30MZ Sets the parameter Call ibwrt spa SP 1MZ Call ibwrt spa MLN ON Marker ON Call ibwrt spa MK 30MZ Sets the marker to 30 MHz Call ibwrt spa TS Call ibwrt spa ML Requests the value of the marker level Rdbuff Space 30 Allocates 30 bytes to the buffer area Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Reads the data 30 bytes Max sep InStr 1 Rdbuff vbCrLf 0 Checks the number of character up to the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text MarkerLevel 6 Left Rdbuff sep 1 Displays the data on the screen An example display MarkerLevel 88 1875
261. it floating point Dim tr 1000 As Single Allocates an array in the buffer for 1001 points 32 bit floating point type Dim i As Integer Dim res As String Dim tra 4 As Byte Variable which swaps the high order byte and low order byte Dim tran As Byte Variable which swaps the high order byte and low order byte Dim tmp As Single Variable which stores converted data Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt Spa FORM3 Switches to FORM3 Call ibconfig 0 IbcEndBitIsNormal 0 Sets the GPIB board software so that the end bit of each Ibsta variable is set to 1 only when EOI has been received Call ibwrt Spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt Spa TBA Requests Trace A in binary data Call ibrd32 Spa tr 0 1001 4 Reads 1001 points of binary data 4 for four bytes For i 0 To 1000 Step 1 Repeats the operation for 1001 points Call CopyValtoVal tra 0 tr i 4 Copies the 4 byte data stored in tri i to tra 0 to 3 tran tra 0 Swaps the high and low orders tra 0 tra 3 tra 3 tran tran 1 tra 1 tra 2 tra 2 tran Call CopyValtoVal tmp tra 0 4 Copies the 4 byte data stored in tra 0 to 3 whose high and low orders are swapped to tmp res res amp Str tmp amp vbCrLf DoEvents Next i RichTextBoxl Text res Displays the data on the screen Call ibwrt Spa DLIMO Sets the delimiter to the
262. iter to EOI only Call ibwrt spa BMP Requests bitmap data output Call ibrdf spa bitmap bmp Writes bitmap data to a file Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Returns delimiter setting to CR LF and EOI Writes a screen image that is copied into a USB memory to a file Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa DLIM2 Sets a delimiter to EOI only Call ibwrt spa GIMAG copy003 bmp Specifies a screen image name and requests its output Call ibrdf spa copy003 bmp Writes a screen image to a file Call ibwrt spa DLIMO Returns delimiter setting to CR LF and EOI 6 69 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 9 1 6 Example Program Which Uses the TS Take Sweep Command Example 1 ACP measurement is taken and then the measurement result is read using the TS com mand Dim state As Integer Dim sepl As Integer sep2 As Integer Dim i As Integer j As Integer Dim cnt As Integer Dim LvlH As String LvlL As String Dim FrgH As String FrqL As String Call ibclr spa Performs a Device Clear Call ibwrt spa SI Sets the single mode Call ibwrt spa CF 1500MZ Sets the center frequency to 1500 MHz Call ibwrt spa SP 250KZ Sets the frequency span to 250 kHz Call ibwrt spa RB 1KZ Sets RBW to 1 kHz Call ibwrt spa VB 3KZ Sets VBW to 3 kHz Call ibwrt spa ST 20SC Sets the sweep time to 20 sec Call ibwrt spa
263. itter is measured 7 ES mane DUT e p Attenuator _ e amog Examples of measurement specifications Channel space Specified bandwidth 5MHz 3 84 MHz 45 dB 10 MHz 3 84 MHz 50 dB CS Channel space BS Specified bandwidth Setting measurement conditions 1 Press FREQUENCY 2 1 0 0 and MHz The center frequency is set to 2100 MHz 2 Press SPAN 2 5 and MHz The frequency span is set to 25 MHz 4 45 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement Setting the CS BS table 5 10 4 46 CAUTION Set the frequency span according to the following conditions For Nyquist Filter OFF SPAN gt 2 CS BS For Nyquist Filter ON SPAN gt 2 CS 1 Roll Off Factor Symbol Rate Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF ON 3 0 and GHz A value of 30 dB which is the attenuation of the external attenuator is added to a level reading value Press MEASI and ACP The ACP menu is displayed Press Channel Definition The CS BS table is displayed The cursor is positioned at the Channel Space 1 setting text field Press 5 and MHz Channel Space 1 is set to 5 MHz The cursor moves to the Cha
264. itude Amplitude 6 87 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Set Reference Level Offset SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Parameter Context index Relative amplitude Query reply Relative amplitude Remarks Enable Reference Level Offset DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet STATe 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet STATe Context Index ON OFF Set Vertical Scale DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing 2 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe SPACing Context index LINear LOGarithmic LINILOG Acquire Trace Normalization Data 6 88 DISPlay WINDow TRACe 1 NCORrection STORe Trace index U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 6 Subsystem FETch Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Fetch ACP results 1 2 3 4 5 number of rows FETch ACPower lower channel fre quency Frequency lower channel amplitude Amplitude upper channel fre quency Frequency upper channel amplitude Amplitude Fetch ACP Reference Power 1 FETch ACPower RPO Wer Amplitude Fetch Average Power Measurement 1 FETch AVPower Amplitude Fetch the Channel Power 1 FETch CHPower Amplitude Fetch the Pow
265. keys and press ing the unit key ENTER Switches the attenuator function between auto and manual set dB div 10 dB div 5 dB div 2 dB div 1 dB div 0 5 dB div Vertical Scale LINLOG Units dBm dBmV dBuV dBuVemf dBpW Watts Volts Slide Screen ON OFF More 1 2 Ref Offset ON OFF Input Impedance 50 75 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE Sets the LOG scale to 10 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 5 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 2 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 1 dB div Sets the LOG scale to 0 5 dB div LIN Displays waveform data on a linear scale LOG Displays waveform data a log scale Sets the display unit to dBm Sets the display unit to dBmV Sets the display unit to dBu V Sets the display unit to dBuVemf Sets the display unit to dBpW Sets the display unit to Watts Sets the display unit to Volts Scrolls the screen display up and down up to 100 ON Enables the function Enter the amount of the display scrolls by using the knob step keys or keypad OFF Cancels the slide function Displays the Level 2 2 menu Switches the reference level offset function ON and OFF ON The offset level can be set in the range of 0 to 100 0 dB The relationship among the displayed reference level set reference level and offset is as follows Displayed reference level Set reference level Offset OFF Cancels the offset 50 Converts the power assuming that the input impedance i
266. l ibwrt spa OBW Rdbuff Space 60 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff FC Mid Rdbuff 1 LENG1 DoEvents LENG2 InStr LENG1 1 OBW Mid Rdbuff LENG1 RichTextBoxl Text OBW An example display OBW 9 810000000000E 05 3 000250000000E 07 spa OBWON ON Integer Performs a device clear Sends the command already set Marker ON Sends the query command Allocates the area to the read buffer Reads the read buffer the maximum number of bytes to be output is determined by the buffer area size Formatting output character string LENG1 InStr 1 Rdbuff Chr 44 0 Searches for the first comma Reads the character before the comma Rdbuff Chr 13 0 Determines the last data by searching for the delimiter LENG2 LENG1 1 Reads the data between the second comma and the delimiter amp OBW amp vbCrLf amp Fc amp FC amp vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control Example 6 Reading and displaying the three largest peak levels Dim 1 As String pk2 As String pk3 As String Call ibclr spa Performs a device clear Call ibwrt spa OMZ Applies the settings Call ibwrt spa SP 100MZ Call ibwrt spa TS Call ibwrt spa PS Executes the peak search Call ibwrt spa ML Query command to search for the marke
267. l number Channel number not in table The pass fail table is empty No peak detected The bandwidth of the SEM item is null Insertion forbidden The current environment does not authorize this command There is no normalization data available for the selected trace The ElectroMagnetic Compatibility option is required The target trace is not available in this environment for the store functional ity The Window sweep mode is not allowed if a measure is active The Signal Track is not allowed when Image Suppression is active This functionality is not allowed if the Tracking Generator is not active This functionality is not allowed if the Reference Object in Delta mode is not the Ref Marker The Tracking Generator is out of band Please change the stop frequency or and TG frequency offset Stop Freq TG freq offset lt 3 1 GHz This functionality is not allowed if Channel or Average or Total Power Mea sure is active The Tracking Generator option is required This functionality is not allowed on Spurious Power Measure mode All limit Lines are OFF Please activiate at least one line The active measure is not allowed in this context mode The measure has been switched off 9 4 Error code U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Displayed Message This functionality is not allowed on Graphical Zoom Mod
268. lation time The setting range is from 100 ms to 1000 s 5 2 8 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE TRACE Displays the Trace menu and performs the settings related to the trace The Trace menu includes the trace selection menu which corresponds to the menu key 7 The trace is changed each time the key is pressed A gt B gt Trace A B C A Selects trace memory A B Selects trace memory B C Selects trace memory C TRACE s Refresh gt Refresh Write Cale View Detector Blank Detector AUTO MNL Trace A B C Det Avg Mode RMS Video Write Math Min Hold Trace A B C Hold Average gt Average START STOP Power Average Max Sweep Count Hold Continuous Average PAUSE CONT race a p C Average ONCE SLIDE L y Normal Posi Average START STOP Nega Max Sweep Count Average PAUSE CONT Sample L Average ONCE SLIDE Average Trace A B C L gt Subtract OFF Store 4 A B gt A Trace A B C B A gt A B A gt B A B gt B Display Line ON OFF r L More 1 2 Ly OFF B A gt C A DL gt A B DL gt B Display Line ON OFF TRC gt A gt TRC gt C Trace A B C 5 43 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE Refresh Displays the Refresh Mode menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Refresh Write Refreshes trace data in each sweep View Displays the trace data stored in th
269. le Displays the level scale 5 Center frequency or start frequency Displays the center frequency or start frequency 6 Resolution bandwidth RBW Displays the resolution bandwidth setting value Displays the font color of RBW in green if RBW is set in the man ual mode 7 User s title Displays the description of the details of the measured data 8 Video bandwidth VBW Displays the video bandwidth setting value Displays the font color of VBW in green if VBW is set in the man ual mode 4 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 4 8 Number of times averaging is performed Sweep time Frequency span or stop frequency High sensitivity Hi sensitivity RF attenuator UNCAL message Image Suppression Level offset Frequency offset Marker area Date Measurement function display Trace and trace detector Trace point Input impedance 75 Q External reference signal R3162 R3131 mode ON Displays the set and current number of times averaging is per formed Displays the sweep time setting value Displays the font color of SWP in green if SWP is set in the man ual mode Displays the frequency span or stop frequency Displays HiS while the preamplifier is set to On Displays the attenuator setting value Displays the font color of ATT in green if ATT is set in th
270. luded in this instrument 1 How to remove and replace the battery pack Align the side of the battery pack that contains the connector with the battery mount on the rear panel of this instrument and push it in and down The battery is attached when a click is heard Turn off the power supply of this instrument when detaching the battery To detach the battery lift the battery up while pushing the eject button on the battery mount U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 2 Using a Battery o ect Button Locking 14 Slide switch for locking 2 Locking the Eject button The slide switch to lock the Eject button is located on the right side of the battery mount lower side of the Eject button The Eject button is locked by setting the slide switch to upper side Set the slide switch to the lower side and release the lock before the battery pack is attached or detached 3 3 2 2 Charging the Battery This instrument cannot charge the external battery pack Use a suitable battery charger for the battery pack For the DIONIC 90 The TITAN TWIN charger A870009 is recommended When the TITAN TWIN charger is used the charging time is approximately 5 5 hours 3 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power Supply 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power Supply 3 3 3 1 DC Power Requirements DC power supply Requirements Power supply voltage range 11 V
271. measurement used as the reference power Ch Windows ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Roll Off Factor Channel Definition Insert Channel Delete Channel Init Table ON OFF Displays the ACP channel window Closes the ACP channel window Switches the Nyquist filter function ON and OFF ON OFF Activates a Nyquist filter Cancels the Nyquist filter Sets a symbol rate Sets a roll off factor Displays the ACP Ch menu Displays the CS BS Table dialog box CS BS Table No 1 Channel Space Channel Bandwidth 5 000 MHz 3 840 MHz Channel Space Sets the Offset frequency from the carrier frequency that shows the adjacent channel measuring position Channel Bandwidth Sets the measurement bandwidth used in the adjacent channel leakage power measurement Inserts a line on which to set an adjacent channel measurement condition at the current cursor position The data in the line that existed in the position before insertion is copied to each setting value as new line data Deletes the measurement condition at the current cursor position Initializes the contents of the ACP channel table U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Graph ON OFF Default Conditions Restore Defaults Save Defaults Spectrum Emission Execute ON OFF Average Control Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE ON Displays an ACP graph OFF Hides the
272. mes and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average Selects a trace in which to execute the occupied bandwidth mea surement Sets the ratio of the occupied bandwidth power to the total power in percentage The initial value is 99 Displays the OBW Default menu Recalls the saved setting conditions Saves the currently set conditions Displays the ACP menu ON Performs the adjacent channel leakage power measurement OFF Cancels the adjacent channel leakage power measurement Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the adjacent channel leakage power OFF Cancels the averaging function Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates MUL Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average U3700 Series User s Guide Mode FULL CARR Config Carrier Bandwidth 5 2 6 MEAS 1 FULL Calculates the adjacent channel leakage power in relation to the reference power the measurement of which is taken from the full bandwidth on the screen CARR Calculates the adjacent channel leakage power to the reference power the measurement of which is taken from the bandwidth set in Carrier Bandwidth Displays the ACP Cfg menu Sets the measurement bandwidth of channel power
273. must be set according to the following for mula SWP gt PT x 1 Fmod SWP Sweep time PT The number of display trace points Fmod Modulation frequency When the FM Meas function is selected the trace detector is automatically set to the Posi mode Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF Peak Delta Y Execute ON OFF Sound AM FM Switches ON and OFF a mode in which a sweep time is deter mined based on a modulation frequency ON Sets a modulation frequency and then sets a sweep time based on the modulation frequency OFF Cancels a mode in which a modulation frequency is set A value set for SWP Time AUTO MNL is applied to a sweep time when measurement starts Sets a level difference for a signal to be judged as a peak point during the peak search A level difference set here is used as a threshold level while searching for a peak value Displays the Sound menu For a signal where the marker is positioned sound demodulation is performed when a sweep ends Switches the sound demodulation function ON and OFF ON Outputs the demodulated sound signal to the PHONE terminal on the front panel OFF Cancels the sound demodulation function Switches the demodulation mode between AM and FM AM Selects the AM demodulation FM Selects the FM demodulation U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Volume Sets the demodulated sound volume The sound volume can be adjusted in 16 levels Pause Time Sets the demodu
274. n E see IEEE Std 488 2 1992 page 89 GZ MZ KZ HZ DB DBM DBMV DBUV DBEMF DBPW W WATT MW V VOLT MV Microvolt UV Nanovolt NV Second SC Millisecond MS MSEC Microsecond US USEC Nanosecond NSEC PER PPM 6 53 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 Example of Remote Control Programs 6 9 Example of Remote Control Programs This chapter describes examples of programs which control the instrument by remote The example programs in this chapter use the Microsoft Corp Visual Basic language If programming in another language the example programs must be described in that language The explanation of the programs here assumes that the GPIB board provided by the National Instruments Corp hereafter referred to as the NI Corp is used as a GPIB controller 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control This section describes the step by step procedures in which the GPIB bus is controlled by the Visual Basic programs For operations such as initializing variables and defining function routines which depend on Visual Basic the notational rules for the Visual Basic program must be applied 6 9 1 1 Reading the GPIB Control Library for Visual Basic To control the GPIB board provided by NI Corp by using the program described in the Visual Basic lan guage the two files must be built into the Visual Basic Project Those two files
275. n Peak Min Max Peak Continuous Peak ON OFF 0 OFF 1 ON Peak AY Div Level Div Level Div Peak List Frequency Level PLS FREQ PLS LEVEL X Peak Area Couple to Window MKSX OFF INJOUT X Peak Area Position MKSPOS Frequency Time MKSPOS Frequency Time X Peak Area Width MKSWID Frequency Time MKSWID Frequency Time Y Peak Area Couple to Display Line MKSYDL OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYDL 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Y Peak Area Couple to Limit Line 1 MKSYLA OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYLA 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW Y Peak Area Couple to Limit Line 2 MKSYLB OFF ABOVE BELOW MKSYLB 2 OFF 0 ABOVE 1 BELOW 6 37 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Measurement 6 8 12 Function Noise Measurement Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format Frequency Code Output Format Frequency Noise ON dBm Hz Noise ON dBuV VHz Noise dBc Hz Noise OFF Noise Mode Query 0 OFF 1 dBm Hz 2 dBuV NHz 3 dBc Hz Noise Value NIRES Level X dB Down Level MKBW MKBW X dB Down XDB X dB Down Left XDL X dB Down Right XDR X dB Relative X dB Absolute Left X dB Absolute Right DCO DCI DC2 0 Relative 1 Absolute Left 2 Absolute Right Continuous dB Down
276. n blank mode The active trace is in blank mode Noise Measure dBc Hz Impossible to work on the reference marker Impossible to work on the reference marker The delta mode is disable The fixed mode is active The active marker is not enable There is no enable marker Span is not set to 0 Hz Please change span Span is set 0 Hz Please change span Impossible to change the parameter Please insert data in channel table Impossible to change the parameter Please switch on at least one formula Impossible to change the Stop Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Start Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Center Frequency via normal mode Impossible to change the Stop Frequency via channel mode Impossible to change the Start Frequency via channel mode Impossible to change the Center Frequency via channel mode Could not save screen copy The screen copy cannot be saved on the analyzer memory Please select another media Cannot remove protected file 961 Cannot rename protected file 1 Cannot replace protected file 1 Cannot open file 1 File 1 Unknown data format 9 6 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages Error code Displayed Message File 1 Corrupted Data File 1 Incompatible Version Cannot access media File not saved Not enough s
277. nalyzer input section is the same as the signal E0 at the transmitting end if the impedance of the receiving end is matched to that of the trans mitting end The reflection coefficient is expressed in the formula shown below when the reflected wave ER exists due to a mismatch between the impedances Reflection coefficient m Reflected wave Ep Traveling wave Ep The Return loss is expressed in the formula shown below Return loss 20 log Ep Eg dB VSWR Eg Eo The relationship of VSWR with the reflection coefficient is as follows VSWR 1 m 1 m The range of VSWR is between 1 and eo the nearer to 1 this value is the better the state of impedance match ing is Signal to be measured Spectrum analyzer Sender Ep PE E Receiver Traveling wave Reflected wave Figure A 11 VSWR U3700 Series User s Guide A 4 dB Conversion Formula A 4 dB Conversion Formula 1 4 Definitions 0 dBV 1 Vrms Y dBV 20 log SY X mW 0 dBm 1 mW Y dBm 10 log Faw OdBuV 1pVrms Y dByV 20 log TUN E XpW 0 dBpw 1 pW Y dBpw 10 log Conversion formulas IfR 500 If R 75 x dBV dBm 13 dB dBV dBm 11 dB dBuV dBm 107 dB dBuV dBm 109 dB dBuVemf dBm 113 dB dBuVemf dBm 115 dB dBpw dBm 90 dB dBpw dBm 90 dB Examples Converting 1 mV into dBu V 20 log Ty 20 log 103 60 dBu V Converting 0 dBm into dBuV 0 dBm 107 dB 107 dBuV R
278. nction Center frequency Center frequency in the channel SPAN 10 MHz RBW 30 kHz VBW 300 kHz Measurement bandwidth 5 6 MHz Channel power bandwidth 750 REF 68 75 DL 58 33 dBpV 10 0 dB 7 WIN WIDTH 5 60 MHz s O E BE CENTER 557 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 20 ms Channel Power Channel Power 58 33 Power Spectral Density 117 3u Channel P Execute OFF 2 Average Control On Trace A 5 Channel Position 6 Channel Width 7 Default Conditions Figure 4 21 Measurement Display for Channel Power Procedure Example for 27 channels 1 Press FREQUENCY 5 5 7 1 4 2 8 5 7 and MHz The center frequency is set to 557 142857 MHz 2 Press SPAN 1 0 and MHz The frequency span is set to 10 MHz 4 52 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 3 Press AMPLITUDE and then press W to adjust a signal peak on the third scale from the top 750 Level REF 68 75 1 Ref Level 68 75 9 dB div 10 0 dBi 4 vertical Scale LIN LOG Units 6 Slide Screen ON OFF 7 3005 1 4 CENTER 557 14 MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz RBW 100 kHz VBW 100 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB 4 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 3 0 kHz VBW AUTO MNL 3 0 0 and kHz The RBW is set to 30 kHz and the VBW is set to 300 kHz 5 Press MEASI and Channel Power A window that shows the measurement c
279. nctions nn 6 4 6 2 3 2 Responses to Interface Messages 6 4 6 3 LAN Remote Control System 6 6 6 3 1 Setting up the LAN 6 6 6 3 2 Setting the 6 8 6 3 3 Control from a Controller 6 9 6 4 Message Exchanging Protocol 6 10 6 4 1 Buff erfS aaa suaqqa qi 6 10 U3700 Series User s Guide Table of Contents 6 4 2 Message Exchange e 6 10 6 5 6 11 6 5 1 Command Syntax 6 11 6 5 2 Data Formats E 6 12 6 5 3 Status 6 13 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming 20 saei 6 19 6 7 A T Command M iro o MARRON 6 19 6 8 AT Command 6 24 6 8 1 o X P 6 24 6 8 2 asas 6 26 6 8 3 Jun 6 27 6 8 4 S WCD HH 6 28 6 8 5 yis c E P 6 28 6 8 6 Trace oren E 6 29 6 8 7 6 32 6 8 8 Display qa 6 33 6 8 9 M rker 6 34 6 8 10 Peak and Marker Move tinana 6 36 6 8 11
280. nctions of the panel keys and soft keys MEMO indicates panel key All other names are soft menus 5 2 1 SYSTEM This subsection describes how to configure this instrument Version Annotations ON OFF Frequency Reference Frequency Reference INT EXT XTL Remote Control Ref Freq Trace Points 501 1001 Ref Freq 10 MHz Calibration More 1 2 L gt U3751 U3771 U3772 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3162 Mode ON OFF Parser AT SCPI U3741 GPIB Address LAN IP Address R3131 Mode ON OFF _ Parser AT SCPI L gt Calibrate ALL Each Item gt Total Gain RF Path 1 Report HIDE SHOW Total Gain RF Path 2 Calibration Int Ref Step ATT CAL Calibration Corrections ON OFF RBW CAL Frequency Correction ON OFF PBW Coarse Fine U3751 U3771 U3772 Store L Default Y a 5 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM 5 8 Color Pattern User Password Date Time Config Self Test Factory gt Colori Color2 Black and White White and Black Edit Date Time Format Show ON OFF Copy Copy Device FILE PRT Screen Shot Config ____ Print Config Execute Self Test File Format PNG BMP Auto Inc ON OFF Auto Inc Index Menu ON OFF File Control Media Paper Format Color
281. nd OFF ON Measures the average total power OFF Cancels the averaging function Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average ONCE SLIDE ONCE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then the process terminates SLIDE Performs averaging for the set number of times and then calculates the moving average On Trace A B C Selects a trace in which to perform the total power measurement Default Conditions Displays the Pow Default menu Restore Defaults Recalls the saved setting conditions Save Defaults Saves the currently set conditions U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 6 MEAS 1 Average Power Measures the average power in the measuring range Displays the Average P menu The average power can be obtained by using the following equation x2 PAvG 10108 Z 10 PAVG Average power to be obtained P n Displayed data at each trace point dBm 1 2 1001 Execute ON OFF ON Performs an average power measurement OFF Cancels the average power measurement Average Control the average settings for average power ment Displays the Av P Avg menu Averaging ON OFF Switches the averaging function ON and OFF ON Measures the average power OFF Cancels the averaging function Max Sweep Count Sets the number of times averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average ONCE SLIDE ONCE P
282. ne bus system There is no restriction in how cables are connected However no more than three GPIB connectors should be stacked on one device If four or more GPIB connectors are stacked the joints of the connectors may break because excessive force is applied to them For example a system consisting of five devices can use cables of up to 10 m 2 m device x 5 devices 10 m length Cable lengths can be allocated freely unless the total cable length exceeds the permitted maximum length If 10 or more devices are connected however some devices should be connected with cables less than 2 m so that the total cable length does not exceed 20 m 2 GPIB address setting GPIB addresses should be set by pressing the System key and selecting GPIB Address 6 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 2 3 GPIB Bus Functions 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 GPIB Bus Functions GPIB Interface Functions Table 6 1 GPIB Interface Functions Description Source handshake function Accepter handshake function Basic talker function serial polling function listener specified talker cancel function No extended talker function Basic listener function talker specified listener cancel function No extended listener function Service request function Remote function local function local lockout function No parallel polling function Device clear function Device trigger function No device trigger function No
283. ne table 1 and displaying limit line 1 1 Configuring a Limit Line Private Sub cmdEx6_Click Initialization Dim spa As Integer spa ildev 0 8 0 T10s 1 0 ilclr spa in this example we shall use the frequency specific commands however it is also possible to select the limit line domain call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN CONT DOMAIN FREQ and to use the genertic commands CALC LLIN DELETE and CALC LLIN DATA Clear limit line table 1 frequency Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DELETE FREQ select dBuV as Amplitude Units Call ibwrt spa UNIT POWER DBUV Fill in the limit line table 1 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 25 MHZ 49 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 35 MHZ 49 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 35 MHZ 51 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 55 MHZ 51 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 55 MHZ 54 3 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 65 MHZ 54 3 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 65 MHZ 57 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 68 MHZ 57 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 68 MHZ 60 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 75 MHZ 60 0 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 75 MHZ 62 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 82 MHZ 62 5 Call ibwrt spa CALC LLIN1 DATA FREQ 82 MHZ 64 7 Set up the instrument Call ibwrt spa FREQ START 0 HZ Call ibwrt spa FREQ STOP 100 MHZ Display
284. nect this instrument to an AC power supply DC power supply or battery 3 3 1 Using the AC Power Supply This section describes power requirements and how to connect the power cable 3 3 1 1 AC Power Requirements The AC power requirements of this instrument are shown in Table 3 4 Check that the power supply which is supplied to this instrument satisfies the conditions shown in Table 3 4 Table 3 4 Power Requirements 100 V AC 200 V AC Remarks Power supply voltage range 90 V 132V 198 V 264 V Frequency range 47 Hz 63 Hz Power consumption 100 VA or less Automatically switches the input voltage between 100 V AC and 200 V AC WARNING Make sure the power supply which is supplied to this instrument satisfies the power requirements If the power requirements are not satisfied this instrument may be damaged 3 4 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 1 Using the AC Power Supply 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable This instrument includes a three core power cable with a grounding conductor To prevent accidents caused by electric shocks use the included power cable and securely connect to the ground through a three pin power outlet 1 Check that the included power cable is not damaged WARNING Never use a damaged power cable You may receive an electrical shock 2 Connect the AC power connector on the rear panel of this instrument to a three pin power outlet that has a pr
285. ng value Call MsgBox Center freq CF Span freq 5 5 End Sub Read signal level using the marker function Public Sub ReadMkrSignal MKLevel Space 20 Prepares the text variable for read tcpClient SendData MLN ON amp vbLf Turns on the marker tcpClient SendData PS amp vbLf Searches peak point of signal tcpClient SendData MF amp vbLf Query the marker frequency Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData MKFreq Reads it tcpClient SendData ML amp vbLf Query the marker level Do While tcpClient BytesReceived 0 Waits for receiving a character DoEvents Loop tcpClient GetData MKlevel Reads it Display the freq and level of signal Call MsgBox Marker freq amp MKFreg amp Level amp MKLevel End Sub 6 73 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 74 Example 8 Measure Adjacent Channel Power Public Sub MeasACP ResultACP Space 200 tcpClient SendData CF 2GZ amp vbLf Sets carrier freq tcpClient SendData SP 25MZ amp vbLf Example 9 Setting of Adjacent channel parameters tcpClient SendData CSBSDEL amp vbLf tcpClient SendData ACPSCR CARR amp vbLf tcpClient SendData CARRBS 3 84MHz amp vbLf Example 10 Setting of Root Nyquist filter s parameters tcpClient SendData ACPNOST ON amp vbLf tcpClient SendData SYMRT 3 84MZ amp vbL
286. nnel Bandwidth 1 setting text field Press 3 8 4 and MHz Channel Bandwidth 1 is set to 3 84 MHz The cursor moves to the Channel Space 2 setting text field Press 1 0 and MHz Channel Space 1 is set to 10 MHz The cursor moves to the Channel Bandwidth 2 setting text field Press 3 8 4 and MHz Channel Bandwidth 2 is set to 3 84 MHz Press RETURN CS BS Table Channel Space Channel Bandwidth 5 000 3 840 MHZ 10 000 MHz 3 840 MHz U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 3 W CDMA Adjacent Channel Leakage Power ACP Measurement Measuring the ACP 11 Press Execute ON OFF ON The ACP measurement starts The detector is automatically set to RMS ACP REF 0 00 dBm MKR 2 11000 GHz 1 10 0 dB 76 38 dBm Execute ON OFF 2 Average Control Mode FULL CARR 4 Config 5 100 Channel ENTER 2 10000 GHz SPAN 25 00 MHz Definition RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz ATT 10 00 dB Adjacent Channel Power 6 Graph ON OFF Lower Upper Marker Power Marker Power 7 Default 1 51 18 dB 2 51 97 dB Conditions 3 64 68 dB 4 64 69 dB Ref Power 0 90 dBm 813 51 pW Displaying the channel bandwidth 12 Press Config and Ch Windows ON OFF ON The set channel bandwidth window is displayed on the screen The frequency span must be set so that all channels are included in it REF 0 00 dBm MKR 2 11000 GHz 10 0 dB 75 95 dBm 3 Ch Windows 5 Nyquist 100
287. nput attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp On 15 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 140 dBm to 40 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average 7 7 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 4 Amplitude Accuracy 7 2 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency Amplitude Accuracy 20 MHz 20 dBm 0 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 0 5 dB 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 4 dB Total level accuracy 7 2 5 Dynamic Range After performing the automatic calibration Image Suppression Off Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Off Input attenu ator 104 REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 C to 30 C 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 3 1 GHz 1 0 dB Frequency range 3 1 GHz to 8 GHz 1 5 dB Frequency range 9 kHz to 10 MHz Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB 40 Preamp Off 122 dBm 1 f GHz dB Band Preamp Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB 40 Preamp 139 dBm 1 3 f GHz dB Bandli Preamp 1 dB gain compression Frequency range 10 MHz to 8 GHz gt 8
288. nt Request Control Not uses in this instrument Operation Complete Not uses in this instrument 6 18 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming This section shows the AT commands in each function e Command code 6 6 GPIB Remote Programming An asterisk indicates a function that numeric or character strings data follows after the code Numeric data and ON can be omitted from Output format comma E indicates that two or more data are output e ON or OFF indicates that 1 0 is output Frequency is output in Hz and time is output in sec Level data is output in the currently set display unit 6 7 Command Index AT Command Pages AT Command lt gt 6 31 ACDP akaona lt gt EPOS 6 31 ACPCBW n2B ues sus 6 30 ACPLOAD SEG B 6 30 ACPNOQST GC M 6 31 ACPREF SC CNT 6 31 ACPSAVE 63 ian eee 6 31 ACPSCR upaku 6 31 n NIL AN 6 30 ADO ec dn Mr n 6 30 ADLA w NORM yaaa kasanpi 6 53 PANO 6 31 NPP GC 6 31 AMMOD ISPGONE 6 31 ANNOT PGP ade Wai Ree 6 31 AR
289. o 3 000 GHz Normz Data 20 3 Normalize Correction OFF 4 6 Ref Line ON OFF 7 Reference 100 4 Line CENTER 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz OFF RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 00 dB 8 Press MKR Delta Mode Delta ON OFF ON Ref Object and Reference Line The marker delta mode is set The marker value shows a cable loss based on a frequency of 20 MHz Marker REF 0 00 dBm 2 100 GHz 10 0 dB 2 39 detect Marker MARKER _ 2 100 GHz z Marker ES 100 1 500 GHz SPAN 3 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 40 ms ATT 10 00 dB 9 Move the marker and read a cable loss for each frequency For this measurement 10 frequency points from 300 MHz to 3 GHz are used 4 39 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 1 Using the Normalize Function and Level Correction Table Creating the correction table 10 11 12 13 4 40 Press AMPLITUDE More 1 2 and Edit Corr Factor The Correction Factor Table is displayed The cursor is positioned at the frequency setting text field of correction point 1 Press 3 0 0 and MHz The correction point 1 frequency is set to 300 MHz The cursor moves to the level setting text field Press 0 8 and GHz The correction value of correction point 1 is set to 0 8 dB The cursor moves to the frequency setting text field of correction point 2 Repeat the above procedure an
290. on SOURce CORRection TRACe 1 Trace index STATe 02 ON OFF 1 SOURce CORRection TRACe 1 STATe Set TG Frequency Offset SOURce FREQuency OFFSet 1 Frequency Frequency 1 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet Enable TG Frequency Offset SOURce FREQuency OFFSet ON OFF 10 STATe 21 1 SOURce FREQuency OFFSet STATe Set TG Level Offset SOURce POWer LEVel Relative amplitude Relative amplitude QMMediate OFFSet 21 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QIMMediate OFFSet Enable TG Level Offset SOURce POWer LEVel ON OFF QMMediate OFFSet S TATe 1 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QMMediate OFFSet S TATe Set TG Level SOURce POWer LEVel Amplitude Amplitude IMMediate AMPLitude 1 1 SOURce POWer LEVel QMMediate AMPL itude 6 10 3 16 Subsystem SYSTem Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Execute Factory Initialization SYSTem FACTory PRESet Execute System Preset SYSTem PRESet Enable Menu Refresh SYSTem REFResh MENU STATe 1 ON OFF 1 SYSTem REFResh MENU STATe Enable Screen Refresh SSYSTem REFResh SCREen STATe 1 ON OFF 1 SYSTem REFResh SCREen S TATe Date SSYSTem DATE 01 22 23 lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt Time SYSTem TIME 1 2 3 lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt 6 103 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 17 Sub
291. onnector are per formed frequently For the 75 Q option OPTI5 and OPT75 input and output connectors are changed to 75 type con nectors 50 Q cable or connector is connected to a 75 connector the center contact of the 75 connector may be damaged Verify that cables and connectors which are used are 75 type 10 11 12 13 A wsas 1 AS 2 5 USER J 7 8 9 FREQUENCY MEAS 1 MEAS 2 USER TRACE MKR PEAK gt FREQUENCY SPAN AMPLITUDE EXT CFG CPL U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel EXT CFG cPL i 14 15 Figure 4 5 Operation Key Block Selects a measurement such as Channel Power OBW or ACP Selects a measurement such as Noise Hz X dB down or Counter Allocates soft menu keys to be used Sets the trace function Displays the marker Searches for a peak on a trace Sets the values of the marker to that of another function Sets the tracking generator Option Sets the center frequency Sets the frequency span Sets the level Sets the sweep mode and trigger Sets the RBW VBW and sweep time 4 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 14 Keypad There are numeric keys 0 to 9 and decimal
292. operates correctly by following the procedure below Starting this instrument 1 Connect the power cable according to 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable 2 Turn on AC power switch on the rear panel 3 Three seconds after turning on the AC power switch on the rear panel press the power switch on the front panel to turn on the instrument The power supply and the green power light turn on Figure 3 5 POWER Switch 4 The system boots up and the program starts U3700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations The result of the self diagnostics and the initial screen are displayed The initial screen display may differ from Figure 3 6 depending on the status of the settings when the power supply was last turned off Frequency REF 0 00 dBm 1 10 0 dB Center Stop 4 Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input d 100 CENTER 4 000 GHz SPAN 8 000 GHz RBW 3 MHz VBW 3 MHz SWP 80 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 3 6 Initial Screen MEMO If any error message is displayed refer to 9 MAINTENANCE U3700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations Running calibration 6 Connect as shown in Figure 3 7 by using the included N BNC adaptor and input cable 01037 300
293. or Mode Color Gray 5 8 Color Pattern uuu ee 5 8 ed 5 8 ihc Ghia 5 8 Command Reference Syntax 6 76 Config iicet K 5 26 5 32 5 50 Config Driver 2 5 8 Context A B 5 66 5 71 Context RF2 RF1 5 17 Continuous Down ON OFF 5 36 Continuous Peak ON OFF 5 47 COPY aasan ayasa SE 5 8 Copy All to Flash 5 18 Copy All to USB 5 18 Copy Config cscs eco teetete its 5 8 Copy Device FILE PRT 5 8 Correction Factor ON OFF 5 62 Counter Position 5 36 Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW 5 47 5 51 Couple to Win OFF IN OUT 5 47 5 51 5 72 Date Time 3 crt 5 8 dB diy adea RR ERREUR 5 62 dBc Hz ON OFF 5 36 ni 5 62 dBm Hz ON OFF eee 5 36 dBmV 5 62 GBlV 2c 5 62 dBuV sqrt Hz ON OFF 5 36 dBuVemf sse 5 62 dBpW uui DR RR REIHE 5 62 5 2 5 31 5 31 5 58 5 27 5 27 5 27 5 58 5 48 5 48 5 11 5 15 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 31 5 47 5 15 5 70 5 18 5 38 5 50 5 13 5 20 5 20 5
294. otected ground terminal by using the included power cable See Figure 3 2 AC power connector Figure 3 2 Connecting the Power Cable WARNING Use a suitable power cable for the power supply voltage Use a power cable that complies with the safety standards in your country Refer to Safety Summary To prevent any danger of electrical shock connect the power cable to a three pin power outlet that is con nected to a protected ground terminal The instrument will not be grounded if an extension cord which does not include a protected ground terminal is used 3 5 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 3 2 Using a Battery 3 3 2 3 3 2 1 3 6 Using a Battery The U3700 series can use a battery as a power source An Anton Bauer s battery pack can be used in the U3700 series The DIONIC 90 compact lithium ion battery pack is recommended The DIONIC 90 battery pack specifications Capacity 90 WH Nominal Output voltage 14 4 V Weight Approx 0 7 kg Dimensions 133 x 89 x 54mm For more information refer to the battery pack operation manual INFORMATION Runtime hours U3741 3 hours U3751 2 5 hours U3771 72 2 hours NOTE The battery life varies depending on the usage situation If using a battery stored over the long term check the runtime in advance Battery Mount System The QR Gold Mount System which is included in professional video cameras worldwide is inc
295. ound Grid Values ON OFF v AUTO MNL Min ATT Attenuation 0 dB 10 dB div 5 dB div 2 dB div 1 dB div 0 5 dB div dBm dBmV dBuV dBuVemf dBpW Watts L Volts Insert Delete Init Table EXT CFG Extended Configuration options 1 L Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Gated Sweep Measuring Window Limit Lines Ref Disp Lines Zoom and Contexts a U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List Source gt Free Run Ext Trigger Level Video Level External Slope NEG POS IF Delay B Gated Sweep ON OFF Source gt External Slope NEG POS IF Gate Delay Gate Width Window HIDE SHOW Window Position Window Width Window Sweep ON OFF Pass Fail ON OFF Line 1 ON OFF Line 1 ABV BLW Line 2 ON OFF Line 2 ABV BLW Pass Fail Config X ABS CF FA B Limit Line Edit Shift X ON OFF Y ABS REF DL Shift Y ON OFF Display Line ON OFF i Limit Line 1 2 Display Line ON OFF Delete Entry Reference Line ON OFF Insert Entry i Table Init 25 U3700 Series User s Guide A 5 Menu Map List EXT CFG Extended Configuration options 1 a Graphic Z 1 Screen Graphic Zoom 1 ON OFF Graphic Z 2 Screens Window Position Freq Zoom 2 Window Width Freq vs Time gt Graphic Zoom 2 ON OFF Window Position Reset Context Window Width Context A B gt Frequency Zoom ON OFF Time vs
296. ower AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe ACPower AVERage STATe ON OFF Set ACP Carrier Band Width SENSe ACPower BANDwidth B WIDth INTegration 21 1 SENSe ACPower BANDwidth BWIDth IN Tegration Frequency Frequency Enable ACP Channel Window Dis play SENSe ACPower BSWIndow 1 1 SENSe ACPower BSWIndow FULL CARRier FULL CARR Restore Previous Settings for ACP SENSe ACPower DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for ACP SENSe ACPower DATA SAVE Set Root Nyquist Filter Roll off Factor ACP 6 96 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC ALPHA 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC Number Number Function description Set Root Nyquist Filter Symbol Rate ACP SCPI command SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC 5 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC SRATe Parameter Frequency U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Frequency Enable Root Nyquist Filter SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe 1 1 SENSe ACPower FILTer RRC STATe ON OFF Enable ACP Graph Display SENSe ACPower GRAPh 1 1 SENSe ACPower GRAPh ON OFF Insert New Channel in ACP Chan nel Table SENSe ACPower OFFSet DATA 1 Channel Spacing Frequency Channel Width Frequency Delete ACP Channel Table SENSe ACPower OFFSet DATA DELete Select ACP Trace
297. pace on media XML files cannot be saved on the analyzer memory Please select another media Cannot create file Format media failed No printer detected No driver available for this printer The last power measure mode has been turned off The selected button already exist The user menu is full Incorrect password Quit spurious results before Quit table edition before Cannot format flash memory The tracking generator option is required No DHCP server found Please ensure ethernet cable is connected and ver ify DHCP server configuration NO PEAK FOUND NO MIN PEAK FOUND NO PEAK FOUND IM NO PEAK FOUND Z Z 2 Z Parameter out of range Nyquist data must be changed Z Integration bandwidth out of range Z Parameter out of range Z Parameter out of range the SPAN must be reduced Z The Channel table is empty Z ACP parameter out of range Z Q Parameter out of range Please set the span to a value greater than 1 B 1 T Z Q Parameter out of range Please change span Z Parameter out of range 9 7 9 8 U3700 Series User s Guide 9 7 List of Error Messages 7 83 WARNING Frequency Reference Unlocked CAUTION An error may be displayed because of a hardware failure In this case contact Advant
298. point key 15 Backspace key Enters the minus sign and corrects entered data 16 Unit key Selects a unit and determines the entered value GHz Sets a unit of GHz dBm or dB MHz Sets a unit of MHz dBm sec V or W kHz Sets a unit of kHz mV msec or mW Hz Sets a unit of Hz usec CH uV uW Can also be used as the ENTER key 17 Step key Enters data at each step 18 Data knob Fine tunes the entered data 19 START STOP key Starts or stops the sweep 4 6 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen This section describes the names and functions of each part on the screen of this instrument 25 24 23 22 4 20 18 19 N 1 Ref EXT 75 501 pts Tuesday 3 Oct 2006 15 01 Frequency 17 REF 10 00 dBm DL 55 00 dBm MKR 2 000 GHz 1 2 10 0 dBi 123 22 dBm 16 10 G T Gs L 3 CENTER 4 _ 2 000 GHz 20 f Frequency Offset ON OFF 5 CF Step Size AUTO MNL 6 Channel Input 5 uw 2 CENTER 2 000 GHz SLIDE 3 5 SPAN 1 000 GHz 6 VBW 100 Hz HiS ATT 10 00 dB 7 Title 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Figure 4 6 Screen Display 1 Reference level Displays the reference level setting value 2 Amplitude scale in log mode or linear mode Displays the amplitude scale setting in log mode 3 Active function Displays the function enabled by the keypad or data knob 4 Level sca
299. quency absolute power Amplitude power relative to the carrier Relative amplitude test result Pass Fail Result Fetch Spectrum Emission Mask Reference 1 FETch SEMask RPO Wer Amplitude Power Fetch All Spurious Results 1 2 3 4 Spurious band number of rows FETch SPURious BAND 1 2 index spurious frequency Frequency spurious level Amplitude test Pass Fail Result Fetch Total Power 1 FETch TOTPower Amplitude Fetch Power Spectral Density for Total 1 FETch TOTPower DENSity Power Herz Power Measurement 6 10 3 7 Subsystem FORMat Set File Format FORMat FILE 91 BINary XML 1 FORMat FILE Set Trace Buffer Transfer Format FORMat TRACe DATA 1 ASCii BINary 1 FORMat TRACe DATA 6 10 3 8 Subsystem HCOPy Set Hard Copy Device HCOPy DEVice TYPE 1 PRINter USB PRIN USB 1 HCOPy DEVice TYPE Copy to the Selected Device HCOPy IMMediate 6 90 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 9 Function description Set Sweep Mode Subsystem INITiate SCPI command INITiate CONTinuous 1 1 INITiate CONTinuous Parameter Query reply 6 10 3 List of Commands Remarks Abort and Restart Sweep INITiate RES Tart Start Sweeping Until Measurement End INITiate SMEAsure Execute Sweep to the End 6 10 3 10 INITiate TS Subsystem INPut Set Input RF Connector 6 10 3
300. r level Rdbuff Space 25 Allocates the buffer memory Call ibrd spa Rdbuff Receives the output pkl LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter Call ibwrt spa NXP Searches for the next peak Call ibwrt spa ML Rdbuff Space 25 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff pk2 LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter Call ibwrt spa NXP Call ibwrt spa ML Rdbuff Space 25 Call ibrd spa Rdbuff pk3 LeftB Rdbuff InStrB 1 Rdbuff Chr 13 1 1 Reads the data between the starting point and the delimiter RichTextBoxl Text 1st amp pkl vbCrLf amp 2nd PK amp pk2 amp vbCrLf 6 3rd PK amp pk3 amp vbCrLf Displays the data on the screen An example display 150 8 553906250000 01 2nd PK 7 004687500000 01 3rd 8 655468750000 01 6 61 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 9 1 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 9 1 4 6 62 Sample Programs for Inputting or Outputting Trace Data Trace data on the screen includes data for 501 or 1001 points on the frequency axis For inputting and out putting data it is necessary to transfer data for 501 or 1001 points from the left side start frequency in order Each point level is expressed by an integer from 1792 to 14592 however if the trace exceeds the upp
301. r pro gramming in this instrument Both command sets cannot be used together Press SYSTEM Remote Control and Parser AT SCPI 6 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 2 GPIB Remote Control System 6 2 6 2 1 6 2 GPIB Remote Control System The GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus that is compliant with IEEE standards 488 1 1978 and 488 2 1987 comes standard with this instrument so that remote control can be performed from the external control ler The following describes how to control this instrument by using the GPIB remote control function What is the GPIB The GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus is a high performance bus that integrates computers and mea suring instruments The GPIB operations are defined by IEEE standard 488 1 1978 Since the GPIB is a bus structure inter face the specific device can be identified by assigning a unique device address to each device Up to 15 devices can be connected to a bus in parallel A GPIB device includes at least one of the following func tions Talker A device that is specified to send data to the bus is called a talker Only one device operates as active talker on a GPIB bus Listener A device that is specified to receive data from the bus is called a listener Two or more active lis tener devices exist on a GPIB bus Controller A device that specifies talkers and listeners is called a controller On a GPIB bus only one device opera
302. red data becomes invalid Example Set the reference level to 20 dBm by using the keypad Press 2 0 GHz dBM or 2 0 MHz dBM 4 10 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry Data entry by using the step key The step key enters data in the defined step size Pressing W decreases data and pressing increase data Example Set the reference level to 0 0 dBm by using the step key Press the step key A The reference level is set to 10 0 dBm Press the step key A again to set to 0 0 dBm Data entry by using the data knob The data knob enters data in the determined display resolution The data knob is available for the fine adjustment of the entry data Example Set the reference level to 0 5 dBm by using the data knob Rotating the data knob in the clockwise direction increases the reference level in steps of 0 1 dBm Rotate the data knob until the display of the active func tion display area shows 0 5 dBm Rotating the data knob in the counterclockwise direction decreases the refer ence level in steps of 0 1 dBm ACTIVE OFF Pressing the CLEAR key hides the active function display area Data cannot be entered if the active function display area is hidden To redisplay the active function display area press a panel key or soft key Menu layer Certain soft menus have W at the right end and the sub menu is displayed by pressing the soft key Certain soft menus such as ON OFF or AUTO MNL s
303. ries User s Guide 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator 7 5 8 Option 76 Tracking Generator Description Specifications Frequency range 100 kHz to 3 GHz Frequency offset Range Resolution Accuracy 0 to 1 GHz 1 kHz 300 Hz Output level range 0 to 60 dBm 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy 0 5 dB 20 MHz 10 dBm 20 C to 30 C Output level flatness Reference signal level 10 dBm Frequency 20 MHz 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 1 5 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz Output level switching uncertainty Reference level 10 dBm 1 0 dB 1 MHz to 1 GHz 0to 60 dBm 2 0 dB 1 MHz to 2 6 GHz 0 to 60 dBm 3 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 0 to 30 dBm Frequency Offset OFF 4 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 30 5 to 60 dBm Frequency Offset OFF 5 0 dB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 0 to 60 dBm Frequency Offset ON Spurious output Harmonics Non harmonics Output level 10 dBm 100 kHz to 1 MHz 1 MHz to 3 GHz Frequency Offset OFF TG leakage Input attenuator 0 dB Output impedance VSWR Output level lt 10 dBm Maximum allowable input 7 22 10 dBm 10 V U3700 Series User s Guide 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator 7 5 9 Option 77 6 GHz Tracking Generator Frequency range 100 kHz to 6 GHz Output level range 0 to 30 dBm 0 5 dB step Output level accuracy lt 0 5dB 20MHz 10 dBm 20 C to 30 C Output level flatness 10 dBm 20 C to 30 C based on 20
304. rmat PNG BMP 2 File name COPYxxx BMP PNG is used as the file name File number xxx is specified by Auto Inc Index and automatically increments by 1 each time a file is saved when Auto Inc is set to ON The file name COPY BMP PNG is fixed when Auto Inc is set to OFF 3 Output Images on the screen can be saved to the USB memory device by pressing the COPY key 4 28 Table 4 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 5 Hard Copy Output 4 Time Stamp A time stamp date and time which uses the same format as the computer is included in a file The order in which files are saved can be checked by using this time stamp The date and time can be checked and set by panel operations or GPIB com mands Examples of GPIB commands Command to check the date and time Date SETDATE Time SETTIME Command to set the date and time Date SETDATE yy mm dd Time SETTIME hh mm ss Example Set the date to January 1 2005 SETDATE 050101 Set the time to 10 10 SETTIME 101000 USB Memory Devices Whose Operation with this Instrument has Already Checked Manufacturer Model name BUFFALO RUF C128ML U2 RUF2 M128 256 1G RUF2 E2GL BL HAGIWARA HUD 128PJ IO DATA EasyDisk EDP 128 TB B128 TB ST2G K LEXAR JumpDrive 128 SanDisk CruzerMini 128MB SDCZ4 128 J65 SDCZ23 002G J65N ADTEC AD UMX128MSB GREEN HOUSE GH UFD128PLZ ELECOM MF PU2128SV MF AU202GSV Princeton PFU
305. ry of the standard operation status register The summary bit of the entire status data structure RQS is set to TRUE when MSS is set to 1 in the status byte regis ter MSS cannot be read during serial polling but it is 1 when RQS is 1 To read the MSS use the common command STB MSS bit0 to bit5 and bit7 of the status byte register are read by STB In this case the status byte register and MSS are not cleared MSS 15 not set to 0 until all the unmasked factors in the status register structure are cleared A summary of the standard event register The summary bit of the output buffer Not uses in this instrument Always 0 Set to 1 if a signal level error occurs because the sweep is too fast 6 17 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 5 3 Status Byte 5 Standard Event Register Assignments in the standard event register are listed below Functional 2 Description definition Power Set to 1 when the power is turned on Always 0 Command Error Set to 1 if the parser detects a syntax error Execution Error Set to 1 if an instruction that was received as a GPIB command fails to execute for some reason e g the parameter is out of range Device Dependent Set to 1 if any errors except for Command Error Exe Error cution Error and Query Error occur Query Error Set to 1 if no data exists or if data is lost when the controller tries to read data from this instrume
306. s RF input Connector Impedance VSWR Type N f on the front panel 500 nom Input attenuator gt 10 dB lt 1 51 Calibration signal output Connector Impedance Frequency Level BNC f on the front panel 500 nom 20 MHz 20 dBm External trigger input Connector Impedance Trigger level BNC f on the rear panel 10 nom coupling 0Vto5V Frequency reference input Connector Impedance Frequency MHz Level BNC f on the rear panel 50 O nom 1 1 544 2 048 5 10 12 8 13 13 824 14 4 15 36 15 4 16 8 19 2 19 44 19 6608 19 68 19 8 20 26 0 dBm to 16 dBm 21 4 MHz IF output Connector Impedance Output level BNC f on the rear panel 50 nom Approximately mixer input level 10 dB at 20 MHz center fre quency Battery mount Connector Antonbauer QR mount External DC input Connector Voltage range XLR 4 11 Vto17V GPIB IEEE 488 bus connector USB A USBI 1 on the front and rear panels LAN RJ45 on the rear panel 10 100Base T Protocol TCP IP Video out VGA 15pin f on the rear panel Sound out Small monophonic jack U3700 Series User s Guide 7 2 U3751 Performance Specifications 7 2 03751 Performance Specifications 7 2 1 Frequency Description Specifications Frequency range Frequency band Built in preamp 9 kHz to 8 GHz 9 kHz to 3 1 GHz 3 0 GHz to 8 GHz 10 MHz to 8 GHz
307. s electric components Connectors Beryllium and Beryllium compounds WBL FUS COXCBL WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F WBL FUS HONTAI E WHB THK700 BEG 032413 BPG 033493 BPG 034495 Electric components Switches connectors U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Substance Component Location Parts and material Arsenic and Arsenic compounds WBL FUS FRONT E Module Inverter electronic com WHB THK700 ponents GaAs BEG 032413 BEG 036043 Lead and Lead compounds WBL FUSZFRONT E Electronic components mounted on WBL FUSZCOXCBL the printed circuit board and lead WBL FUS OPT20 solder used for mounting WBL FUS FRONT E WBL FUS HONTAI E BEB 032400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPC 032551 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 A199001 Accessory Vinyl chloride PVC WBL FUS COXCBL PVC material resin parts WBL FUS OPT20 WBL FUS FRONT E 9 12 U3700 Series User s Guide APPENDIX Initial Setting List This section describes the default preset parameter setting list APPENDIX Values are set for the input of the U3751 U3771 U3772 Values in parenthesis are set for the U3741 Function FREQUENCY Parameter Center Freq setting Initial set value 4 GHz 1 5 GHz Start Freq setting 0 Hz Stop Freq setting 8 GHz 3 GHz Freq
308. s diodes transistors semiconductor packages Asbestos waste and components which contain asbestos Not used Cathode ray tubes Not used Chlorofluorocarbons CFC Hydro chlorofluorocarbons HCFC Hydrof luorocarbons HFC or Hydrocarbons HC Not used Gas discharge lamps 9 10 LCD monitor Fluorescent tube Substance Component Liquid crystal displays of a surface greater than 100 square centimeters and all those back lighted with gas discharge lamps Location LCD monitor U3700 Series User s Guide 9 9 Product Disposal and Recycle Parts and material Liquid crystal displays External electric cables WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F Power cable WBL U3751 F WBL U377X F Signal cable Components containing refractory ceramic fibers Not used Components containing radioactive substances Not used Electrolyte capacitors containing sub stances of concern height gt 25 mm diameter gt 25 mm or proportionately similar volume Not used Cadmium and Cadmium compounds BPC 032551 Variable resistor electric contact Antimony and Antimony compounds WBL FUS FRONT E BEB 032400 BEG 032413 BEG 032415 BPG 032410 BPG 032411 BPG 032412 BPB 032890 BPC 032551 BPG 032405 BPG 032409 BPG 033493 BPG 034304 BPG 034495 BPG 034498 BEG 036043 199001 Accessory Electronic components Semicon ductors capacitors inductors resis tor
309. s 50 This setting is the standard value that is 50 75 Converts power assuming that the input impedance is 75 The 6 dB conversion loss of the ZT 130NC 75 50 Q impedance converter is added automatically NOTE For OPTIS 75 Qoption Input Impedance is fixed at 75 2 This impedance cannot be changed to 50 2 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 15 AMPLITUDE High Sensitivity ON OFF Correction Factor ON OFF Edit Corr Factor Insert Delete Init Table Round Grid Values ON OFF Switches the high sensitivity input function ON and OFF ON Turns on the built in preamp The preamp gain is corrected at each frequency and it does not need to be considered in level measurements OFF Turns off the built in preamp ON Corrects the display level according to the correction table OFF Cancels the correction based on the correction data Displays the Corr Factor menu and the correction table A frequency of up to 400 GHz and a level of 100 dB can be set Inserts a line in the correction table Deletes a line on which the cursor is positioned in the correction table Clears all settings in the correction table ON Displays the vertical scale by rounding off the Ref Level setting value to integers OFF Displays the vertical scale according to the Ref Level setting value U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 16 EXT CFG L Sweep Mode SGL CNT Trigger Gated Sweep Measuring Window
310. s a normal marker to the left of and X dB lower than the current position Displays a normal marker to the right of and X dB lower than the current position Activates the X dB Level setting U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 7 MEAS 2 Display REL ABL ABR More 1 2 Continuous Down ON OFF Peak X dB Down Intermod Execute ON OFF Average Control Average START STOP Max Sweep Count Sets the display method of the X dB Down marker data REL Sets the marker to the delta marker mode when X dB Down is executed Displays a normal marker on the right and a delta marker on the left ABL Displays the left marker an absolute value ABR Displays the right marker as an absolute value Displays the XdB 2 2 menu Switches the continuous X dB down function ON and OFF ON Repeats Peak X dB down in every sweep OFF Cancels the continuous X dB down function Performs the peak search in the search range and then executes X dB Down Displays the Intermod menu ON Performs the intermodulation measurement OFF Terminates the intermodulation measurement START Performs averaging STOP Cancels averaging Sets the number of times Video averaging is performed Up to 999 counts can be set Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE On Trace A B C Max Order PAUSE Pauses averaging and displays the current number of times averaging has been performed CONT Restarts averaging from the point at which averag
311. s available in the GPIB remote control system are specific to the GPIB bus such as service requests and cannot be used in the LAN remote control system 6 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 4 Message Exchanging Protocol 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 10 Message Exchanging Protocol This instrument receives program messages from the controller or other devices through the GPIB bus or LAN and generates a response Program messages include commands queries which are commands that ask for a response and data Buffers This instrument has two buffers 1 Input buffer This buffer temporarily stores data to analyze commands 1024 byte length The input buffer can be cleared by the following two methods Turning the power on Executing a DCL or SDC 2 Output buffer This buffer stores data until the data is read by the controller 1024 byte length The output buffer can be cleared by the following two methods Turning the power on Executing a DCL or SDC Message Exchange When other controllers or devices receive messages from this instrument the following items must be observed Generating a response in reply to a query Refer to Generating responses in the order queries are executed Refer to Generating response data Parser The parser receives command messages from the input buffer in the order queries are received exe cutes syntax analysis and determines what operations ar
312. sic Operation 4 10 Amplitude Accuracy 7 4 7 8 Basic Steps for GPIB Bus Control 6 54 7 12 B DLOB 5 43 5 46 Annotations ON OFF 5 7 5 9 Black and White 5 8 5 12 D 5 17 5 43 5 44 Arrangement of the three status registers 6 14 Buffers 6 10 AT Command Index 6 19 AT Command List 6 24 AMT creen eret 5 62 C ATT ssa 5 62 Cabinet Cleaning 9 1 Attenuation 0 5 62 Cale RR 5 43 5 44 LU PORE 5 72 5 73 Calibrate ALL 5 7 5 11 Auto Inc Index 2222222 5 8 5 13 Calibration 22 4 13 5 7 Auto Inc ON OFF ses 5 8 5 13 5 11 6 46 Auto name Index a 5 18 5 20 Calibration Corrections ON OFF 5 7 5 11 Auto Tune 5 61 Calibration F Int Ref sse 5 7 5 11 Auto name Radix 5 18 5 20 Capture Normz Data ees 5 55 AVerage 5 43 5 44 Carrier Bandwidth 5 26 5 31 5 45 5 32 Average Control 5 25 5 26 27 1 1 U3700 Series User s Guide Alphabetical Index Caution when Connecting Peripherals Center CH ON
313. splayed in the active function display area and the Level menu is displayed Press 1 0 and GHz dBm The reference level is set to 10 dBm Level REF 10 00 dBm 1 10 0 _ 710 00 dBm Ref Level a 10 0 dBi 4 vertical Scale LIN LOG Units 6 110 CENTER 30 00 MHz SPAN 40 00 MHz RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 13 Completing the Setting of the measurement conditions 4 19 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 3 2 Displaying Spectrum and Operating Markers 4 20 Displaying a marker on the peak 13 Press PEAK The marker is displayed on the peak and the frequency approximately 20 MHz and level approximately 20 dBm of the marker are displayed in the marker area REF 10 00 dBm MKR 20 00 MHz 10 0 dB 20 00 dBm 7 MARKER 20 00 MHz Next Peak Right Next Peak Left 110 CENTER 30 00 MHz SPAN 40 00 MHz RBW 300 kHz VBW 300 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB Figure 4 14 Displaying the Peak Search Displaying a delta marker 14 15 Press MKR The Marker menu used for the marker function is displayed Press 4 Delta Mode Press 7 Delta ON OFF The delta marker is displayed and the frequency difference and level difference between the marker and delta marker are displayed in the marker area MKA 0 Hz 0 00 dB Press 2 0 and MHz The active marker is displayed on the second harmonics which is 20 MHz away from the CAL sign
314. strument specified as a talker in this mode it sends status bytes instead of ordinary mes sages This mode continues until this instrument receives a serial polling disable SPD message or an IFC message When this instrument is sending a service request SRQ message to the controller bit6 RQS bit of response data is set to 1 TRUE After transmission is completed RQS bit is set to 0 FALSE Ser vice request SRQ messages are directly sent through a signal line Device clear DCL When receiving DCL this instrument performs the following operations Clearing the input and output buffers Resetting the syntax analysis execution control and response data generation units Canceling all the commands that impede the remote command to be executed next Canceling any commands that are waiting for other parameters The following operations are not executed Changing data that is set or stored in this instrument Interrupting front panel operations Affecting or interrupting the operations of this instrument in mid execution Changing status byte excluding MAV MAV is set to 0 as a result of clearing the output buffer Selected device clear SDC Performs the same operation as DCL However SDC is executed only when this instrument is a lis tener In other cases it is ignored Go to local GTL This message sets this instrument to the local state In the local state all front panel operations are enabled
315. system TRACe Function description Copy Traces SCPI command TRACe COPY 1 2 Parameter TRACE TRACE2 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACE3 Query reply Remarks Set Trace Buffer TRACe DATA 1 02 1 TRACe DATA 21 Binary block Integer Binary Block Integer Disable Trace Math Operations TRACe MATH NORMal Order Peak in Position or Amplitude Order TRACe MATH PEAK SORT 1 FREQuency AMPLitude Subtract Traces TRACe MATH SUBTract 1 2 23 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACE3 Subtract Display Line To Trace 6 104 TRACe MATH SUBTract DLINe 1 TRACEI TRACE2 TRACE3 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands 6 10 3 18 Subsystem TRIGger Function description SCPI command Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Trigger Delay TRIGger 1 SEQuence DELay 22 Context index Time 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence DELay Time Set External Trigger Level V TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal Context index Amplitude LEVel 22 Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal LEVel Set External Trigger Slope TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal 1 Context index NEG POS SLOPe 22 NEGative 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence EXTernal 1 POSitive SLOPe Set IF Trigger Level TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF LEVel 22 Context index Amplitude 1 TRIGger 1 SEQuence IF LEVel
316. system controller function 6 2 3 2 6 4 Using the open collector bus driver Responses to Interface Messages The responses of this instrument to interface messages described in this section are defined in IEEE stan dards 488 1 1978 and 488 2 1987 For more information on how to send interface messages to this instrument refer to the operation manual of the controller used 1 Interface clear IFC This message is directly sent to this instrument through a signal line This instrument stops the operation of the GPIB bus by using this message Though all input output is stopped the I O buffer is not cleared it is cleared by DCL Remote enable REN This message is directly sent to this instrument through a signal line If this instrument is specified as a listener when this message is TRUE it enters the remote state This instrument remains in this state until it receives a GTL command REN changes to FALSE or the LOCAL key is pressed This instrument ignores all received data when it is in the local state U3700 Series User s Guide 6 2 3 GPIB Bus Functions When it is in the remote state this instrument ignores all key entry except the LOCAL key When it is in the local lockout state referred to as Local lockout this instrument ignores all key entry Serial poll enable SPE When receiving this message from a controller this instrument enters the serial polling mode When this in
317. t New Correction Factor Ver tex SENSe CORRection CSET DATA 1 X coordinate of table point Frequency ordinate of table point Relative amplitude Delete Correction Factor Table SENSe CORRection CSET DELete Enable User Correction Factor SENSe CORRection CSET STATe 1 1 SENSe CORRection CSET STATe ON OFF Set Input Impedance 6 98 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude 1 1 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude Input impedance Input impedance Function description Define Channel Formula Parame ters SCPI command SENSe FREQuency CHANnel FORMula 2 03700 Series User s Guide Parameter Integer Minimum Channel Channel number Maximum Channel Channel number Origin Frequency Frequency Channel Spacing Frequency Channel Offset Channel number 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Select Channel Setting Mode SENSe FREQuency CHANnel MODE 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel MODE CALCulate TABLe CALC TABL Set Start Channel Frequency Offset SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STARt Frequency Frequency Set Stop Channel Frequency Offset SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP 1 1 SENSe FREQuency CHANnel OFFSet STOP Frequency Frequency Insert New Channel Into Channel Table SENSe FREQ
318. ta Even if the Write mode is set the setting is changed to the View mode while the trace data is recalled 5 21 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Trace Context B A B Limit Lines Saves the Limit Line table Channel Saves the Channel Formula table and Channel Table ACP Saves CS BS Table for the ACP SEM Saves SEM Table Spurious 1 2 3 Saves the Spurious Bands table Corr Factor Saves Correction Factor Table Normalize Context A B C Saves Normz Data that uses Title Displays the Edit Title dialog box Edit Title aaa How to enter Pressing a key cycles through a list of characters which are allocated to that key and displays them at the cursor position If the key is not pressed for a few sec onds after the previous key entry or another key is pressed the displayed charac ter is entered Table 5 1 Character allocation table Allocated Characters 0 space i _ lt gt Back Space 1 abc2 def3 ghi4 1 15 mno6 pqrs7 tuv8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 wxyz9 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE To enter a capital letter hold down the SHIFT key and a key 1 Enter a character by using the keypad 2 Press a unit key such as the Hz key to finish entering the title 3 Press Title to close the Edit Title dialog box Media Displays the Media dialog box Selects either the internal memory or an external U
319. ta Mode Reference MKROJB MARKJRLIN DLIN MKROBJ MARKJ RLIN LLINU LLINL DLIN LLINU LLINL Marker Step Size MPM Frequency Time MPM Frequency Time Marker Step Auto ON OFF MPA 0 OFF 1 ON Signal Track SG ON OFF SG 0 OFF 1 ON Signal Track Y Range SGY ON Level SGY Level ON SGYON 0 OFF SGY OFF 1 ON Active Marker Trace MKTRACE TRA TRB TRC MKTRACE 0 1 2 TRC Marker Mode MKMODE INDEX VAL MKMODE 0 INDEX 1 VAL Display Marker List MKLST MKLST 0 OFF 1 ON Get Marker List MLSFL Num Marker Active 1 ON 0 OFF Frequency Time Level 6 35 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 10 Peak and Marker Move 6 8 10 Function CF Peak and Marker Move Command EXE SET Query GET Code Argument Format MKRA gt REF MR MKRL PEAK CF PKCF PEAK REF PKRL MKRA SPAN DS MTSP Step MO MKCS MKRA CF Step MI MTCS Step M2 MKMKS MKRA Step 6 36 M3 MTMKS Output Format U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 11 Peak Function Peak Search Command EXE SET 6 8 11 Peak Query GET Code Argument Format Code Output Format Next Peak Next Peak Left Next Peak Right Min Search Next Mi
320. tection mode between the auto and manual set tings AUTO Automatically sets the optimum detection mode for measurement based on the trace mode MNL Sets the detection mode manually RMS Selects RMS power average Video Selects Video Trace average Displays the Math menu Displays the Subtract menu The selected setting is displayed at the bottom of the menu Does not perform the trace calculation When trace A is set to the Write mode the data in memory B is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory A When trace A is set to the Write mode the data acquired in the sweep is subtracted from the data in memory B and the result is entered into memory A When trace B is set to the Write mode the data in memory A is subtracted from the data acquired in the sweep and the result is entered into memory B U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 8 TRACE Display Line ON OFF More 1 2 OFF gt B A gt C A DL gt A B DL B Display Line ON OFF Store gt gt TRC gt C Trace A B C Trace A B C Trace A B C When trace A is set to the Write mode the data acquired in the sweep is subtracted from the data in memory A and the result is entered into memory B ON Displays and activates the display line OFF Cancels the display line Displays the Subtract 2 2 menu Does not perform the trace calculation When trace A is set to
321. tes as an active controller Of these controllers a device that can control IFC and REN messages is called the system controller Only one system controller is permitted on a GPIB bus If there are two or more controllers on a bus the system controller becomes the active controller at the time of system startup and the other devices with controller capability act as addressable devices To set another controller as the active controller use Take Control TCT interface messages At this time this controller becomes a non active controller The controller controls the entire system by sending interface or device messages to each measuring instrument The roles of these messages are shown below Interface message Controls the GPIB bus Device message Controls the measuring instruments U3700 Series User s Guide 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB 6 2 2 Setting up the GPIB 1 GPIB connection The standard GPIB connection is shown below Secure the GPIB connector with two screws GPIB Connectors Figure 6 1 GPIB Connection Note the following when using the GPIB interface Connect the GPIB cable to the GP IB 1 connector on the rear panel of this instrument The total cable length of the GPIB cable used in one bus system should not be longer than 2 m x the number of connected devices the GPIB controller is counted as one device The total cable length should be 20 m or less Up to 15 devices can be connected to o
322. the lower frequency signal 0 Pass 1 Fail 1 Judgment off ULn Level difference in the upper frequency signal UJn Pass Fail judgment in the upper frequency signal lt DLM gt Delimiter 2 n Result set number Freqn Harmonic frequency Leveln Harmonic level DeltaLeveln Harmonic level difference with fundamental frequency lt DLM gt Delimiter 0 OFF 1 ON 6 39 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 12 Measurement Function AM Modulation Measure ment Command EXE SET Query GET Code AMMOD Argument Format ON OFF Code AMMODON Output Format 0 1 ON AM Modulation Depth AMMOD Real AM Modulation Frequency FM Measurement FMMEAS ON OFF FMMEASON 0 1 ON FM Frequency Deviation FMMEAS Frequency Modulation Frequency to Sweep time FMMODF ON 73 Frequency FMMODF Frequency 4 Frequency FMMODFY Frequency FMMODF ON OFF FMMODFON 0 1 ON Sound Mode ON ON AM FM 0 OFF 1 ON AM 2 ON FM Sound Volume Integer Integer Demodulation Time 43 tion value 4 6 40 Time Time Sets the Modulation Frequency to Sweep Time mode to ON and then sets an FM frequency devia Sets an FM frequency deviation value without setting the Modulation Frequency to Sw
323. this instrument from the operations and simple examples CHAPTER 5 MENU MAP FUNCTIONAL EXPLANATION This chapter describes the menu structure and functions of soft keys CHAPTER 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CON TROL This chapter describes how to connect and set the GPIB and LAN interfaces and also describes the program exam ples used when programming and table of commands CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the specifications of this instrument CHAPTER 8 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES This chapter describes options and accessories which are sold separately CHAPTER 9 MAINTENANCE This chapter describes how to care for this instrument such as cleaning calibration and storage to maintain the high performance and smooth functioning of this instrument Also this chapter describes how to identify problems and the relevant procedures to follow APPENDIX This chapter describes the following information Initial Setting List e Principles of measurement Technical terms used in this manual Menu Map List 1 1 U3700 Series User s Guide 1 2 Product Overview 1 2 1 3 1 2 Product Overview The U3700 series spectrum analyzers are compact lightweight and portable The U3700 series spectrum analyzers are ideal for use in the field because they operate on battery and can be used anywhere The main features of this instrument are as follows Wide frequency measur
324. tic Interference vate bananas 2 1 2 4 Note when Turning on the Power n 2 1 3 DEED 3 1 3 1 Inspection on Delivery 3 1 3 2 Locating This Instrument 3 3 3 2 1 Operatine Environment e i Dri cea E Vae aqussaqhas chisqa 3 3 3 3 Power SUEY 3 4 3 3 1 Using the AC PowerS pply 3 4 3 3 1 1 AG Power ReguIrementsS 3 4 3 3 1 2 Connecting the Power Cable a 3 5 3 3 2 Using Battery 3 6 3 3 2 1 Battery Mount A 3 6 3 3 2 2 Charsins the B ttery 3 7 3 3 3 Using the External DC Power Supply 3 8 3 3 3 1 DC Power Requirements 3 8 3 3 3 2 Connecting the DC Power Cable 3 8 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals a 3 9 3 5 Ch ckine 3 10 4 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION AND BASIC OPERATIONS 4 1 4 1 Panel and Screen Descriptions 4 1 4 1 1 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Front Panel 4 4 1 2 Names and Functions of Each Part on the Screen 4 7 4 1 3 Names and Functions of Each Part on
325. tion Code Argument Format Output Format RBW Frequency RB Frequency RBW Auto ON OFF BA 0 OFF 1 ON VBW Frequency VB Frequency VBW Auto VA ON OFF VA 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Couple All Auto AL ON OFF AL 0 OFF 1 ON all auto RBW Span CORS Ratio float CORS Ratio float CORS ON RSON 0 OFF CORS OFF CURSE ec COVR Ratio float COVR Ratio float COVR ON RON OFF COVR OFF PERDRE 1 ON PLL Band Width PLLBW AUTO MIDINARW PLLBW 0 Auto 1 Narrow 2 Medium 6 27 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 8 4 Sweep 6 8 4 Sweep Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Sweep Time SWIST Time SW ST Time Sweep Auto AS ON OFF AS 0 OFF manual 1 ON auto Sweep Mode SWM 0 Single 1 Normal Sweep Mode Normal SN CONTS Sweep Single SIISNGLS Sweep TS Sweep Start Stop SR Gated Sweep Mode GTSWP GTSWP 0 OFF 1 ON Gate Source GTSRC GTSRC 2 EXT 3 IF Gate Slope GTSLP FALL NEG GTSLP 0 RISE POS RISE POS 1 FALL NEG Gate Delay GTPOS Time GTPOS Time Gate Width GTWID Time GTWID Time 6 8 5 Trigger Command EXE SET Query GET Function Code Argument Format Code Output Format Trigger Mode TRGSRC F
326. to 17 V Power consumption 70 W or less 3 3 3 2 Connecting the DC Power Cable 1 Remove the AC power cable and detach the battery 2 Connect an A114020 Sold separately external DC power cable to the DC power supply input con nector on the rear panel CAUTION Do not reverse the polarity of the DC power supply 3 remove the DC power cable turn off the power supply of this instrument and remove the external DC power cable while pushing the button on the cable connector WS NL DC power supply input connector XLR 4 pins Connector pin location Pin number 1 GND Pin number 2 N C Pin number 3 N C Pin number 4 terminal 3 8 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals 3 4 Caution when Connecting Peripherals Use shielded cables when connecting peripherals to the USB and LAN connectors on this instrument Attach the included ferrite core ESD SR 120 to the cable Figure 3 3 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 1 When connecting an earphone to the PHONE connector attach the included ferrite core E04SR150718 to the earphone cable Figure 3 4 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 2 3 9 U3700 Series User s Guide 3 5 Checking Operations 3 5 Checking Operations This section describes how to check operations by using the calibration function of this instrument Check that this instrument
327. ts the start frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF Sets the frequency input mode Sets the stop frequency input mode to the channel ON Sets the channel code input mode OFF Sets the frequency input mode Switches the start frequency offset function ON and OFF when the channel input mode is set ON Sets the offset value Start frequency Carrier frequency Start channel start offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Switches the stop frequency offset function ON and OFF when the channel input mode is set ON Sets the offset value Stop frequency Carrier frequency Stop channel stop offset frequency OFF Cancels the offset function Displays the Channels Config menu U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 13 FREQUENCY Edit Channel Formula Displays the dialog box in which the mathematical formula to acquire the channel set frequency is defined The set frequency is as follows Carrier frequency Origin CH spacing CH No CH offset Edit Channel Formula CHCalc1 CHCalc2 CHCalc3 CH Min lt n lt CH Max TE Carrier Freq Origin Freq CH Spacing n CH Offset req spacing onset og S Edit Channel Table Displays the dialog box used to set the channel table Channel Table No Channel Number Carrier Frequency 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Insert Line Inserts a
328. u OPT 70 Sets the band pass filter width in the PLL circuit Sets the filter width automatically so that the optimum phase noise characteristics corresponding to the frequency span can be obtained Sets the filter width to Medium Sets the filter width to Narrow The phase noise around 300 kHz to 2 MHz away from the carrier is improved CAUTION When PLL Band Width is set to Medium or Narrow the phase noise may deteriorate depending on the set frequency span In such a case set to AUTO U3700 Series User s Guide 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL OVERVIEW OF REMOTE CONTROL This chapter describes the overview of the remote control system Remote Control Types of Systems The following two types of remote control systems can be configured depending on the interface Interface Overview The external controller controls the U3700 Series and other devices which are connected with each other through the GPIB in this system For more information refer to 6 2 GPIB Remote Control Sys GPIB Talker Listener mode tem on page 6 2 The external controller controls the U3700 Series and other devices which are connected with each other through LAN in this system For more information refer to 6 3 LAN Remote Control System on page 6 6 Selecting the Command Set Either the AT Advantest command set or SCPI command set is selected as a command set used fo
329. ude Accuracy 7 1 4 Amplitude Accuracy Description Specifications Calibration signal accuracy 20 MHz Frequency Amplitude Accuracy 20 MHz 20 dBm 0 3 dB Scale display accuracy Log 0 5 4 10 dB 0 5 dB 80 dB 0 2 4 dB Total level accuracy 7 1 5 Dynamic Range After performing the automatic calibration Signal level 10 dBm to 50 dBm Preamp Off Input attenuator 10 dB REF 0 dBm Temperature 20 C to 30 C 0 8 dB Frequency range 10 MHz to 3 GHz 1 0 dB Frequency range 9 kHz to 3 GHz Description Specifications Displayed average noise level Ref level lt 45 dBm RBW 100 Hz 123 dBm 2 f GHz dB f lt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 123 dBm 2 5 f GHz dB gt 2 5 GHz Preamp Off 138 dBm 3 f GHz dB Preamp On 1 dB gain compression Frequency range gt 20 MHz gt 5dBm Preamp Off gt 25 dBm Preamp On Second harmonic distortion lt 70 dBc Preamp Off Mixer input level 30 dBm Frequency gt 20 MHz Third order intermodulation distortion TOT Frequency range gt 20 MHz Preamp Off Mixer input level 20 dBm Frequency separation 200 kHz lt 60 dBc Image responses Multiple responses and Out of band responses lt 60 dBc Mixer input level 20 dBm Residual responses 7 4 Frequency gt 1 MHz Preamp Off lt 90 dBm U3700 Series User s Guide 7 1 6 Input and Output 7 1 6 Input and Output Description Specification
330. uency Limit line index Erase a Time Domain Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DELete TIME Limit line index Enable a Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 DISPlay 22 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 DISPlay Limit line index ON OFF Set Limit Lines Detection Type CALCulate LLINe 1 TYPE 2 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 TY PE Limit line index UPPer LOWer UPP LOW Set Limit Lines X axis Reference CALCulate LLINe CMODe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe FIXed RELative FIX REL Set Limit Lines X axis Reference CALCulate LLINe CMODe X 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X ABSolute CENTer LEFT ABS CENT LEFT Set Limit Lines Frequency Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet FREQuency 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet FREQuency Frequency Frequency Enable Limit Lines X axis Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet STATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet STATe ON OFF Set Limit Lines Time Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet TIME 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe X OFFSet TIME Select Limit Lines Y axis Positioning CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y 91 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y ABSolute TOP DLINe ABS TOP DLIN Set Limit Lines Y axis Offset CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet Relative amplitude Relative amplitude 6 81 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands F
331. uency CHANnel TABLe DATA 01 Channel Channel number Frequency Frequency Delete Channel Table SENSe FREQuency CHANnel TABLe DELete Query Current Measurement Func tion 1 SENSe FUNCtion NORMIACP HARMIIM OBW SEM SPUR TOTP XDB DBMH DBUH DBCH SG AM FM Auto tune SENSe TUNE AUTO Peak Zoom SENSe FREQuency SPAN ZOOM Set Harmonics Maximum Sweep Count SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Harmonics Averaging Control Mode SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Enable Harmonics Averaging SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe HARMonics AVERage STATe ON OFF Set User Defined Harmonics Fun damental Frequency SENSe HARMonics FUNDamental 1 1 SENSe HARMonics FUNDamental Frequency Frequency 6 99 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Function description Enable User Defined Harmonics Fundamental Frequency SCPI command SENSe HAR Monics FUNDamental STATe 1 1 SENSe STATe HARMonics FUNDamental Parameter Query reply Remarks Set Harmonics Maximum Order SENSe HARMonics NUMBer 1 1 SENSe HARMonics NUMBer Integer Integer Set Intermodulation Maximum Sweep
332. uency stability Residual FM When the internal frequency reference is used lt 60 Hz p p 100 ms Frequency span Range 0 5 kHz to Full Accuracy t 1 Signal purity 85 dBc Hz 10 kHz offset SPAN 200 kHz When the internal frequency reference is used Resolution bandwidth RBW Range 100 Hz to 1 MHz 1 3 sequence Accuracy 12 Video bandwidth VBW Range 10 Hz to 3 MHz 1 3 sequence 7 2 7 1 2 Sweep U3700 Series User s Guide 7 1 2 Sweep Description Specifications Sweep Sweep time setting range Zero span Spectrum mode Sweep time accuracy 50 us to 1000 s 20 ms to 1000 s 2 Zero Span Sweep mode CONTINUOUS SINGLE GATE Trigger function Trigger source 7 1 3 Amplitude Free run Video IF External Description Specifications Amplitude measurement range 30 dBm to displayed average noise level Maximum safe input level Average continuous power DC voltage 30 dBm Input attenuator gt 10 dB Preamp Off 13 dBm Input attenuator gt 0 dB Preamp On 50 VDCmax Input attenuator range 0 to 50 dB 10 dB step Display range 100 50 20 10 5 dB Linear Scale unit dBm dBmV dBuVemf dBpW W V Reference level setting range Log scale 140 dBm to 40 dBm Detector mode Normal Positive Peak Negative Peak Sample RMS Video Average 7 3 U3700 Series User s Guide 7 1 4 Amplit
333. unction description Enable Limit Line Y axis Offset SCPI command CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSetSTATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe CMODe Y OFFSet STATe Parameter Query reply Remarks Select Limit Line Domain CALCulate LLINe CONrol DOMain 21 1 CALCulate LLINe CONrol DOMain FREQuency TIME FREQ TIME Query Limit Line Application Result 1 CALCulate LLINe FAIL Pass Fail Result Enable Limit Line Application CALCulate LLINe TES Ting STATe 1 1 CALCulate LLINe TESTing STATe ON OFF 10 Execute Noise Per Herz CALCulate MARKer 1 FUNCtion 22 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Marker index NOISe OFF DBUV DBC NOIS OFF DBUV DBC Set Frequency Counter Position CALCulate MAR Ker FCOunt POSition 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt POSition Frequency Frequency Set Frequency Counter Resolution CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution 21 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution Frequency Frequency Query Frequency Counter Measure ment 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt X Frequency Enable Frequency Counter CALCulate MARKer FCOunt STATe 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt STATe ON OFF 10 Read Noise Measurement 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe Power per Herz Set Noise Per Herz Bandwidth CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe BANDwidth BWIDth 1 1 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion NOISe
334. upied Band Width SENSe OBWidth DATA SAVE Set Occupied Band Width Percent age SENSe OBWidth PERCent 1 1 SENSe OBWidth PERCent Percent Percent Select Occupied Band Width Trace SENSe OBWidth TRACe 1 1 SENSe OBWidth TRACe Trace index Trace index Set Spectrum Emission Mask Maxi mum Sweep Count SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage COUNt Integer Integer Set Spectrum Emission Mask Aver aging Control Mode 6 100 SENSe SEMask AVERage TCONrol 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage TCONrol ONCE SLIDe EXPonential ONCE SLID Function description Enable Spectrum Emission Mask Averaging SCPI command SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe 1 1 SENSe SEMask AVERage STATe Parameter U3700 Series User s Guide 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply Remarks Set Spectrum Emission Mask Car rier Band Width SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth 1 1 SENSe SEMask BANDwidth BWIDth Frequency Frequency Restore Spectrum Emission Mask Settings SENSe SEMask DATA LOAD Save Current Settings for Spectrum Emission Mask SENSe SEMask DATA SAVE Set Root Nyquist Filter Roll off Factor SEM SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC 1 1 SENSe SEMask FILTer RRC Number Number Set Root Nyquist Filter Symbol Rate SEM SENSe SEMask
335. ure 9 Press Execute ON OFF OFF The channel power measurement is canceled 4 54 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 10 Press CPL RBW AUTO MNL 1 0 0 kHz VBW AUTO MNL 1 and kHz The RBW is set to 100 kHz and the VBW is set to 1 kHz 11 Press MKR and then press to move the marker into a noise area 12 Press TRACE Calc Power Average Start Stop Start Max Sweep Count 3 0 and Hz Enter The Max Sweep Count is set to 30 750 REF 68 75 MKR 561 14 MHz 10 0 dB 17 00 SWEEP COUNT 30 68 7 CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SPAN 10 00 MHz SWP 130 ms 13 Press MEAS 2 Noise Hz 5 6 and MHz 750 REF 68 75 ind MKR 561 14 MHz 10 0 dB 16 66 NOISE HZ a MHz SPAN 10 00 MHz 1315 CENTER 557 14 MHz SLIDE 30 30 SWP 130 ms 14 Press dBuV Sqrt Hz ON OFF ON The measurement begins Power Avg Average START STOP 2 Max Sweep Count 3 Average PAUSE CONT Average ONCE SLIDE Noise Hz 1 Noise x Hz dBm Hz ON OFF 4 dBpV sqrt Hz ON OFF 5 dBc Hz ON OFF 4 55 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 5 CN Measurement in Terrestrial Digital Broadcasting 15 The measurement result is displayed in the Noise Marker 1 window N 34 26 dBuV Figure 4 22 Calculating the CN ratio The CN ratio can be obtained by calculating the
336. utputs screen data according to Config Specifies the copy output device FILE Selects an external USB memory device PRT Selects a printer Displays the File Config menu Selects either PNG portable network graphics or BMP bit map as the file format Sets the automatic incremental function of the file number ON Increments the file number when the screen data is copied OFF The file COPYxxx BMP PNG is overwritten Sets the start number to increment automatically U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM 5 14 Menu ON OFF Hides the soft menu area when a copy is output ON Displays the menu OFF Hides the menu Ti dul A A LL il CENTER 20 000 MHz SPAN 2 000 MHz RBW 30 kHz VBW 30 kHz SWP 20 ms ATT 10 dB File Control Displays the Shot File menu Displays the Files window Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 8 5 MB Free 237 7 MB Files Preview File Name 000 001 png 002 png copy003 pnq 1 3 003 4 Rename File Changes the selected filename Remove File Deletes the selected file Write Protect ON OFF Write protects the selected file ON Prevents data from being written to the file OFF Allows data to be written to the file Media Print Config Paper Format U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Selects the media on which to save data Selects the external USB memory device in the dialog box Copy Files Media Name T
337. values which are measured from the carrier C and noise N level measurements C a value in step 8 N a value in step 15 CN ratio C N 58 33 34 26 24 07 dB 4 56 U3700 Series User s Guide 4 4 6 4 4 6 Television Signal Measurement Television Signal Measurement Japanese television channels are pre saved to OPT15 75 Q input option The table can be read using the Recall function and a measurement frequency can be set using the channel number Registered files and setting conditions 1 CATV channel See 6 1 2_VHF amp UHF_CH VHF and UHF channels See A 6 2 3_BS_IF_CH 5 channel See A 6 4 4 CS IF CH CS IF channel See A 6 5 5 Digital CH Terrestrial digital channel See A 6 3 6 Digital Noise Terrestrial digital noise measurement 7 Digital ChPower Terrestrial digital channel power measurement Recall the file and refer to the registered channel table The center frequency can be set using the channel number Change SPAN REF LEVEL and input attenuator settings according to the operating environment NOTE When the 6 Digital Noise file is recalled the input attenuator is set to 0 dB Be careful of the input signal level Example of recalling the 7 Digital ChPower file and measuring the Channel 28 power Procedure 1 Press FILE and Recall The Recall window is displayed 2 Turn the knob to select the 7 Digital ChPower dat file 75 Q 2007 Feb 16 17 2
338. versus Time Frequency Position DISPlay ZOOM TIME CENTer 1 1 DISPlay ZOOM TIME CENTer Frequency Frequency Set Averaging Count DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 AVERage COUNt 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 AVERage COUNt Context index Trace index Integer Integer Set Trace Calculation Mode 6 86 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 CALCulate MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 CALCulate MODE Context index Trace index WRITe MAXHold MAXCont MINHold VideoAVG PowerAVG WRIT MAXH MAXC MINH VAVG PAVG Function description Select Trace Mode SCPI command DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MODE 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 MODE U3700 Series User s Guide Parameter Context index Trace index WRITe MAXHold MAXCont MINHold VideoAVG PowerAVG VIEW BLANK 6 10 3 List of Commands Query reply WRIT MAXH MAXC MINH VAVG PAVG VIEW BLAN Remarks Enable Trace Power Average Pause DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG PAUSe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG PAUSe Context index Trace index ON OFF Enable Trace Video Average DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG STATe 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG STATe Context index Trace index ON OFF Set Trace Power Average Control Mode DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG TCONrol 3 1 DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe 2 PAVG TCONrol Context index
339. ves 6 33 MLS P 6 35 EIMASET J asa saa theta 6 33 MEN 6 35 LIMPOS uqa aaa eter 6 33 lt gt 6 35 LIMS 55s iste et uma Rd 6 33 55 6 36 LIMSF eene 6 33 6 36 6 33 nsi eee rrr Reg 6 35 6 27 MLTSCR eere 6 34 LEO E 6 51 e RE RR RE HE 6 38 LMTA 6 33 MNRE eese tte ER ere d 6 51 EMTADELF 6 33 eerte nei 6 35 LMTADELT 6 33 MPA H 6 36 LMTAINE 6 33 MPM 6 36 6 33 MR MKRL 6 37 EMTB ug 6 33 MS icti rtr tener 6 54 LMTBDELF 1 re 6 34 6 37 EMTBDELT 6 34 6 54 U3700 Series User s Guide 6 7 AT Command Index MW 6 54 MZ REY 6 54 NI eec rt 6 39 NIC 6 39 hulm 6 39 NIM isst ete tonis tet HEUS 6 39 nte ERR eset es 6 39 NIRES esee tiu tessuti 6 39 NIU 6 39 NORM 6 53 6 54 NIV e Nl 6 54 NX 6 38 6 38 EE Ee 6 38 6 38 OB W
340. w as the search range Window Position Sets the center position of the window defined by Couple to Win Window Width Sets the window width defined by Couple to Win Y Search Domain Displays the Y PK Area menu Couple to DL OFF ABV BLW Sets a peak search range on the vertical axis OFF ABV BLW Display Line ON OFF ON OFF Sets the full range as the search range Sets the range above the display line as the search range Sets the range below the display line as the search range Displays the display line Sets the position of the display line Hides the display line Couple to Line 1 OFF ABV BLW Specifies the search range for limit line 1 OFF ABV BLW Does not specify the search range related to limit line 1 Specifies the range above limit line 1 as the search range Specifies the range below limit line 1 as the search range Couple to Line 2 OFF ABV BLW Specifies the search range for limit line 2 OFF ABV BLW Does not specify the search range related to limit line 2 Specifies the range above limit line 2 as the search range Specifies the range below limit line 2 as the search range U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 10 PEAK Edit Limit Lines Limit Line 1 2 Delete Entry Insert Entry Table Init More 1 2 Min Peak Next Min Peak Min Max Peak Peak List Frequency 5 52 REF 30 00 dBm 10 0 dB 130 START 30 0 MHz Displays the Limit Line m
341. weep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ch Windows ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Nyq Roll Off Factor Insert Channel Delete Channel Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Averaging ON OFF Max Sweep Count Average ONCE SLIDE Carrier Bandwidth Ref Power CHN PEAK Ch Windows ON OFF Show Mask ON OFF Nyquist Filter ON OFF Nyq Symbol Rate Roll Off Factor Delete Band L Init Table Restore Defaults Save Defaults Insert Band Delete Band Init Table Table No 1 2 3 Previous Band Next Band Restore Defaults Save Defaults Noise x Hz MEAS2 MEAS 2 m Noise Hz X dB Down Intermod Harmonic Frequency Counter More 1 2 AM Meas ON OFF Sound FM Meas Execute ON OFF dBm Hz ON OFF dBmV sqrt Hz ON OFF dBc Hz ON OFF Ly Execute X dB Down Execute X dB Left Execute X dB Right X dB Level Display REL ABL ABR More 1 2 Continuous Down ON OFF Peak X dB Down L Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Max Order Limit Setup Pass Fail ON OFF L Default Conditions gt L Execute ON OFF Average Control On Trace A B C Harmonic Max Order Fundamental ON OFF Execute ON OFF Counter Position Link to Marker ON OFF Resolution Mod Freq to Sweep Time ON OFF Peak D
342. wer 2 3 5 3 3 Attachment of a Ferrite Core 1 3 9 3 4 Attachment Ferrite Core 2 3 9 3 5 POWER EN 3 10 3 6 Initial Screen fei u uy 3 11 3 7 Connecting the CAL Signal 3 12 4 1 Front Pan ll eno ene otiose niente acc ePi EMI LL CER 4 1 4 2 Extended Function Key 4 2 4 3 Sol Key Bloc u H uqaqa 4 3 4 4 Input and Output Connectors Block eese 4 4 4 5 Operation Key Block 4 5 4 6 Screen Display oerte at erede m erit itur irt nuit tarte 4 7 4 7 Rear Panel T 4 9 4 8 Initial Setting Screen inier ter D e RR ERR HERUNTER REESE 4 14 4 9 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUTI connector 4 15 4 10 Connecting the CAL Signal RF INPUT2 connector 4 16 4 11 Connecting the CAL Signal n nennen enne enne nennen nennen 4 18 4 12 Setting the Center Frequency ER EET ERE E ARRAS 4 19 4 13 Completing the Setting of the measurement conditions 4 19 4 14 Displaying the Peak Search ciere eee tir render ido 4 20 4 15 Measuring the Difference of Frequency and Level by Using the Delta Marker 4 21 4 16 Connecting the
343. witch the setting by pressing the soft key Press MKR The following Marker menu is displayed 1 Select Marker 2 Marker ON OFF 3 Marker Trace A B C 4 Delta Mode W 5 Peak Menu W 6 Clear All 7 More 1 2 Switching the setting If a menu includes a dual state button such as ON OFF or AUTO MNL the state can be switched by pressing the soft key The selected setting 15 displayed convexly The non selected setting 1s displayed concavely Example Press 2 Marker ON OFF The setting 1s turned OFF and the markers disappear Press 2 Marker ON OFF again to turn the setting ON and the markers re ap pear Sub menu display Pressing a soft key which has W to the right of the menu displays a sub menu Example Press 4 Delta Mode W The following Peak menu is displayed 1 Delta ON OFF U3700 Series User s Guide 4 2 1 Menu Operation and Data Entry 4 12 RETURN Press RETURN to return to the previous menu from the sub menu Using SHIFT The SHIFT key is used for selecting functions which are indicated in green on the key These functions are described below PRESET Returns to the initial settings ROOT Returns the soft menu to the top menu RFI Selects RF INPUT1 U3771 U3772 Selects RF INPUT2 U3771 U3772 To perform the function which is written on the key in green press the SHIFT key and then press each key Pressing the SHIFT key turns on its LED and the shift mode is available Press th
344. x BIN Saves the data in binary format Only binary formats can be saved in the internal memory The settings of files saved in binary format can be recalled XML Savesthe data in XML format Files which are saved in XML format can be read easily but the settings cannot be recalled Formats external USB memory devices Do not remove the memory device while the memory is being for matted U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 3 FILE Recall Recalls file which was saved in binary format and displays the set tings and trace data Displays the Recall window Execute Recall in the same mode as when the file was saved Mode is displayed in File Info of the Recall window The font color is green for a Recall enabled file and red for a Recall dis abled file Green Recall can be executed Red Recall cannot be executed Media USB Device 0 Partition 0 134 1 Free 245 7 Files File Info fus03 dat File Name Mode fus01 dat fus02 dat fus03 dat Traces Context fus04 dat Setup v ON Traces Context B A Limit Lines 1 Channel ACP SEM Spurious 1 Corr Factor Iz NI al 503 Recall Cancel Items Selects items to be saved Displays the Items dialog box Items Setup v Traces Context A A Traces Context B A Limit Lines 1 Channel ACP SEM Spurious Corr Factor Normalize Context Setup Saves the setting conditions Trace Context A A B C Saves the trace da
345. xpected life spans or recommended time of replacement only for the user s reference It does not guarantee the life of the components Table 9 1 Limited Life Parts Name Life Reference values provided by manufacturer Panel key switch 10 operations Key switch with LED 10 operations LCD back light 50 000 hours Rotary encoder 25 x 10 operations Cooling fan 40 000 hours Lithium battery cells for data backup About 3 years Mechanical relay For EXT DC 10 operations U3700 Series User s Guide 9 4 Method of Storing the Instrument 94 Method of Storing the Instrument When you store this instrument keep it in an environment that meets the following requirements Reduced vibration Not dusty Protected from direct sunlight Ambient temperature range 20 C to 60 C Relative humidity 30 to 85 When you do not use the instrument for 90 days or more store it in an appropriate moisture proof bag with desiccant 95 Transportation For transportation use the packing materials used for the shipping of this instrument If you use other materials pack the instrument using the following procedure 19 2 Install the protection cover of the touch screen display this instrument Cover the instrument with a protective plastic sheet Put desiccant inside for protection from mois ture Prepare a carton case The panels of the case must be 5 mm or more thick The inner dimens
346. ype Free Size Dev 0 USB Device 121 7 MB122 1 MB NOTE Data cannot be saved in the internal memory Selects the paper size and print direction Color Mode Color Gray Menu ON OFF Config Driver Selects either color or gray scale in the Print Config mode Displays or hides the soft menu when a file is printed ON Displays the menu OFF Hides the menu Selects a printer driver to be used The Printer Driver Management window is displayed Printer Driver Management Driver files Manufacturer EPSON epson pxv500 Model PX V500 00 1800 epson r200 Recommended epson pxv500 Last used 500 500 Test driver Default Driver files Printer drivers registered in this instrument are listed Select a driver name to be used by using the knob Your choice The selected driver name is displayed Test driver Starts a test printing using the selected driver Default This instrument automatically selects a driver 5 15 U3700 Series User s Guide 5 2 1 SYSTEM Use it Decides to use the selected driver Self Test Displays the Self Test menu Execute Self Test Executes the self test The self test is the same as when the power turns on Test Items 1 B oS Supply Voltage Memory CPU Registers RF Registers RF PLL LOCK LO Registers LO PLL LOCK AIF Registers AIF PLL LOCK 10 TG Registers 11

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

フジエクセルルーフ  _ お取扱いの前に  User-manual U-series U170  Certificats d`économies d`énergie  Handleiding Betriebsanleitung Operating instructions  Philips Suspension light 40227/11/76  Notice Originale Original Instructions  HP Jetdirect-Administratorhandbuch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file